CNC SYSTEM

OSP-P300S/P300M/P300S-e/P300M-e
OSP-P300SA/P300MA/P300SA-e/P300MA-e
OPERATION MANUAL
(11th Edition)
Pub No. 6115-E-R10 (ME32-125-R11) Feb. 2018
 6115-E P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from
hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety
devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-
free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which
Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.

1. Precautions Relating to Installation

(1) Please be noted about a primary power supply as follows.

 Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major
noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this
could cause malfunction of the CNC unit.

 If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is
no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large
amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).

(2) Installation Environment

Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.

 Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.

 Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.

 Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive
vibrations or shock.

 The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 5 to 40°C (41 to
104°F).

 The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is relative humidity 50%
or less at 40°C (104°F) (no condensation).

 The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water,
chips, and dust.

(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there
are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.

(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL
ON switch on the operation panel.
 6115-E P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance with the daily
inspection procedure described in this instruction manual.

(2) Use tools whose dimensions and type are appropriate for the work undertaken and the machine
specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents.

(3) Do not, for any reason, touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the
spindle could rotate: this is dangerous.

(4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured.

(5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous.

(6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always
stop the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom.

(7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the
machine with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so.

(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.

(9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating.

(10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous.

(11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.

4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the ATC magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible
that a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to
danger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.

(2) Always inspect and change tools in the ATC magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.

(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause
misoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips
further in.

(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the
power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.

5. On Finishing Work
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.

(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.

(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.

(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the
main power disconnect switch.
 6115-E P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Trouble Occurs
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the
following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has
occurred.

(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the
machine.

(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need
to be taken.

(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.

(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were
and secure them properly with their screws, etc.

(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.

(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.

(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.

b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in
the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted
to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.

 MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.

c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory
is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are
handled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service
personnel should handle these boards.
 6115-E P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unit

The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive
temperature rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit.
Inspect the following points every three months.

 Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.

 Is the external air inlet blocked?

If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.

7. General Precautions
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.

(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.

(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine
operators must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.

(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct
procedure before operating the machine.

(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.

(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-
voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.

(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
 6115-E P-(v)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

8. Symbols Used in This Manual

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of
particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.
 6115-E P-(i)
INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Thank you very much for choosing our CNC system. This numerical control system is a expandable CNC
with various features. Major features of the CNC system are described below.

(1) Compact and highly reliable

The CNC system has become compact and highly reliable because of advanced hardware technology,
including computer boards equipped with high speed microprocessors, I/O link, and servo link. The
‘variable software’ as a technical philosophy of the OSPs supported by a hard disk. Functions may be
added to the CNC system as required after delivery.

(2) NC operation panels

The following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.

 Thin color operation panels (horizontal)

 Thin color operation panels (vertical)

One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.

(3) Machining management functions

These functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability from
small quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major control
functions are described below.

a. Reduction of setup time

With increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently needed. The
simplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents necessary for setup,
such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controlling
drawings and further reduce the setup time.

b. Production Status Monitor

The progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the CNC
system.

c. Reduction of troubleshooting time

Correct information is quickly available for troubleshooting.

(4) Help functions

When an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm.
This helps take quick action against the alarm.

To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this instruction
manual before use.
Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.

About Description Items

This manual may include descriptions regarding the
specifications that are not provided in your CNC system and the
specifications that cannot be added to your machine.

Screens
Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the
screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown
in this manual.
 6115-E P-(i)
CONSTRUCTION OF THIS MANUAL

CONSTRUCTION OF THIS MANUAL

This instruction manual consists of five chapters.

FUNDAMENTALS
This chapter describes the specifications, part names, and functions. Description of the part names and
functions includes explanation of switches on the NC operation panels, screen transition, and basic
operations on each screen.

OPERATION
This chapter describes how to operate the machine from the NC operation panel for different operation modes
(manual, MDI, and automatic). The on-screen operating procedures are described in each operation mode.

DATA OPERATION
This chapter describes file operations, programming operations, parameter and data setting and other data
related operations.
Just like the chapter of Operation, descriptions are given by data setting mode (run screen, tool data setting,
parameter setting, and Program operations).

APPENDIX
Appendix includes view of operation panels, tables of EIA/ISO codes, and lists of G codes, M codes, and
system variables.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (separate manual)

Some of the functions of the machine and CNC system are described. A description of the concept necessary
for functional operations is added for your further understanding.
 6115-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FUNDAMENTALS
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION ...........................................................1
1-1. Operation Panels ............................................................................................................... 1
1-1-1. Basic Construction of Operation Panels.............................................................. 1
1-1-2. Guide to Controls on Operation Panels............................................................... 2
1-2. Screens ........................................................................................................................... 20
1-2-1. Mode Transition Charts ..................................................................................... 20
1-2-2. Screen Operations ............................................................................................ 31
1-3. One-touch Window Close Operation ............................................................................... 34

OPERATION
SECTION 1 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF ..............................................35
1-1. Turning the Power ON ..................................................................................................... 35
1-2. Turning the Power OFF ................................................................................................... 35
1-3. Emergency Stop .............................................................................................................. 35

SECTION 2 OPERATION MODES .........................................................................36

2-1. Operation Mode Basic Screen......................................................................................... 36
2-1-1. Screen Display .................................................................................................. 36
2-1-2. Pop-up Windows ............................................................................................... 38

SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION........................................................................40

3-1. Axis Feed Operations ...................................................................................................... 40
3-1-1. Manual Rapid Traverse Operation .................................................................... 40
3-1-2. Manual Cutting Feed Operation ........................................................................ 41
3-1-3. Pulse Handle Feed............................................................................................ 42
3-1-4. Travel to Specified Position............................................................................... 43
3-2. Spindle Operation ............................................................................................................ 50
3-2-1. Starting the Spindle ........................................................................................... 50
3-2-2. Stopping the Spindle ......................................................................................... 50
3-2-3. Releasing the Spindle ....................................................................................... 50
3-2-4. Spindle Orientation............................................................................................ 50
3-2-5. Spindle Override 1% ......................................................................................... 51
3-3. ATC ................................................................................................................................. 52
3-3-1. ATC Operation .................................................................................................. 52
3-3-2. Manual Tool Change Operation ........................................................................ 60
3-3-3. Manual Magazine Operation ............................................................................. 61
 6115-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3-3-4. Manual Tool Change during Automatic Operation ............................................ 62

3-4. APC ................................................................................................................................. 63
3-4-1. APC Operation .................................................................................................. 63
3-4-2. Automatic APC Operations ............................................................................... 65
3-4-3. Manual APC Operation ..................................................................................... 66

SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION ................................................................................67

4-1. Procedure for MDI Operation .......................................................................................... 67
4-2. Automatic Operation and MDI Operation ........................................................................ 68
4-3. Subprogram Call in MDI Operation ................................................................................. 69
4-4. MDI Input Selection Function .......................................................................................... 70
4-4-1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 70
4-4-2. Procedure.......................................................................................................... 70
4-4-3. Parameter.......................................................................................................... 71
4-4-4. Error message................................................................................................... 71

SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION..................................................................73

5-1. Program Files .................................................................................................................. 73
5-2. Program Selection ........................................................................................................... 75
5-2-1. Selection of Main/Subprogram .......................................................................... 75
5-2-2. Schedule Program Function.............................................................................. 78
5-3. Cycle Start and Slide Hold............................................................................................... 80
5-3-1. Cycle Start......................................................................................................... 80
5-3-2. Slide Hold .......................................................................................................... 80
5-4. Resetting the NC ............................................................................................................. 82
5-5. Sequence Number Search and Mid-Cycle Start.............................................................. 83
5-5-1. Sequence Number Search ................................................................................ 83
5-5-2. Mid-Cycle Start (Start after Sequence Number Search) ................................... 86
5-6. RESTART and Sequence Restart ................................................................................... 87
5-6-1. RESTART.......................................................................................................... 87
5-6-2. Sequence Restart.............................................................................................. 89
5-7. Sequence Stop (Optional) ............................................................................................... 91
5-8. Single Block ..................................................................................................................... 93
5-9. Optional Block Skip ......................................................................................................... 94
5-10. Program Branch (Optional).............................................................................................. 94
5-11. Optional Stop ................................................................................................................... 94
5-12. Mirror Image Function ..................................................................................................... 95
5-12-1. Mirror Image (Local Coordinate System) .......................................................... 95
5-12-2. Mirror Image Function in Work Coordinate System .......................................... 98
5-13. Override ......................................................................................................................... 101
5-13-1. Feedrate Override ........................................................................................... 101
5-13-2. Spindle Override.............................................................................................. 102
 6115-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-14. Manual Intervention and Restart ................................................................................... 103

5-15. Pulse Handle Shift Operation ........................................................................................ 106
5-16. Lock Functions .............................................................................................................. 107
5-16-1. Machine Lock .................................................................................................. 107
5-16-2. Axis Command Cancel.................................................................................... 107
5-16-3. Auxiliary (S.T.M) Function Lock ...................................................................... 108
5-17. Dry Run ......................................................................................................................... 109
5-18. Library Program Registration......................................................................................... 110
5-18-1. Registering a Library Program ........................................................................ 111
5-18-2. Erasing a Library Program .............................................................................. 112
5-18-3. Initializing Library Program Storage Buffer Area ............................................. 112
5-18-4. Specifying the Library Program Storage Buffer Area Size .............................. 113
5-19. Editing Selected Program .............................................................................................. 114
5-19-1. QUICK EDIT Function ..................................................................................... 114
5-19-2. Editing the Main Program................................................................................ 116
5-20. Operation End Lamp (Optional)..................................................................................... 117
5-21. Operation End Buzzer (Optional) .................................................................................. 117
5-22. Alarm Lamp (Optional) .................................................................................................. 117
5-23. Automatic Power OFF ................................................................................................... 117
5-24. Work Counter (Optional)................................................................................................ 118
5-25. Hour Meter (Optional) .................................................................................................... 119
5-25-1. Control Power On Time Hour Meter................................................................ 119
5-25-2. NC Running Time Hour Meter......................................................................... 119
5-25-3. Cutting Time Hour Meter ................................................................................. 119
5-25-4. Spindle Rotating Time Hour Meter .................................................................. 119

SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY ...................................120

6-1. AUTO OPERATION Screen Display ............................................................................. 120
6-1-1. ACTUAL POSI sheet....................................................................................... 121
6-1-2. WK SETUP sheet............................................................................................ 145
6-2. ACTUAL POSITION Display ......................................................................................... 154
6-2-1. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 1/4......................................................... 154
6-2-2. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 2/4 (RELATIVE ACTUAL
POSITION Display Screen)............................................................................. 159
6-2-3. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 3/4 (Detail Display Screen) ................... 162
6-2-4. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 4/4......................................................... 163
6-3. MAIN PROGRAM Display ............................................................................................. 164
6-3-1. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Machine Conditions........................... 164
6-3-2. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Subprogram ...................................... 165
6-3-3. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Valid G/M Code................................. 166
6-3-4. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Schedule Program ............................ 167
6-4. SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display................................................................................... 168
6-4-1. SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display Screen with Machine Conditions ................ 168
 6115-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

6-4-2. SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display Screen with Main Program ......................... 169
6-5. MDI PROGRAM Display................................................................................................ 170
6-6. BLOCK DATA Display ................................................................................................... 171

SECTION 7 HELP FUNCTION..............................................................................173

7-1. HELP Screen ................................................................................................................. 173
7-1-1. Using the Menu Display Area.......................................................................... 174
7-1-2. Item Selection from Contents Screen.............................................................. 174
7-2. Search ........................................................................................................................... 175
7-3. Terminating Help Screen ............................................................................................... 175
7-4. Supplementary Information ........................................................................................... 175

DATA OPERATION
SECTION 1 DATA SETTING MODES...................................................................176
1-1. Guide to Modes ............................................................................................................. 176

SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING ......................................................................177

2-1. Basic Operation with Tool Data Setting ......................................................................... 177
2-2. Tool Data Operation ...................................................................................................... 178
2-2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA...................................................................................... 182
2-2-2. EDIT TOOL DATA........................................................................................... 185
2-2-3. DELETE TOOL DATA ..................................................................................... 185
2-2-4. TOOL DATA SEARCH .................................................................................... 187
2-2-5. TOOL DATA FILTER....................................................................................... 188
2-2-6. Sorting Tool Data ............................................................................................ 189
2-2-7. COPY TOOL DATA......................................................................................... 189
2-2-8. TOOL DATA IN / OUT..................................................................................... 190
2-2-9. Relation Parameters........................................................................................ 197
2-3. Operating the MAGAZINE INFO. .................................................................................. 198
2-3-1. INSERT TOOL ................................................................................................ 200
2-3-2. EDIT TOOL DATA........................................................................................... 203
2-3-3. REGIST INSERT TOOL DATA ....................................................................... 203
2-3-4. DETACH TOOL............................................................................................... 204
2-3-5. OPERATE TOOL ............................................................................................ 206
2-3-6. TOOL DATA SEARCH .................................................................................... 209
2-3-7. SPINDLE/POT................................................................................................. 209
2-3-8. Tool model nose position check (when the Collision Avoidance
System function is provided) ........................................................................... 209
2-4. Options in the TOOL DATA SETTING window.............................................................. 212
2-5. TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION................................................................................ 213
2-5-1. Other Operations............................................................................................. 215
 6115-E P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING....................................................................216

3-1. Types of Parameter ....................................................................................................... 216
3-2. Basic Parameter Setting Operations ............................................................................. 217
3-2-1. Parameter Setting Screens ............................................................................. 217
3-2-2. Setting Parameters.......................................................................................... 218
3-2-3. Other Operations............................................................................................. 221
3-3. Setting the Parameters .................................................................................................. 223
3-3-1. General Parameters ........................................................................................ 223
3-3-2. NC Optional Parameters ................................................................................. 239
3-3-3. Machine User Parameter ................................................................................ 267
3-3-4. Machine System Parameter ............................................................................ 289

SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION ...........................................................300

4-1. Parameter Input/Output Operations .............................................................................. 300
4-1-1. INPUT.............................................................................................................. 301
4-1-2. OUTPUT.......................................................................................................... 303
4-1-3. VERIFY ........................................................................................................... 308
4-1-4. Correspondence between Q Numbers and Parameters ................................. 311
4-1-5. Data Format .................................................................................................... 313
4-1-6. Supplementary Explanation of Parameter Input/Output Function ................... 314

SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS................................................................316

5-1. Basic Screen in the Program Operation Mode .............................................................. 316
5-1-1. DIRECTORY Screen....................................................................................... 316
5-1-2. PROGRAM EDITING Screen.......................................................................... 317
5-2. Program File Operations ............................................................................................... 320
5-2-1. Changing the Directory Display....................................................................... 321
5-2-2. Creating a New File or Directory ..................................................................... 327
5-2-3. Displaying a Program Source.......................................................................... 328
5-2-4. Copying a File or Directory.............................................................................. 329
5-2-5. Renaming a File or Directory........................................................................... 331
5-2-6. Deleting a File or Directory.............................................................................. 332
5-2-7. Protecting a File or Directory........................................................................... 333
5-2-8. File/Directory Operations................................................................................. 334
5-3. Program Editing Operations .......................................................................................... 348
5-3-1. Copy ................................................................................................................ 350
5-3-2. Delete .............................................................................................................. 351
5-3-3. Paste ............................................................................................................... 352
5-3-4. 1 Line Insert..................................................................................................... 352
5-3-5. 1 Character Delete .......................................................................................... 353
5-3-6. Overwrite/Insert ............................................................................................... 353
5-3-7. Another File ..................................................................................................... 354
5-3-8. Find ................................................................................................................. 357
 6115-E P-(vi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-3-9. Replace ........................................................................................................... 358

5-3-10. Line Jump........................................................................................................ 360
5-3-11. Sequence No. Arrange.................................................................................... 362
5-3-12. File Insert......................................................................................................... 364
5-3-13. Save ................................................................................................................ 365
5-3-14. Quit / Stop ....................................................................................................... 366
5-3-15. Select & Quit ................................................................................................... 367
5-3-16. Save and Select .............................................................................................. 367
5-4. Device Information Operations ...................................................................................... 368
5-5. FD0 Initialization ............................................................................................................ 369
5-6. RS232C ......................................................................................................................... 369
5-6-1. Input/Output Operation.................................................................................... 370
5-6-2. Tape Format.................................................................................................... 376
5-6-3. Specifications for RS232C Interface ............................................................... 378
5-6-4. Connection with External Device..................................................................... 380
5-7. Preference Setting Operations ...................................................................................... 388
5-7-1. File Pattern ...................................................................................................... 389
5-7-2. Sort.................................................................................................................. 390
5-7-3. Display Property .............................................................................................. 391

APPENDIX
SECTION 1 APPENDIX ........................................................................................392
1-1. Optional Parameter ....................................................................................................... 392

SECTION 2 CODE TABLE ....................................................................................425

2-1. EIA/ISO Code Table ...................................................................................................... 425
FUNDAMENTALS
 6115-E P-1
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

1-1. Operation Panels

1-1-1. Basic Construction of Operation Panels

The machine has eight human-machine interfaces with different applications:

(1) NC Operation Panel

Used for operations other than those in the manual mode, such as file operations and data
setting.

(2) Machine Operation Panel

Features the switches and keys used mainly for manual operation.

(3) Option Panel

Used with special machine specifications that require additional switches and indicating lamps.
The arrangement of the switches and indicating lamps differs depending on the selected
optional specification.

(4) Manual Tool Change Panel

Used for changing tools manually.
The arrangement of the switches differs depending on the machine model.

(5) Manual Magazine Operation Panel

Used for operating the magazine manually.
The arrangement of the switches differs depending on the machine model.

(6) APC Operation Panel (for Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC)

Used for operating the pallet changer manually.
The arrangement of the switches differs depending on the machine model.

(7) AAC Operation Panel

Used for changing attachments manually.

(8) Manual Attachment Tool Change Panel

Used for changing tools manually for attachment.
 6115-E P-2
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

1-1-2. Guide to Controls on Operation Panels

Operation Mode Selection Keys

(1) [AUTO] Key

Pressed to select the automatic operation mode, in which a part
program stored in the memory disk (MD) is read to the working
memory of the NC and executed.
ME32125R1100500020001

(2) [MDI] Key

Pressed to select the MDI operation mode, in which a program is
written one block at a time from the keyboard of the NC operation
panel and executed in the same way as in automatic operation.
ME32125R1100500020002

(3) [MANUAL] Key

Pressed to select the manual operation mode, in which the manual
operation switches on the machine operation panel, pulse handle
operation box, etc., are used to operate the machine.
ME32125R1100500020003

Data Setting Mode Selection Keys

(1) [RUN SCREEN] Key

Pressed to select the run screen, in which the current position, animated
simulation, program, and machine status are displayed, or workpiece zero is set
in workpiece setup.
32125R1100500030001
(2) [EDIT AUX.] Key
Pressed to select the program operation mode, in which program files and data
files can be edited, input, output, and managed.

32125R1100500030002
(3) [TOOL DATA] Key
Pressed to select the tool data mode, in which unique data and management
data of each tool and ATC tool data can be set.

32125R1100500030003
(4) [PARAMETER] Key
Pressed to select the parameter mode, in which the following parameters are set,
changed and displayed: zero offset value, system parameter, user parameter,
common variables, NC optional parameter, machine system parameter and
machine user parameter.
32125R1100500030004

(5) [MacMan] Key

Pressed to select the MacMan mode, in which the machining management
function can be used.

32125R1100500030005
 6115-E P-3
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

NC Operation Panel

(1) Help Key

This is the key found at the left of F1 function key.
This key is used to display descriptions of alarms during machine operation,
programs, and operations. 2125R1100500050012

(2) Function Keys: F1 to F8

When the operator selects an operation mode, the functions (operations) needed in the
selected mode are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The function keys (F1 to F8)
correspond to the displays and the functions are executed by pressing the corresponding
function key.
The function keys to be displayed are those enabled in the current step of the operation in the
mode currently selected.

ME32125R1100500050001

(3) Extend Key

This is the key found at the right of F8 function key.
The [Extend] key is enabled only when a triangular mark is displayed at the right
end of the function menu. It is used when all of the accessible items in a function 2125R1100500050002
menu cannot be displayed at one time; pressing the [Extend] key changes the
function menu.

(4) Sheet Keys

Pressing the sheet key selects the sheet on the displayed screen while
moving in the direction of the selected arrow.

ME32125R1100500050003
(5) Page Keys
When the information called out is displayed in more than one page,
the page keys are used to change the display page.

ME32125R1100500050004
(6) Cursor Keys
These keys move the screen cursor in the direction of the arrow on
the key.

ME32125R1100500050005
 6115-E P-4
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(7) Character Keys

The character keys are used to input characters for data
input, program operation, and file editing operations.
To input the character shown at the upper right corner of the
key top, press the key while holding down the [Shift] key.
While the [Caps Lock] key is pressed (Caps Lock indication
in the status display bar is lit), letters are entered in upper
case alphabet (A to Z). The case is switched between lower
(a to z) and upper (A to Z) alternately by pressing the [Caps
Lock] key.
The [Caps Lock] key is on (input in upper case) by default.

ME32125R1100500050006
(8) Numeric Keys
The numeric keys are used to input numbers for data input,
program creation, or in file editing.

ME32125R1100500050007
(9) Operator Keys
The operator keys are used to enter multiple data using operators in program
editing and data setting.

125R1100500050008
(10) BS (Backspace) Key
When you have made a mistake in entering characters, pressing this key deletes
the character input last.

125R1100500050009
 6115-E P-5
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(11) Cancel Key

Pressing this key deletes a line of data that have not been confirmed.

125R1100500050010
(12) Write Key
Pressing this key confirms the selection or input data in various modes.

125R1100500050011
 6115-E P-6
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Machine Panel

The flat keys on the machine operation panel have the features indicated below depending on
whether or not they have indicating lamps.

<Flat keys with an indicating lamp>

The indicating lamp in a key indicates if the function of the key is enabled or not.

 Indicating lamp lit: The key function is enabled.

 Indicating lamp unlit: The key function is disabled.

<Flat keys without an indicating lamp>

The function of the key is enabled only while the key is held down. The function is disabled when the
key is not pressed.

ON/OFF switch panel

(1) [CONTROL ON] Switch

This switch is enabled with the machine main switch ON.
The pilot lamp in the switch lights up when the control power is turned on.
The pilot lamp goes off when the [EMG. STOP] button is pressed.
To recover from the emergency stop state, press the [CONTROL ON] switch
again. ME32125R1100500060001

(2) [CONTROL OFF] Switch

Turn off the control power of the NC unit by pressing this switch before
turning the machine main switch to OFF.

ME32125R1100500060002
(3) [AUTO SHUT OFF] Switch
The power is shut off when the required conditions are met with the [AUTO
SHUT OFF] switch lamp lit.
For the detail, refer to SECTION 5, 5-23. Automatic Power OFF in
OPERATION.
ME32125R1100500060003
(4) [NC PANEL] Switch
When UNLOCK is selected, all operations at the NC and machine
operation panels are enabled.
When EDIT LOCK is selected, operations in the EDIT AUX and
PARAMETER modes at the NC operation panel are disabled.
When LOCK is selected, , all operations at the NC operation panel
are disabled.
ME32125R1100500060004

(5) [DOOR INTERLOCK] Switch

For the detail of the door interlock function, refer to “the door interlock by
the operator door” in the separate Instruction Manual for Safety Door
Interlock Function.

ME32125R1100500060005
 6115-E P-7
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Start switch panel

(1) [EMG. STOP] Button

Pressing this button shuts off the power to the operation circuit.
To release the emergency stop, unlock the [EMG. STOP] button and
then press the [CONTROL ON] button.

ME32125R1100500060006
(2) [CYCLE START] Button
This button is used to start machine operation as directed by the
commands (given in a program).
The CYCLE START signal is output when the button is pressed and then
released.

ME32125R1100500190001
(3) [SLIDE HOLD] Button
Pressing this button stops motion of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes and additional
axes immediately.
To resume axis motion, press the [CYCLE START] button.
If none of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes nor the additional axes are moving when
the button is pressed, the slide hold state is established when the current
sequence is completed, or when the next axis motion starts.

ME32125R1100500190002
 6115-E P-8
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Machine Operation Panel (Spindle operation)

Keys for spindle operation are collected in one place.

ME32125R1100500190003

(1) Spindle Override Keys

This key is used to select what percentage of the spindle speed
specified in the program is applied.
If the key is kept pressed, the percentage indication is halted at
100% for a while.
ME32125R1100500190004

(2) [OVERRIDE 1%] Key

This key sets the rate of spindle override key to increments or decrements of 1%.
When the rate of increment and decrement is set to 1%, the lamp at the upper left
corner is lit.
When the lamp at the upper left corner is not lit, the override rate increases or
decreases in increments or decrements of 10%.
When the lamp in the key is not lit (increments or decrements of 10%) and the 32125R1100500190005

first digit of the spindle override rate is not “0”:

 The first digit of spindle override rate is cleared to “0” by pressing the override key “▼”.

 The first digit of spindle override rate is cleared to “0” and the second digit is round out by
pressing the override key “▲”.

(3) [RELEASE] Key

Pressing this key releases the spindle override setting.
The spindle speed varies depending on the machine model and specifications.

ME32125R1100500190006
(4) [ORIENTATION] Key
Pressing this key stops the spindle at the oriented position.
The spindle stops at the oriented position by pressing the [ORIENTATION] key
while pressing the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key.

[Supplement] ME32125R1100500190007

To enable the key, press the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key at the same time.
 6115-E P-9
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(5) [CW] Key

Pressing this key rotates the spindle in CW direction by manual operation.

[Supplement] ME32125R1100500190008

To enable the key, press the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key at the same time.

(6) [STOP] Key

Pressing this key stops the spindle which is rotating by manual operation.

32125R1100500190009
(7) [CCW] Key
Pressing this key rotates the spindle in CCW direction by manual operation.

[Supplement] ME32125R1100500190010

To enable the key, press the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key at the same time.

Machine Operation Panel (NC operation)

Keys for NC operations are collected in one place.

ME32125R1100500190011

(1) [INTERLOCK RELEASE] Key

This key must be pressed together with the corresponding mode key under the
following situations:

 When establishing or canceling the dry run, machine lock, or pulse handle
override mode.
32125R1100500190012

 When rotating the spindle in clockwise direction or counterclockwise

direction, or indexing the spindle by manual operation.

 When moving the axis to a specified position by the [SPECIFY POSITION (1 or 2)] key.
The [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key is effective only while the key is pressed with the lamp at the
upper left corner of the key lit.
 6115-E P-10
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(2) [RESTART] Key

This key is used when resuming execution of a program after execution of the
program is halted due to the door interlock function during automatic operation.
In such case, press the [RESTART] key first and then press the [CYCLE
START] button.

ME32125R1100500190013
(3) [LIGHT] Key
This key turns on lighting in the machining area.

32125R1100500190014
(4) [CYCLE STOP] Key
This key is used to stop operation after completion of a main program when the
operation is controlled by a schedule program.
When the key is valid, the indicating lamp at the upper left corner is lit.
When the key is invalid (indicating lamp at the upper left corner unlit), operation
continues even after completion of a main program when the operation is
controlled by a schedule program. 32125R1100500190015

(5) [MACHINE LOCK] Key

When this key is activated, no machine operation is performed even when
operation commands are executed to the machine.
When the key is valid, the indicating lamp at the upper left corner is lit.
If a program is executed with the machine lock function ON, the actual position
display is updated according to the commands as the program is run. The block
data display is also updated. Resetting the NC restores the display prior to the 32125R1100500190016

machine lock.
When the [MACHINE LOCK] key is invalid (indicating lamp at the upper left corner unlit),
commands specifying machine operations are actually executed.

[Supplement]

To change the machine lock function ON/OFF state, press the [MACHINE LOCK] key while
holding down the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key.

(6) [BLOCK SKIP] Key

This key is used to ignore the commands between a slash (/) code and “CR”
code.
When this key is valid, the indicating lamp at the upper left corner is lit.
When the key is invalid (indicating lamp at the upper left corner unlit), commands
entered after a slash code (/) are executed.
32125R1100500190017

[Supplement]

A slash code (/) must be placed at the start of a program block or immediately after the sequence
number (or sequence name) of a block.
 6115-E P-11
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(7) [OPTIONAL STOP] Key

This key is used to stop operations after the M01 block is executed in the
program.
When this key is valid, the indicating lamp at the upper left corner is lit.
Pressing the [CYCLE START] button with the [OPTIONAL STOP] key valid
restores the state before operation stoppage and then resumes execution of the
subsequent blocks in the program. 32125R1100500190018

When the [OPTIONAL STOP] key is invalid (indicating lamp at the upper left
corner unlit), program execution proceeds even after the block containing M01 is finished.

(8) [SINGLE BLOCK] Key

This key is used to execute a program block by block with a break between
blocks.
When this key is valid, the indicating lamp at the upper left corner is lit.
To execute each successive block, the [CYCLE START] button has to be
pressed.
When the [SINGLE BLOCK] key is invalid (indicating lamp at the upper left corner 32125R1100500190019

unlit), blocks in the program are executed continuously.

(9) [DRY RUN] Key

This key is used to execute cutting feed commands (commands in G01, G02,
G03 mode, etc.) at the feedrate set with the cutting feedrate switch. The feedrate
commands specified in the program are disregarded.
When this key is valid, the indicating lamp at the upper left corner is lit.
When the key is invalid (indicating lamp at the upper left corner unlit), the axes
are fed at the feedrates specified in the program. 32125R1100500190020

[Supplement]

To change the dry run function ON/OFF state, press the [DRY RUN] key while holding down the
[INTERLOCK RELEASE] key.

(10) [MID AUTO MANUAL] Key

This key is used to interrupt automatic or MDI mode operation to perform manual
operation.

32125R1100500190021
(11) [P. HANDLE SHIFT] Key
This key is used to add axis movements performed by turning the pulse handle to
the operation executed according to the commands in the program.

[Supplement] 32125R1100500190022

To change the pulse handle override function ON/OFF state, press the [P. HANDLE SHIFT] key
while holding down the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key.

(12) [SEQUENCE RESTART] Key

This key is used during operation of a part program to start a program operation
from part way through.
The key is also used in the manual interruption mode to recover the original
position of the axis in the automatic operation before manual interruption is
performed.
The lamp at the upper left corner is lit during sequence return. ME32125R1100500190023
 6115-E P-12
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Machine Operation Panel (Machine operation)

Keys for machine operations are collected in one place.

ME32125R1100500190024

(1) [CHIP CONVEYOR] Key

This key allows the chip conveyor to rotate in forward direction by manual
operation.
The lamp at the upper left corner is lit during chip conveyor forward rotation.
When the [CHIP CONVEYOR] key is pressed during chip conveyor forward
rotation (lamp lit), the chip conveyor stops and the lamp in the key goes off.
ME32125R1100500190025
(2) [REVERSE INCHING] Key
This key allows the chip conveyor to rotate in reverse direction by manual
operation.
The chip conveyor rotates in reverse direction while the [REVERSE INCHING]
key is being held.
The lamp at the upper left corner is lit during chip conveyor reverse rotation.
ME32125R1100500190026
(3) [ALL COOLANT OFF] Key
This key is used to stop the group of coolants and air blowers regardless of the
selected operation modes. The coolant and air blow group restarts operation
when the key is pressed again.

ME32125R1100500190027
(4) [WATER GUN] Key
This key turns the workpiece washing gun to ON to make it operational.
The lamp at the upper left corner is lit during the workpiece washing gun ON.
If the [WATER GUN] key or [RESET] switch is pressed during the workpiece
washing gun ON (lamp lit), the workpiece washing gun is turned to OFF.

32125R1100500190028
(5) [CHIP WASH] Key
Pressing this key discharges the coolant for chip washing.
The lamp at the upper left corner is lit during coolant discharge.
When the [CHIP WASH] key is pressed during coolant discharge (lamp lit), the
coolant discharge is stopped and the lamp at the upper left corner goes off.

32125R1100500190029
 6115-E P-13
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Machine Operation Panel (Axis travel operation)

(1) Manual Feed Axis Selection Key

These keys are used to select the axis to be moved manually (rapid
feed, cutting feed).
When the pulse handle is enabled, the lamp is lit up.

ME32125R1100500190030
(2) Manual Rapid Traverse Key
These keys are used with manual operation to move the
axis selected by the Manual Feed Axis Selection Key in (1)
at a rapid traverse rate in the direction of either “+” or “-“.
The selected axis moves at a rapid traverse rate only while
this key is held pressed. ME32125R1100500190031

The rapid traverse rate differs depending on the machine

model and specifications.

(3) Manual Cutting Feed Key

These keys are used with manual operation to move the
axis selected by the Manual Feed Axis Selection Key in
(1) at a cutting feedrate in the direction of either “+” or “-“.
Once the either “+” or “-” key is pressed, cutting feed
operation is valid until the [STOP] key is pressed.
The manual cutting feedrate differs depending on the ME32125R1100500190032

machine model and specifications.

(4) [SPECIFY POSITION 1] Key, [SPECIFY POSITION 2] Key

These keys allow the axis to be positioned at a specified position
set in the parameter.
For the detail of these keys, refer to “3-1-4. Travel to specified
Position” in SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION in OPERATION.

[Supplement] ME32125R1100500190033

To change the key function ON/OFF state, press the [SPECIFY POSITION 1] or [SPECIFY
POSITION 2] key while holding down the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key.

(5) [STOP] Key

This key stops the axis movement to the specified position in middle of operation.

32125R1100500190034
 6115-E P-14
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(6) Rapid Override Dial

This key is used to select what percentage of the speed
specified in the program is applied as a rapid feedrate.

ME32125R1100500190035
(7) Cutting Feed Override Dial
This key is used to select what percentage of the speed
specified in the program is applied as a cutting
feedrate.

ME32125R1100500190036
(8) Manual Cutting Feedrate Dial
This key selects a manual cutting feedrate.

ME32125R1100500190037

Machine Operation Panel (Other operations)

(1) [RESET] Switch

This key is used to restore operation from the stoppage due to alarms or
other causes.

ME32125R1100500190038
(2) [MACHINE OPERATION] Key
Pressing this key displays the machine operation screen.

32125R1100500190039
 6115-E P-15
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Function Selection Keys

The machine operation screen is displayed by pressing the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the
machine panel. The keys are provided for each function on the machine operation screen, of which
configuration and availability will differ depending on the optional specifications. The machine
operation screen is closed by pressing the [MACHINE OPERATION] key again.
Moreover, the machine operation screen is minimized and then redisplayed by pressing the [MIN/
MAX] key.

ME32125R1100500080015
 6115-E P-16
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(1) [ATC] Key

Pressing this key displays the ATC OPERATION screen.
For the operation of ATC, refer to “3-3. ATC” in SECTION 3 in OPERATION.

ME32125R1100500080001

(2) [APC] Key

Pressing this key displays the APC OPERATION screen.
For the operation of ATC, refer to “3-4. APC” in SECTION 3 in OPERATION.

ME32125R1100500080002
 6115-E P-17
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(3) [COOLANT] Key

Pressing this key displays the COOLANT screen.
Coolant is discharged and stopped by pressing the function key.

ME32125R1100500080003

(4) [AIR BLOW] Key

Pressing this key displays the AIR BLOW screen.
Air is blasted and stopped by pressing the function key.

ME32125R1100500080004
 6115-E P-18
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(5) [MIR. IMG] Key

Pressing this key displays the MIRROR IMAGE screen.
For the mirror image function, refer to “5-12. Mirror Image Function” in SECTION 5 in
OPERATION.

ME32125R1100500080005

(6) [NC OP.] Key

Pressing this key displays the NC OPERATION screen.
For the functions on the NC OPERATION screen, refer to “5-10. Program Branch”, “5-16-2. Axis
Command Cancel”, “5-16-3. Auxiliary (S.T.M) Function Lock” in SECTION 5 in OPERATION.

ME32125R1100500080006
 6115-E P-19
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(7) [MIST] Key

Pressing this key displays the MIST screen.
The mist unit is operated and stopped by pressing the function key.

ME32125R1100500080007
 6115-E P-20
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

1-2. Screens

1-2-1. Mode Transition Charts

Note that the screens displayed depend on the machine specifications.

Operation Modes (Automatic / MDI / Manual)

ME32125R1100500100006
 6115-E P-21
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

ME32125R1100500100007
 6115-E P-22
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

ACTUAL POSITION F1 MAIN PRG_OPER F1 PROGRAM SELECT 2

MAIN PROGRAM F2 ACT_POSI ENLARGE F2 RESTART 5
SCHEDULE PROGRAM F3 LOAD ON/OFF F3 NUMBER STOP 4
MDI PROGRAM F4 ANIMATE ON/OFF F4 NUMBER SEARCH 3
FEED AXIS DATA F5 PROGRAM ON/OFF 23 F5 EXEC/READ
BLOCK DATA F6 QUICK EDIT F6 QUICK EDIT
F7 NC OPR MONITOR F7 MAIN PRG_EDIT
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1 F8 CLOSE F1 COPY
F2 DELETE
F1 SCHEDULE SDF_OPR F1 PROGRAM SELECT 2 F3 PASTE
F2 LIBRARY PROGRAM F2 F4 1 LINE INSERT
F3 F3 PROGRAM ENTRY F5 1-CHAR DELETE
F4 PROGRAM MESSAGE F4 NUMBER SEARCH 3 F6 OVER WR/INSERT
F5 TOOL ON/OFF F5 SCHEDULE SDF_EDIT F7 PROGRAM SELECT
F6 TOOL LIST DISPLAY F6 QUICK EDIT F8 QUIT
F7 F7 MAIN PRG_EDIT
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE F8 CLOSE F1 FIND/REPLACE 10
F2 JUMP 11
F1 PARAM.F1 SET F1 ACT. POSI (WORK) :
F2 F2 ACT. POSI (LOCAL) F8
* Refer to next page.
F3 F3 MACHINE ACT. POSI
: F4 RELATIVE ACT. POSI F1
F7 F5 POSI SET RELATIVE* 7 F2 FILE NAME 3
F8 F6 SHIFT ON/OFF F3 SORT
F7 F4
F8 CLOSE F5
1 F1 ACTUAL POSITION * Displayed only when [F4] (RELATIVE ACT. POSI) is selected. F6 ENTRY
F2 MAIN PROGRAM F7 ENTRY CANCEL
F3 SCHEDULE PROGRAM F8 CLOSE
F4 MDI PROGRAM
4 F1
F2
F5 ANIMATED SIMULATE
:
F6
F6 ENTRY
F7
F8 CLOSE
F7 ENTRY CANCEL 7 F1
F8 CLOSE F2
F3
F1 MENU CHANGE
:
F2 DISPLAY PROPERTY
F7
F3
F8 CLOSE
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8 CLOSE
8

F1 SET
F2 ADD
F3
F4
F5 RELATION PARA. F1 MENU
F6 F2
F7 F3
F8 CLOSE :
F7
F8 CLOSE

ME32125R1100500100001
 6115-E P-23
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

* Refer to previous page. F1 TOOL LIST SELECT

F2 LACK & DISUSED
ACTUAL POSITION F1 MAIN PRG_OPER
F3
MAIN PROGRAM F2 ACT_POSI ENLARGE
16 F4
SCHEDULE F3 LOAD ON/OFF
F5 DATA CHANGE
MDI PROGRAM F4 ANIMATE ON/OFF
F6
FEED AXIS DATA F5 PROGRAM ON/OFF
F7
BLOCK DATA F6 QUICK EDIT
F8 CLOSE
F7 NC OPR MONITOR
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE

F1 SCHEDULE SDF_OPER F1 REGIS. 2 F1

F2 LIBRARY PROGRAM 25 F2 ERASE F2
F3 F3 INIT F3
F4 PROGRAM MESSAGE F4 BUFFER SIZE 3 F4
F5 TOOL ON/OFF F5 F5
F6 TOOL LIST DISPLAY F6 F6 YES
F7 F7 F7 NO
26 F8 CLOSE F8
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1
F1 SET
F1 PARAM. F1 SET
F1 F2 ADD
F2
F2 F3
F3
: F4 ACCEL
:
F6 F5 DECEL
F7
F7 F6
F8
F8 CLOSE F7 BACKUP
F8 CLOSE

2 F1 5 F1 10 F1 11 F1
F2 FILE NAME 3 F2 F2 F2
F3 SORT :
F3 F3 TOP PAGE
: F6 LAST
F4 F4 LAST PAGE
F7 OK F7 OK
F5 F5 FORWARD
F8 CANCEL F8 CANCEL
F6 FIND F6 BACK
F7 REPLACE F7 TOP
3 F1 6 F1 FILE NAME
F8 CLOSE F8 CANCEL
F2 F2 SIZE
F3 F3 DATE (UP)
: F4 DATE (DOWN)
F7 OK F5 EXT.
F8 CANCEL F6
F7
F8 CLOSE

ME32125R1100500100002
 6115-E P-24
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

ANIMATED SIMULATION F1 MAIN PRG_OPER F1 PROGRAM SELECT 2

F2 TRACE/ANIMATE <TRACE/MATERIAL> F2 RESTART 5
F3 MATERIAL DRAWING F3 NUMBER STOP 4
F4 ERASE F4 NUMBER SEARCH 3
F5 PROGRAM ON/OFF F5 EXEC/READ
F6 QUICK EDIT F6 QUICK EDIT
F7 HIGH DRAW F7 MAIN PRG_EDIT
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE F8 CLOSE F1 COPY
F2 DELETE
F1 SCHEDULE SDF_OPER F1 PROGRAM SELECT F3 PASTE
F2 ACT_POSI ENLARGE F2 F4 1 LINE INSERT
F3 LOAD ON/OFF F3 PROGRAM ENTRY F5 1-CHAR DELETE
F4 TOOL ON/OFF F4 NUMBER SEARCH 3 F6 OVER WR/INSERT
F5 SECTION ON/OFF F5 SCHEDULE SDF EDIT F7 PROGRAM SELECT
F6 TRNSPRNT ON/OFF F6 QUICK EDIT F8 QUIT
F7 AUTO SCALE F7 MAIN PRG_EDIT
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1 F8 CLOSE F1 FIND/REPLACE 10
F2 JUMP 11
F1 F1 ACT. POSI (WORK) :
F2 RESTART 5 F2 ACT. POSI (LOCAL) F8
F3 GRAPHIC DATA F3 MACHIN ACT. POSI
F4 AREA CHANGE F4 RELATIVE ACT. POSI F1
F5 ANGLE CHANGE F5 POSI SET RELATIVE* 7 F2 FILE NAME 3
F6 SECTION CHANGE F6 SHIFT ON/OFF F3 SORT 6
F7 NC OPR MONITOR 8 27 F7 F4
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1 F8 CLOSE F5
* Displayed only when [F4] (RELATIVE ACT. POSI) F6 ENTRY
28 is selected. F7 ENTRY CANCEL
F1 MAGNI. F8 CLOSE
F2 REDUCE
F3
29 F4 PLANE/SIDE <NONE>
F5
F6
F7
F8 CLOSE

F1 DOWN ROTARY
F2 UP ROTARY
F3 RIGHT ROTARY
F4 LEFT ROTARY
F5
F6
F7
F8 CLOSE

F1 Y-Z PL.
F2 Z-X PL.
F3 X-Y PL.
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8 CLOSE
ME32125R1100500100003
 6115-E P-25
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

GAUGING RESULTS F1 MAIN PRG_OPER F1 PROGRAM SELECT 2

F2 ACT_POSI ENLARGE F2 RESTART 5
F3 LOAD ON/OFF F3 NUMBER STOP 4
F4 ANIMATE ON/OFF F4 NUMBER SEARCH 3
F5 PROGRAM ON/OFF F5 EXEC/READ
F6 QUICK EDIT F6 QUICK EDIT
F7 F7 MAIN PRG_EDIT
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1 F8 CLOSE F1 COPY
F2 DELETE
F1 SCHEDULE SDF_OPER F1 PROGRAM SELECT 2 F3 PASTE
F2 TOOL/ZERO 7 F2 F4 1 LINE INSERT
F3 TOOL ON/OFF F3 PROGRAM ENTRY F5 1-CHAR DELETE
F4 MSB ZERO ON/OFF F4 NUMBER SEARCH 3 F6 OVER WR/INSERT
F5 MSB TOOL ON/OFF F5 SCHEDULE SDF_OPER F7 PROGRAM SELECT
F6 SENSstat ON/OFF F6 QUICK EDIT F8 QUIT
F7 VARIOUS ON/OFF F7 MAIN PRG_EDIT
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1 F8 CLOSE F1 FIND/REPLACE 10
F2 JUMP 11
F1 ACT. POSI (WORK) :
F2 ACT. POSI (LOCAL) F8
F3 MACHINE ACT. POSI
F4 RELATIVE ACT. POSI F1
F5 POSI SET RELATIVE* 7 F2 FILE NAME 3
F6 SHIFT ON/OFF F3 SORT 6
F7 F4
F8 CLOSE F5
* Displayed only when [F4] (RELATIVE ACT. POSI) F6 ENTRY
is selected. F7 ENTRY CANCEL
F8 CLOSE

NC AXIS DATA F1 STANDARD

F2 MAGNI.
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1

MCS DIAGNOSIS F1 REFER/CHANGE

F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1
ME32125R1100500100004
 6115-E P-26
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

SPEC CODE F1
PLC SPEC CODE F2
MACHIN DIAGNOSIS F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1

CHANGE MODE F1 SET ATC TOOL SET/DISPLAY F1

(PLC CONTROL MODE) F2 (Memory random) F2
F3 F3
F4 F4 POT SEARCH
F5 F5 TOOL SEARCH
F6 F6
F7 F7
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1 F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1

SYSTEM VARIABLE F1 AXIS DATA

F2 ZERO OFFSET
F3 TOOL OFFSET
F4 SYSTEM PARA.
F5 HOME POSITION
F6 VNCOM
F7
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1

F1 MSB ZERO
F2 MSB TOOL
F3
F4
F5
F6 VARIOUS DATA
F7
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 1
ME32125R1100500100005
 6115-E P-27
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Tool Data Setting Mode

ME32125R1100500120004

ME32125R1100500120005
 6115-E P-28
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

TOOL OFFSET F1 SET

/ COMPENSATION F2 ADD
F3 CAL
F4 FIND 3
F5
F6 ITEM ↑
F7 ITEM ↓
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 9

:
F6 TOOL LIST 16
F7 DATA IN/OUT 12
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE 9

12 F1 INPUT F1 MENU
F2 OUTPUT F2 NEXT
F3 VERIFY F3
F4 F4
F5 F5
F6 F6
F7 F7 OK
F8 CLOSE F8 CANCEL

9 F1 13 F1
F2 F2
: F1 (CHECK MARK) F3
F8 CLOSE F2 F4
: F5
F1 MENU CHANGE F6 F6 YES
: F7 OK F7 NO
F8 CLOSE F8 CANCEL F8

ME32125R1100500120001
 6115-E P-29
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Parameter Setting Mode

ZERO F1 SET
COMMON VARIABLES F2 ADD
USER PARAMETER F3 CAL
G/M CODE MACRO F4 FIND F1
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (INPUT UNIT SYSTEM) F5 F2
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (UNI-DIRECTIONAL POSITION) F6 ITEM ↑ F3
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (FIXED CYCLE) F7 ITEM ↓ F4
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (CUTTER R COMPENSATION) F8 DISPLAY CHANGE F5
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION) F6
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (AUTO SET AT NC RESET/POWER ON) F7 OK
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (GEOMETRY ENLARGEMENT/REDUCTION)
F8 CANCEL
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (AXIS COMMAND CANCEL)
:
F7 DATA IN/OUT 12
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (OPERATING RELATION PARAMETER) F8
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (DISPLAY RELATION PARAMETER)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (MIRROR IMAGE)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (AREA MACHINING)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (LONG, WORD, BIT)
F1
∗
F2 ∗
SYSTEM PARAMETER F3 ∗
HOME POSITION F4 ∗
HOME POSITION MOVEMET ORDER F5 ∗
MC AXIS PARAMETER
F6 ITEM ↑
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION
F7 ITEM ↓
ROTARY AXIS PARAMETER
F8 DISPLAY CHANGE F1 COMMON VAR. F1 (CHECK MARK)
SPINDLE LOAD MONITOR PARAMETER
TAPPING TORQUE MONITOR PARAMETER ∗ F2 USER PARA F2
F1
∗ F3 F3
ONLINE SERVO TUNE-UP (SVTUN) F2 ∗ F4 F4 MENU INIT
HI-CUT PRO CONTROL PARAMETER F3 ∗ F5 F5
MC USER PARAMETER (COOLANT) F4 ∗ F6 F6
MC USER PARAMETER (POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) F5 ∗ F7 F7 OK
MC USER PARAMETER (TIMER) F6 ∗ F8 CLOSE F8 CANCEL
MC USER PARAMETER (INDICATING LAMP) F7 DATA IN/OUT
MC USER PARAMETER (BUZZER) F8 DISPLAY CHANGE F1 MENU CHANGE
MC USER PARAMETER (SPINDLE) F2
MC USER PARAMETER (ATC/TOOL EXCHANGE)
12 F3
MC USER PARAMETER (MAGAZINE) F4
MC USER PARAMETER (EXTERNAL M COMMAND) F5
MC USER PARAMETER (EXTERNAL HOUR METER)
F6
MC USER PARAMETER (DOOR INTER LOCK)
F7
MC USER PARAMETER (AXIS LUBE)
F8 CLOSE
MC USER PARAMETER (SYSTEM CHECK MODE)
MC USER PARAMETER (EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT)
MC USER PARAMETER (CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK)
MC USER PARAMETER (NC AXIS INTERLOCK)
MC USER PARAMETER (APC) ∗: Depends on the parameter
MC USER PARAMETER (ADDITIONAL AXIS) selected for data setting.
MC USER PARAMETER (CROSS RAIL)
MC USER PARAMETER (ROBOT/LOADER I/F)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (SPECAIL SPECIFICATIONS)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (SPINDLE)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (ATC)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (APC)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (AAC)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (HOME POSITION)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (MCS)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (POWER SEQUENCE)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (AXIS EXCHANGE)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (ATC ARM PARAMETER)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (ATC ARM TORQUE LIMITER)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (MC AXIS POSITIONING POINT)
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (DOOR)

ME32125R1100500130001
 6115-E P-30
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Program Operation Mode

F1 DIR DISPLAY F1 MD1

F2 EDIT F1 I-MAP MENU F1 DIR DISPLAY F2 US0
F3 NEW FILE F1 I-MAP 3 F2 CUTTING CONDIT. F2 EDIT F3 US1
F2 F3 POINT CAL. F3 NEW FILE F4 TC
F3 CREATE DIRECTORY F4 1 LINE INSERT F4 LIST F5 AD0
F4 LIST
: F5 CUT F5 F6 ANOTHER DISPLAY
F8 CLOSE F6 1-CHAR DELETE F6 F7 REFRESH
F5 COPY F1 MD1 COPY F7 ANOTHER FILE F7 F8 CLOSE
F6 RENAME 3 F2 US0 COPY F8 QUIT/STOP 20 F8 CANCEL
F7 DELETE 18 F3 US1 COPY F1
F4 TC COPY F1 FIND/REPLACE 10 F1 DEVICE F1 MD1 F2 FILE NAME 14
F5 AD0 COPY F2 JUMP 11 F2 FILE NAME F2 US0 (UPPER) F3 SORT 6
F6 ANOTHER COPY F3 COPY F3 SORT 6 F3 US1 (LOWER) F4
F7 ALL FILE F4 PASTE F4 F4 AD0 F5
F8 CANCEL F5 OVERWR/INSERT F5 F5 HD0 F6
F6 SEQ NO. ARRANGE F6 F6 F7
F8 PROTECT/UNPROTECT 19 F7 EX. FUNC. F7 OK F7 OK F8 CLOSE
F8 SELECT & QUIT 21 F8 CANCEL F8 CANCEL

F1 INDEX SELECT F1
:
F6 ADD
F2 F2 FILE NAME 14
F3 F3 SORT 6
F7 SAVE
: :
F8 CLOSE
F7 OK F7 OK
F8 CANCEL F8 CANCEL

F1 FILE OPERATE F1 COPY 22 F1 MENU 15 F1 CANCEL

F2 DEVICE F2 RENAME 3 F2 NEXT F2 MD1
F3 FD0 INIT F3 DELETE : F3 US0 (UPPER)
F4 F4 PROTECT/UNPROT. F7 OK F4 US1 (LOWER)
F5 F5 VERIFY F8 CANCEL F5 TC
F6 F6 F6 AD0
F7 PREF SETTING F7 F7 HD0
F8 F8 CLOSE F8 FD0

F1 MENU 15 F1 OTHERS
F2 NEXT
F3
F4 SORT
F5
F1
F6
F7 REDRAW
F8 CLOSE

F2 FILE PATTERN F1
F3 FILE FORMAT :
F7 OK 14 F1 ALL FILE
F4 SORT F8 CANCEL F2 MAIN PROGRAM
F3 SCHEDULE PROGRAM
F5 % CODE OPERATE F1 MENU F4 SUB PROGRAM
F6 F2 NEXT F5 IGF FILE
F7 DISPLAY PROPERTY : F6 JOB FILE
F8 CLOSE F7 OK F7 MEMO FILE
F8 CANCEL F8 CLOSE

18 : 19 : 20 : 21 :
F5 ALL FILE F5 ALL FILE F5 ONCE STOP F5
F6 YES F6 PROTECT F6 YES F6 YES
F7 NO F7 UNPROTECT F7 NO F7 NO
F8 F8 CANCEL F8 CANCEL F8 CANCEL
ME32125R1100500140001
 6115-E P-31
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

1-2-2. Screen Operations

There are five methods for moving between screens, as described below.

(1) Menu based screen selection

Screen selection from the menu is used in RUN screen, program operation, parameter setting,
and tool data setting modes.
Select the [DISPLAY CHANGE] function menu item on the initial screen of each mode to
display the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window.

ME32125R1100500150001

Fig.1-1 DISPLAY CHANGE Pop-up window

Use the up/down cursor keys to select the screen to be displayed, then select [CLOSE] from the
function menu to switch to that screen.
Pressing the [WRITE] key when the cursor is moved to the transition destination screen with
[CLOSE] in the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window has the same effect as selecting [CLOSE]
from the function menu.

[Supplement]

In the parameter setting mode, the current screen can be reversed to the previous one or
advanced to the next one by depression of [F6] (ITEM ↑ ) or [F7] (ITEM ↓ ). This is just the same
as you select the screen before or after the current screen from the menu.
[F6] (ITEM ↑ ): The screen reverses to the one displayed before the current screen.
[F7] (ITEM ↓ ): The screen advances to the one displayed after the current screen.
 6115-E P-32
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

(2) Transition between functions (short-cut operation)

This method is available only in the RUN screen and the parameter setting mode.
Select [DISPLAY CHANGE] from the function menu to display a pop-up menu with the names
of the screens that can be displayed indicated in it.

ME32125R1100500150002

Fig.1-2 Pop-up Function Menu

Selecting the desired screen from the pop-up menu above gives short-cut access to the screen.

(3) Screen transitions with the page keys

When two or more screens exist, screens can be moved to the next screen by pressing the
page key.
Whether or not the currently displayed screen has two or more pages can be known from the
page label at the top right of the screen. If there is only one page there is no page label; if there
are multiple pages the label shows an expression indicating the page number and total number
of pages, for example “1/4.”

(4) Screen transitions with the sheet keys

Sheets on the screen can be changed by pressing the sheet key when there are two or more
sheets on the RUN screen (RUN screen mode), PROGRAM screen (program operation mode),
and TOOL DATA screen (tool data setting mode).

(5) Screen transitions with WINDOW CHANGE

Windows can be changed by pressing the WINDOW CHANGE key on the RUN screen in the
RUN screen mode and the machine operation screen.
The windows that can be changed are displayed in a frame.
 6115-E P-33
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

Function Menu

(1) Function menu selection

In cases where it is not possible to display all the function menu items corresponding to function
keys F1 through F8 on one screen, a black triangular symbol ([Extend] key) is displayed at the
right end of the function menu.
By pressing the [Extend] key, the function menu items not currently displayed can be displayed.

ME32125R1100500160001

Fig.1-3 Function Menu Selection

(2) Pop-up Function Menus

If a function displayed in the function menu has a sub menu, selecting that function menu item
causes the sub menu to be displayed superimposed on the existing function menu. This kind of
menu is called a “pop-up function menu”. This menu is closed by selecting [CLOSE] from the
function menu. (With some functions, the menu automatically closes on completion of
command execution.)

[Supplement]

If the pop-up window contains a [CLOSE] or [OK] button, pressing the (WRITE) key while
this button is selected has the same effect as selecting [CLOSE] (or [OK]) in the pop-up function
menu.

ME32125R1100500160002

Fig.1-4 Pop-up Function Menu

Pop-up Windows

In addition to the basic screen and menu function displays, the screen displays also include pop-up
windows that are displayed when specific functions are selected.
Some pop-up menus are alternately displayed and not displayed by repeated selection of a function
menu item, while others automatically close on completion of execution of the corresponding
command.
 6115-E P-34
SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION

1-3. One-touch Window Close Operation

If the mode selection key that corresponds to the currently selected mode is pressed when the pop-
up window is open, the current processing is aborted and the screen returns to the initial state. This
operation is called one-touch close operation.
The processing for closing the window varies depending on the case where one-touch close
operation is used. The following is the processing in each case:

During program editing

(1) Normal editing mode

The message “ALL WINDOW CLOSE. DATA SAVE OK?” appears in the message window.

 Select [F6] (YES) to save the file data, close all the pop-up windows, and initialize the
DIRECTORY screen display.

 Select [F7] (NO) to close all the pop-up windows without saving data and initialize the
DIRECTORY screen display. In this case, note that all the data being edited is lost.

 Select [F8] (CANCEL) to abort one-touch window close processing.

(2) Direct editing mode (large volume)

The message “ALL WINDOW CLOSE OK?” appears in the message window.

 Select [F6] (YES) to renew the file, close all the pop-up windows, and initialize the
DIRECTORY screen display.

 Select [F7] (NO) to abort one-touch window close processing.

OPERATION
 6115-E P-35
SECTION 1 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF

SECTION 1 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF

1-1. Turning the Power ON

Turn ON the main switch in the control cabinet.
To turn on the power, press the [CONTROL ON] switch on the machine
operation panel.
An alarm or error is generated, refer to the ALARM & ERROR LIST
separately issued.

1-2. Turning the Power OFF

ME32125R1100600010001
Before turning the power off, make sure that the machine has stopped
with all command execution completed.
If there is a peripheral device (printer, punch, etc.) connected to the NC,
switch it off.
Press the [CONTROL OFF] switch on the machine operation panel.
Turn OFF the main switch in the control cabinet. ME32125R1100600020001

1-3. Emergency Stop

Press the [EMG. STOP] button.
EMG. STOP
This stops the machine immediately.
To unlock the button, turn it in the direction indicated by the arrows.
After unlocking the [EMG. STOP] button, press the [CONTROL ON]
switch on the machine operation panel to recover from the emergency
stop state.

ME32125R1100600030001
 6115-E P-36
SECTION 2 OPERATION MODES

SECTION 2 OPERATION MODES

2-1. Operation Mode Basic Screen

The following is a general description of the basic screen and pop-up window displayed for
operation modes.

2-1-1. Screen Display

(1) Information at top of screen
Information is provided at two locations at the top of operation mode screens: the status display
and the title bar.
The information usually displayed is shown below (the items in the left-hand column of the table
are examples):

ME32125R1100700020001

Fig.2-1 Status Display

Operation mode
The active operation mode is displayed from the followings:
AUTO, MDI, and MANUAL.
During operation
The lamp is lit up when the machine is actually operating in
either AUTO or MDI mode.
STM
The lamp is lit up when the machine is performing any of the
following operations: S (spindle), T (tool) and M (auxiliary).
Slide hold
The lamp is lit up when the SLIDE HOLD button on the start
switch panel is pressed.
Program stop
The lamp is lit up in program stop or optional stop, and flashes
in dwelling.
Limit lamp
The lamp is lit up when the axis is located at the soft limit
position.
Alarm lamp
The lamp is lit up when an alarm occurs.
CAPS LOCK mode
Displayed when the CAPSLOCK key is ON.
During program edit
The lamp is lit up during program edit.
Date and time
Date (year/month/day) and time (hr/min/sec) are displayed on
the top and bottom lines.
 6115-E P-37
SECTION 2 OPERATION MODES

Manual interrupt shift

The lamp is lit up when the total manual shift amount of all axes
is not “0”.
Mirror image X-axis
The lamp is lit up when the X-axis is selected for mirror image.
Mirror image Y-axis
The lamp is lit up when the Y-axis is selected for mirror image.
Mirror image Z-axis
The lamp is lit up when the Z-axis is selected for mirror image.
Axis command cancel
The lamp is lit up when the axis command cancel mode is
effective.
STM lock
The lamp is lit up when the STM lock mode is effective.
AUTO OPERATION Indicates the current operation mode.
A.MIN Indicates the selected main program file name.
A-MTD Indicates the selected operation method.

ME32125R1100700020002

Fig.2-2 Screen Title Bar

ACTUAL POSITION This is the title of the screen.

1mm (PROGRAM) Indicates the unit system used to run the program.
0 Indicates the currently selected main program name.
Indicates the sequence name executed last in the main
N0100
program.
19 Indicates the block counter.

(2) Function Menu

There is a number of patterns for the function menu which is displayed in the operation modes.
The pattern differs according to the operation mode and the screen displayed.
For details on the function menu items displayed, refer to SECTION 1 PART NAMES AND
FUNCTIONS, 1-2-1 “Mode Transition Charts” in FUNDAMENTALS.
 6115-E P-38
SECTION 2 OPERATION MODES

2-1-2. Pop-up Windows

When any of the function menu items is selected, the corresponding pop-up window is displayed.
Apart from pop-up windows in which data can be set, there are also DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up
windows that are used to change the screen contents.

(1) About DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up windows

To change the screen contents in an operation mode, first display the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-
up window, then select the required screen.
The DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window is displayed by selecting [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE), or
[F7] with the RUN screen, from the function menu on the initial screen of any mode.

ME32125R1100700030001

Fig.2-3 DISPLAY CHANGE Pop-up Window

When the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window is displayed on the screen, the pop-up function
menu having short-cut menu to select screens is displayed. When the Extend key is pressed,
MENU CHANGE and DISPLAY PROPERTY are added.
In each menu screen, the following settings can be made.
 6115-E P-39
SECTION 2 OPERATION MODES

MENU CHANGE
It is possible to set the menu items that are to be displayed in the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up
window.

ME32125R1100700030002

Fig.2-4 MENU CHANGE Pop-up Window

DISPLAY PROPERTY
It is possible to set the background color of each screen.
It is possible to choose between WHITE and BLACK for the ACTUAL POSITION ENLARGE
DISPLAY, PROGRAM DISPLAY, and the text editor.

ME32125R1100700030003

Fig.2-5 DISPLAY PROPERTY Pop-up Window

 6115-E P-40
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

The following operations are possible when the manual operation mode is selected. In the automatic
operation mode and MDI operation mode, these operations are also possible if the manual intervention mode
is selected.

 Axis feed operations (rapid traverse, cutting feed, pulse handle feed, travel to specified position)

 Spindle operations (rotation, stop, release, orientation)

3-1. Axis Feed Operations

3-1-1. Manual Rapid Traverse Operation

Set “pulse handle OFF” with the pulse handle “magnification selection” switch first. Then select the
desired axis by the “manual feed axis selection” keys on the machine operation panel, and press
either of the “manual rapid traverse” key. The selected axis moves at a preset rapid traverse rate.
The rapid traverse rate can be changed by setting the Rapid Override Dial on the machine operation
panel.
To feed an axis at a rapid traverse rate follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Set “pulse handle OFF” with the pulse handle “magnification selection”
switch.

2 Select the desired axis by the Manual Feed Axis Selection Keys.

ME32125R1100800020001

3 Set the desired override rate (%) by the Rapid Override Dial.
Setting of the Rapid Override Dial may be changed even if an
axis is moving.

ME32125R1100800020002

4 Press either of the [RAPID] keys.

To feed the selected axis in the positive direction, press the [+]
key and press the [–] key to feed the axis in the negative
direction. The selected axis moves at a rapid traverse rate only
while a [RAPID] key is held pressed. ME32125R1100800020003
 6115-E P-41
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-1-2. Manual Cutting Feed Operation

Set “pulse handle OFF” with the pulse handle “magnification selection” switch first. Select the
desired axis by the “manual feed axis selection” keys on the machine operation panel, and press
either of the “manual cutting feed” keys. The selected axis moves at a feedrate set with the “manual
cutting feedrate” dial.
To feed an axis at a cutting feedrate follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Set “pulse handle OFF” with the pulse handle “magnification selection”
switch.

2 Select the desired axis by the Manual Feed Axis Selection Keys.

ME32125R1100800030001

3 Select the desired feedrate by the [JOG FEED] switch.

Setting of the [JOG FEED] switch may be changed even
if an axis is moving.

ME32125R1100800030002

4 Press either of the [JOG] keys.

To feed the selected axis in the positive direction, press the [+]
key and press the [–] key to feed the axis in the negative
direction. Once the key is pressed, the key remains valid until
the [STOP] key is pressed.
ME32125R1100800030003

5 Press the [STOP] key in [JOG] keys to stop the axis.

 6115-E P-42
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-1-3. Pulse Handle Feed

Select the desired axis by the pulse handle axis selection switch. Turn the pulse handle and the
selected axis moves as the pulse handle is rotated.
The magnification selection switch is provided to select the axis feed distance per pulse.
To feed an axis using the pulse handle, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Select the axis feed distance per pulse by the magnification selection switch.

○ Disables the pulse handle input.

x1 Moves an axis 0.001 mm per pulse.
x10 Moves an axis 0.01 mm per pulse.
x50 Moves an axis 0.05 mm per pulse. 32125R1100800040001

2 Select the desired axis by the pulse handle axis selection switch.
Y
X Z

ME32125R1100800040003

3 Turn the pulse handle.

Turning the pulse handle clockwise moves the axis in the positive
direction.
Turning the pulse handle counterclockwise moves the axis in the OKUMA
negative direction.

[Supplement] ME32125R1100800040004

If you turn the pulse handle quickly by selecting a large pulse multiplication ratio, the axis
may move at a feedrate close to rapid traverse rate. This could cause an alarm.
 6115-E P-43
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-1-4. Travel to Specified Position

Operation

This item explains the travel to the specified position function, which enables positioning to a desired
position to be done by single-touch operation and thus allows the setup during machining operation
to be easier.
By pressing either the INTERLOCK RELEASE key + the SPECIFY POSITION 1 key or the
INTERLOCK RELEASE key + the SPECIFY POSITION 2 key, positioning is made automatically to
the position specified with the parameter.

ME32125R1100800210001

During the travel to the specified position, the LED of the selected SPECIFY POSITION 1 or 2 key
flashes.
The LED goes off when the positioning has been made.
 6115-E P-44
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

PARAMETER Screen

Procedure :

1 Select the PARAMETER mode with the mode selection key. Select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE)
from the function menu. Then the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window appears.

ME32125R1100800220001

2 Select SPECIFY POSITION from the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window and then the [F8]
(CLOSE) key. Then the SPECIFY POSITION screen appears.

ME32125R1100800220002

Set the SP.POSI., MOVE. ORDER, and DIRECTION ROT.

 6115-E P-45
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

[SP.POSI.]

 Set the position to go for each travel axis in the machine coordinate system.

 The CAL function key sets the specified position so that the current position + input value
becomes the set value.

 The ADD function key adds the value set to the specified position value.

 With an axis with limit (linear rotational axis), it is possible to input a value exceeding the travel
limit.

 With an unlimited rotational axis or multi-rotational axis the input value is rounded to 0.0000 to
359.9999.

n Linear axis

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999 Selected unit system

n Rotational axis (axis with limit, linear rotational axis)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0.0000 -9999.9999 to 9999.9999 Selected unit system

n Rotational axis (axis with no limit, multi-rotational axis)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0.0000 0.0000 to 359.9999 Selected unit system

[MOVE. ORDER]

 Axes are moved to each SPECIFY POSITION in the order (ascending order) set at MOVE.
ORDER.

 If “0” is set, the axis is not moved to SPECIFY POSITION.

 If the same move order (except for “0”) is set to two or more axes, error “5481 Order is
duplicate” appears and the move order numbers are not changed.

 When the figures at MOVE.ORDER are not in order, axes are moved in the ascending order.
e.g.) When the order is set as 0→1→2→4, the axis moves in the order of 1→2→4.

 The movement order of removable axes cannot be set.

n Move order

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 0 to max. number of axes
 6115-E P-46
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

[DIRECTION ROT.]

 With an axis with no limit and multi-rotational axis, the axis rotates according to the setting of
POSITIVE ROTATION, NEGATIVE ROTATION and NEAR ROTATION.

 With an axis with limit (linear rotational axis), DIRECTION ROT. is automatically set to NEAR
ROTATION; the rotation direction cannot be optionally set.

 With a multi-rotational axis, the axis moves to the position set at “SPECIFY POSITION +
360.000 * n”. (n is an integer and the axis is positioned to the specified position closest from the
current position.)
e.g.) SP.POSI.: 160.0000, current position: 400.0000
DIRECTION ROT.: NEAR ROTATION
Position to go: 160.0000 + 360.0000 = 520.0000
Display on screen: 520.0000

n Rotation direction (axis with limit, linear rotational axis)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

NEAR ROTATION NEAR ROTATION

n Rotation direction (axis with no limit, multi-rotational axis)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

POSITIVE ROTATION POSITIVE ROT./
NEGATIVE ROT./NEAR ROT.

[Supplement]

 The PARAMETER screen can be switched between SPECIFY POSITION 1 and SPECIFY
POSITION 2 by pressing the page key.
 The parameter cannot be changed during travel to the specified position. If attempted, error
“5480 Specified location during the move cannot be set.” appears.
 The parameter setting is retained even after the power is cycled.
 6115-E P-47
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Conditions for operation start

When all the following conditions are met, operation for SPECIFY POSITION will start.

 During manual interruption operation in the manual operation mode or the AUTO or MDI
operation mode.

 The current position is not the set specified position.

 No axis is being moved by pulse handle mode.

 The INTERLOCK RELEASE key + the SPECIFY POSITION 1or 2 key are pressed at the same
time.

[Supplement]

When the lamp of SPECIFY POSITION 1 or 2 is lit, the axis is not moved.

Conditions for operation end

When any of the following operations is performed during “travel to specified position”, travel to the
specified position will end.

(1) When the computed value (CON) reaches SPECIFY POSITION and APA comes in the in-
position width.

(2) When the SPECIFY POSITION “stop” key is pressed.

(3) When the NC is reset.

(4) When the mode is switched to either the AUTO or MDI mode.

(5) When the manual interruption status is released during the travel to specified position in the
manual interruption status.

(6) When the RAPID key or the JOG key is pressed.

(At this time, the rapid feed operation or cutting feed operation is disabled.)

(7) When the INTERLOCK RELEASE key + the SPECIFY POSITION 2 key are pressed during the
travel to specified position 1.

(8) When the INTERLOCK RELEASE key + the SPECIFY POSITION 1 are pressed during the
travel to specified position 2.

(9) On the machine with CE specification, the door is open without the ENABLE button pressed.

(10) When the sequence return button is pressed (including when it is not during manual
interruption).

(11) When the manual interruption button is pressed.

(12) When the manual ATC operation is performed.

(13) When the EMERGENCY button is pressed.

 6115-E P-48
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Travel to Specified Position

(1) The axis moves according to the rapid override setting and the move order setting on the
PARAMETER screen.

(2) The axis moves to the SPECIFY POSITION (the machine coordinate system specified by the
user), regardless of the defined coordinate system.

(3) The axis moves even during manual interruption and when the value exceeds the
programmable travel limit.

(4) Only the axes that can be controlled by the NC will move. Only the enabled axes will move
while ignoring the disabled axes.
[Disabled axes]

 Removable axis

 External axis when two rotary tables are used.

 Turning spindle

 Universal attachment

(5) When “0” is set at all MOVE.ORDERs, “4367 alarm D ““Order” move the specified position is
not set” appears by pressing either the SPECIFY POSITION 1 or SPECIFY POSITION 2
button.

(6) When the current position exceeds the positive or negative travel limit, “2658 alarm B Current
position is over the stroke limit 1” appears without moving the axis.

(7) When SPECIFY POSITION exceeds the positive or negative travel limit, “2659 alarm B Cannot
move beyond the stroke limit 1” appears without moving the axis.

(8) When the target position is set within the barrier, “2659 alarm B Cannot move beyond the stroke
limit 1” appears at the moment when entry is detected.
The axis movement may stop before the axis that will enter inside the barrier starts moving.

(9) When the in-position width has not been set, axis will move to the specified position while
setting the in-position width to the maximum value (1.000 or 1.0000) of the in-position width.

(10) The spindle path control axis can perform positioning operation as well as the travel to specified
position.

(11) Operation during machine lock ON can perform positioning simulation as well as other
functions.
At this time, the LED indication with SPECIFY POSITION 1 and 2 becomes the same as the
machine lock OFF.

(12) The travel to specified position during manual interruption is retained as the shift amount.
After the travel to specified position has been complete, or after the SPECIFY POSITION “stop”
key is pressed, the axis is returned to the interruption point by pressing the “sequence return”
key
 6115-E P-49
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

(13) The travel to specified position during manual ATC operation is ignored and the manual ATC
operation during the travel to specified position takes precedence.

(14) The SLIDE HOLD button during the travel to specified position is enabled. By pressing the
CYCLE START button, the axis resumes operation from the hold position to the SPECIFY
POSITION.

(15) When all of the axes of actual positions have been positioned to the specified position (the
SPECIFY POSITION 1 or 2 is lit), travel to specified position is not performed.

(16) When the machine has two rotary tables, operation will be carried out while ignoring the axis at
the specified position that is set as the external axis. This axis is not included in the conditions
for reaching to the specified position (LED lighting).

(17) It is not possible to travel to a specified position during IGF measurement. Furthermore, if the
IGF measurement screen is displayed while traveling to a specified position, travel is stopped.
 6115-E P-50
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-2. Spindle Operation

If the [SPINDLE CW] or [SPINDLE CCW] key on the machine operation panel is pressed in the state
a spindle speed is set using an S command in such as the MDI operation mode, the spindle starts
rotating at the specified speed. Pressing the [SPINDLE STOP] key stops the spindle. The spindle
speed can be changed by using the [SPINDLE OVERRIDE] dial.

3-2-1. Starting the Spindle

Before attempting to start the spindle, set the spindle
speed using an S command in the MDI operation
mode. This selects the gear range automatically. Note
that an S command cannot be specified manually.
Next, select the manual operation mode and press
either of the [SPINDLE CW] and [SPINDLE CCW]
switches while pressing the [INTERLOCK RELEASE]
key.
The spindle starts rotating at the speed calculated by ME32125R1100800060001

multiplying the specified spindle speed by the set

override value.

3-2-2. Stopping the Spindle

Press the [SPINDLE STOP] key to stop the spindle.

3-2-3. Releasing the Spindle

Press the [SPINDLE RELEASE] key to set the spindle drive gears in the neutral (released) position.
This operation becomes valid only after the spindle has stopped.
Once the spindle is released, the spindle can be rotated manually.
If you start the spindle in the state the spindle is released, the previously selected spindle drive gear
is selected and the spindle rotates at the speed specified by the previous S command.
The spindle released state can be canceled only by spindle start operation.

3-2-4. Spindle Orientation

Press the [SPINDLE ORIENTATION] key while pressing the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key to stop
the spindle in the predetermined fixed position. This operation is allowed even while the spindle is
rotating.
The spindle starts orientation and the lamp in the [SPINDLE ORIENTATION] key blinks. The lamp is
lit on completion of spindle orientation.
Spindle orientation state is canceled when the spindle is started.
The spindle orientation position and the spindle speed for orientation operation are set for machine
system parameters.
 6115-E P-51
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-2-5. Spindle Override 1%

Press the [OVERRIDE 1%] key to set rate of spindle override to increments or decrements of 1%.
When the rate of increment and decrement is set to 1%, the lamp at the upper left corner of the
[OVERRIDE 1%] key is lit up. If the [OVERRIDE 1%] key is pressed with the lamp lit, the lamp goes
off and the rate of spindle override is set in increments or decrements of 10 %.
When the lamp in the key is not lit (increments or decrements of 10%) and the first digit of the
spindle override rate is not “0”:
The first digit of spindle override rate is cleared to “0” by pressing the override key “▼”.
e.g.) Spindle override value: 85 → 80
The first digit of spindle override rate is cleared to “0” and the second digit is round out by pressing
the override key “▲”.
e.g.) Spindle override value: 85 → 90
 6115-E P-52
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-3. ATC

3-3-1. ATC Operation

The ATC is classified into the memory-random type and the fixed-address type.
The subsection “Setting Tool Numbers to Pot Numbers on Memory-random ATC” explains the
operations needed only for the memory-random ATC.
The subsection “Operation on the ATC OPERATION Screen” describes the operations applied to
both memory-random and fixed-address ATCs.

Setting Tool Numbers to Pot Numbers on Memory-random ATC

In the memory-random ATC system, the tool in the spindle is returned to the tool pot where the tool
to be set in the spindle next was held. Therefore, the correspondence between the tool pot numbers
and the tool numbers changes each time an automatic tool change cycle is carried out. This means
that the initial correspondence between the tool numbers and the tool pot numbers must be set
before starting the ATC.
For setting this correspondence, there are two methods as shown below.

a. Make the table listing the correspondence between the tool numbers and tool pot numbers
beforehand and set the correspondence at the ATC TOOL SET (POT REF) screen. At the
magazine, set the tools to the tool pots according to the set correspondence.

b. After mounting a tool in the spindle, return it to the specified tool pot or to an empty pot selected
automatically by manual tool change operation.

For method a), refer to “2-1. Basic Operation with Tool Data Setting” in SECTION 2 TOOL DATA
SETTING of DATA OPERATION.
This section deals with method b). The procedure for the setting of the correspondence is described
below.

(1) Press the (MANUAL) mode selection key.

The indicating lamp at the upper corner of the key lights and the
manual operation mode is selected.
ME32125R1100800110001
 6115-E P-53
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

(2) Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel. Press
the [ATC] key to display the ATC OPERATION screen.

2125R1100800110002

ME32125R1100800110003

Fig.3-1 ATC TOOL SET (MEMORY-RANDOM) Screen

(3) Set the data for POT NO., ATC TOOL and NXT TOOL.
The data to be set for these items are described below.

 RET POT NO.

Specify the pot number where the tool presently set in the spindle is returned.
To set a pot number, select [F1] (SET) in the function menu and input the desired pot
number.

[Supplement]

1) The allowable maximum number is the maximum number of pots.

2) An error occurs if a tool number has already been set for the specified pot number.
3) When a large-diameter tool designation has been made for the tool to be returned to a pot, an
error occurs unless the preceding and the next pots are set for a dummy tool or empty (no
tool).
 6115-E P-54
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

 ACT TOOL NO.

Specify the tool number of the tool presently set in the spindle.
Move the cursor to the input area of ACT TOOL NO. and select [F1] (SET) in the function
menu. This displays the SET pop-up window.
Enter the tool number of the tool to be mounted in the spindle. At this time, the tool data of
the tool must be registered in advance. For tool data registration, refer to “2-2-1. REGIST
TOOL DATA” in SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING in DATA OPERATION.

ME32125R1100800110004

Fig.3-2 SET Pop-up Window

[Supplement]

1) The allowable maximum number is 99999999.

2) An error occurs if a pot number has already been set for the specified tool number.
3) If large-diameter tool designation is made for the tool for which a pot number has already been
set for POT NO., an alarm occurs unless the preceding and the next pots are set for a dummy
tool (D) or empty (no tool).
4) If large-diameter tool designation is made in the state a pot number has not been set for the
ACT TOOL, an error occurs unless the pots at both sides of the specified pot are set for a
dummy tool (D) or empty (no tool).
5) When the Collision Avoidance System is provided, it is impossible to set ACT TOOL NO. on
this screen. To set ACT TOOL NO., open the MAGAZINE INFO sheet in the TOOL DATA
screen.
 6115-E P-55
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

 NXT TOOL NO.

Specify the tool number of the tool to be set in the spindle next.
When setting tools to the pots for the first time, this box should be left blank.
For setting the tool number on the NXT TOOL, the pop-up window is also used as setting
the data of the ACT TOOL.

[Supplement]

1) The allowable maximum tool number is the same as that of ACT TOOL.
2) An error occurs if the specified tool number has not been registered for a pot number.
3) Designation of a large-diameter tool (L) and a dummy tool (D) is not allowed.
4) An error occurs if a pot command is specified when a pot number is set at POT NO. in RET
POT NO.

Storing tools to magazine pots

When storing a tool to a magazine pot, there are two methods available as indicated below.

 Storing a tool by specifying a pot

 Storing a tool by using the function to search an empty pot automatically

The procedure for storing tools to magazine pots is explained below for each of these methods.
For the procedure for setting a tool to the spindle by manual operation, refer to the item describing
manual tool change operation.

Storing a tool by specifying a pot

Procedure :

1 Press the MANUAL key of the mode selection key to select manual operation mode.

2 Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel. Press the [ATC] key
on the right side of the screen to display the ATC OPERATION screen.

3 Move the cursor to POT NO. using the cursor keys.

4 Input the pot number and press the (WRITE) key.

5 Set a tool to the spindle.

6 Move the cursor to ACT TOOL using the cursor keys.

7 Select SET from the function menu, input the tool number for ACT TOOL and press the
(WRITE) key.
At this time, the tool data of ACT TOOL to be set must be registered in advance. For tool data
registration, refer to “2-2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA” in SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING in
DATA OPERATION. The NXT TOOL setting must be NONE. If a next tool number is set for
NXT TOOL, the set number must be cleared. To clear the set number, move the cursor to NXT
TOOL to be cleared, select [F1] (SET) from the function menu, and select [F5] (TOOL NO.
CLEAR). Then the NXT TOOL to which the cursor is located is cleared.
 6115-E P-56
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

8 Press the [1 CYCLE START].

The tool set in the spindle is returned to the specified pot and, at the same time, the
correspondence between the tool number and the tool pot number is set. If a tool number is set
at POT NO. in RET POT NO., an error occurs and tool return cycle is not executed.

[Supplement]

When the Collision Avoidance System is provided, setting ACT TOOL NO. triggers an error. To
set ACT TOOL NO., open the MAGAZINE INFO sheet in the TOOL DATA screen.

Storing a tool by using the function to search an empty pot automatically

Procedure :

1 Press the MANUAL key of the mode selection key to select manual operation mode.

2 Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel. Press the [ATC] key
on the right side of the screen to display the ATC OPERATION screen.

3 Clear the POT NO. setting by inputting “*”.

4 Set a tool in the spindle.

5 Input the tool number of the tool presently set in the spindle to ACT TOOL.
Setting for NXT TOOL must be “NONE”.

6 Press the [1 CYCLE START].

An empty pot closest to the presently indexed pot is automatically selected and the tool is
returned to this pot.

[Supplement]

1) If a tool number is already set for NXT TOOL when the [1 CYCLE START] button is
pressed, normal tool change cycle is executed.
2) The setting for POT NO. is automatically cleared after the execution of tool return cycle
called by pressing the [1 CYCLE START] button.
3) The setting for POT NO. is used for returning a tool from the spindle. Therefore, if the [1
CYCLE START] button is pressed with both POT NO. and NXT TOOL set, an error
occurs.
4) In the selection of an empty pot, search is made in the clockwise direction starting from
the presently indexed pot and the one found first (closest empty pot) is selected. If there
is no empty pot, an alarm occurs and the spindle tool is not returned to a pot.
5) When the Collision Avoidance System is provided, setting ACT TOOL NO. triggers an
error. To set ACT TOOL NO., open the MAGAZINE INFO sheet in the TOOL DATA
screen.
 6115-E P-57
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Operations on the ATC OPERATION Screen

Status indication and operation keys

Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel and then
press the [ATC] key on the right side of the screen to display the ATC OPERATION
screen.

2125R1100800130001

ME32125R1100800130002

The screen shows the following items:

ATC SEQ. NO. ATC operation sequence number

MAGAZINE POS. Currently indexed pot number
ACT TOOL NO. Number of the tool currently mounted to the spindle
NXT TOOL NO. Next tool number
RET POT NO. Number of the magazine pot to which the active tool is returned
Pot-tool correspondence Shows the combination of the magazine pot numbers and the
table stored tool numbers.
X: X-axis actual position
ACT POSI Y: Y-axis actual position
Z: Z-axis actual position
START OK: Indicates that the ATC is ready to start.
CYCLE RUN: Indicates that the ATC cycle is in process.
CONDITION MG INT.: Indicates that the manual interruption of the magazine
is active.
SYS CON. NO.: ATC diagnosis number
ATC DIAG. Displays the diagnosis message such as unsatisfied conditions.
 6115-E P-58
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

The function keys usable on this screen are as follows:

(1) [F1] (SET)

Used to set the ATC TOOL NO., the NXT TOOL NO. or RET POT NO. in manual operation
mode.
This function key appears only in the manual operation mode.
When the memory-random ATC is used and the Collision Avoidance System is provided,
setting ACT TOOL NO. triggers error “9439 Tool management number set impossible” is
displayed.

(2) [F2] (INT LOCK RELEASE)

ATC operation conditions “completion of spindle orientation” and “tool change position” are
ignored while this key is being pressed. However, the other mechanical conditions remain valid.

(3) [F3] (1 CYCLE START)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key.
When pressed, the machine automatically executes all the ATC operations.

(4) [F4] (RETURN CYCLE)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key. If
this cycle is executed before tool change arm rotation, the ATC returns the tool from the position
located when this switch is pressed without performing tool change. If executed after tool
change arm rotation, the ATC continues the ATC cycle.

(5) [F5] (1 STEP ADVANCE)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key. The
ATC operation sequence is executed step by step in ascending order.

(6) [F6] (1 STEP RETURN)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key. The
ATC operation sequence is executed step by step in descending order.

(7) [F7] (WINDOW CHANGE)

This key is used to switch the windows. The windows that can be switched are displayed in a
frame.

(8) [F8] (CLOSE)

Used to close the ATC operation screen.

* For detailed information on ATC, refer to the maintenance manual provided for each type of
machine.
 6115-E P-59
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Recovering ATC operation

 If the ATC stops during the cycle, discover the unsatisfied condition by displaying the machine
diagnosis message and, after restoring the condition, reset the ATC sequence number to “1” in
1-step advance operation.
For machine diagnosis messages, refer to the maintenance manual for your machine.

 If the power is interrupted during ATC cycle, the interlock conditions (completion of spindle
orientation and tool change position) are lost. To recover the ATC, operate the ATC using the [1
STEP ADVANCE] and [INTERLOCK RELEASE] keys to reset the ATC sequence number to “1”.

 If the NC is reset during ATC cycle, recover the ATC using the [1 STEP ADVANCE], [1 STEP
RETURN] and [RETURN CYCLE START] keys.

 If you reset the NC while a tool return cycle is executed, the next tool number is not reset to “0”
even if the ATC sequence number is returned to “1” using the [RETURN CYCLE] key. However,
the next tool number is reset to “0” before execution of a tool return cycle. This is because, if the
return cycle was interrupted near the end of the cycle and the next tool number is written with
ATC sequence number set to 1 using [1 STEP ADVANCE] key, a tool return cycle will be
executed in most cases.
To set “0” for the next tool number, select the MDI mode, input “T00”, then press the [CYCLE
START] button while pressing the [WRITE] key.
It is not possible to set “0” for the next tool number in the tool data setting operation. To set a
number other than “0” for the next tool number, set a desired number using the tool data setting
operation.
 6115-E P-60
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-3-2. Manual Tool Change Operation

To change a tool manually, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Press the [TOOL CHANGE CYCLE] button.

The X-, Y- and Z-axis return to the tool change position. Note that the order of axis operation
and details of this movements differ depending on the machine specifications.

2 Hold the tool in the spindle by hand and press the [TOOL UNCLAMP] button to remove the tool
from the spindle.

3 Set a new tool in the spindle and press the [TOOL CLAMP] button.
This completes tool change operation.
The lamps above the individual buttons light when the corresponding button is pressed to
indicate the status of tool change operation.

1 Press the [TOOL CHANGE CYCLE] button.

MANUAL TOOL CHANGE

TOOL CHANGE CYCLE TOOL CLAMP TOOL UNCLAMP 3 Press the [TOOL CLAMP] button.

2 Press the [TOOL UNCLAMP] button.

(Arrangement of the switches differs depending on the machine models.)

ME32125R1100800150001

Fig.3-3 Manual Tool Change Operation

If a tool is changed manually, the tool number of the tool presently set in the spindle and the
tool number displayed for ATC TOOL on the ATC/APC CONDITION screen do not agree
with each other. Change the ATC TOOL number so that the tool will not be returned to an
incorrect magazine pot.
 6115-E P-61
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-3-3. Manual Magazine Operation

To operate the magazine manually, turn the [MANUAL INT.] switch on the magazine operation panel
in the “ON” position.

Switch Name Function

MANUAL INT Even if the ATC is operating, ATC operation is suspended when the
[MANUAL INT.] switch is turned to the “ON” position. The indicating lamp
above the switch lights and enables manual magazine operation. If the
switch is operated in the state magazine operation could cause danger,
magazine operation is not enabled.
Returning the switch back to the “OFF” position allows the ATC to restart
the suspended operation automatically and complete the cycle to the end.
CONSTANT Rotates the magazine continuously without stopping at each pot.
INDEX
INDEX START CW: Rotates the magazine in the clockwise direction.
CCW: Rotates the magazine in the counterclockwise direction.
INDEX STOP Stops the magazine rotation. If this button is pressed while the magazine is
rotating continuously, the magazine stops rotating by indexing the nearest
pot position in the magazine rotating direction.
EMG. STOP Places the NC and the ATC in the emergency stop state.
(Refer to SECTION 1, “1-3. Emergency Stop”.)

To operate the magazine manually, follow the procedure indicated below.

1 Turn the [MANUAL INT] switch to the "I (ON)" position.

MG MANUAL

MANUAL INT CONSTANT INDEX 2 Turn the [CONSTANT INDEX] switch to the
O I O I
"I (ON)" or "O (OFF)" position.

3 Press the [INDEX START] button after

INDEX STOP INDEX START
O I turning it to either the "CW" or "CCW" position.

4 Press the [INDEX STOP] button to stop

the magazine that is rotating with the
[CONSTANT INDEX] switch set in the "I (ON)" position.
EMG. STOP

R ES E T
(Arrangement of the switches differs depending on the machine
models.)

ME32125R1100800160001

Fig.3-4 Manual Magazine Rotation Operation

 6115-E P-62
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

(1) Turn the [MANUAL INT.] switch to the “I (ON)” position. The indicating lamp lights and manual
magazine operation is enabled.

(2) Turn the [CONSTANT INDEX] switch to the “I (ON)” or “O (OFF)” position.
I (ON)------The magazine rotates continuously.
O (OFF)---The magazine stops at each pot.

(3) Press the [INDEX START] button after turning it to either the “CW” or “CCW” position.
How the magazine operates is shown below.
CONSTANT INDEX
Magazine Operation
INDEX START
Rotates the magazine continuously in the clockwise direction.
CW Magazine stops rotating when the [INDEX STOP] button is
I pressed.
(ON) Rotates the magazine continuously in the counterclockwise
CCW direction. Magazine stops rotating when the [INDEX STOP] button
is pressed.
Rotates the magazine in the clockwise direction. Magazine stops
CW
O at each pot.
(OFF) Rotates the magazine in the counterclockwise direction.
CCW
Magazine stops at each pot.

 If the [CONSTANT INDEX] switch is set in the “O (OFF)” position, the magazine keeps
rotating while the [INDEX START] button is held down. In this state, if the [INDEX START]
button is released, the magazine stops rotating by indexing the nearest pot in the rotating
direction.

(4) The magazine keeps rotating continuously if the [CONSTANT INDEX] switch is set in the “I
(ON)” position. To stop magazine rotation, press the [INDEX STOP] button and the magazine
stops rotating by indexing the nearest pot in the rotating direction.

3-3-4. Manual Tool Change during Automatic Operation

(1) Machining Center without ATC
The machine enters the tool change mode when M06 is executed.
After the machine has entered the tool change mode, change the tool manually in the manner
explained in 3-2. “Manual Tool Change Operation”.
After changing the tool manually, press the [TOOL CHANGE FINISH] button on the pendant
operation panel.

(2) MCR-BII, MCM-B, MCV-AII

The machine enters the tool change mode when M70 is executed.
After the machine has entered the tool change mode, change the tool manually in the manner
explained in 3-2. “Manual Tool Change Operation”.
After changing the tool manually, press the [TOOL CHANGE FINISH] button on the pendant
operation panel.
 6115-E P-63
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-4. APC

3-4-1. APC Operation

Operations on the APC Operation Screen

Status indication and operation keys

Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel and then the
[APC] key on the right side of the screen to display the APC OPERATION screen.

2125R1100800180001

ME32125R1100800180002

The screen shows the following items:

APC SEQ. NO. APC operation sequence number

X: X-axis actual position
ACT POSI Y: Y-axis actual position
Z: Z-axis actual position
START OK: Indicates that the APC is ready to start.
CYCLE RUN: Indicates that the APC cycle is in process.
CONDITION APC INT.: Indicates that the manual interruption of the APC is
active.
SYS CON. NO.: APC diagnosis number
APC DIAG. Displays the diagnosis message such as unsatisfied conditions.

* In the case of multi-pallet APC, the displayed contents differ from the above.
 6115-E P-64
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

The function keys usable on this screen are as follows:

(1) [F3] (1 CYCLE START)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key.
When pressed, the machine automatically executes all the APC operations.

(2) [F4] (RETURN CYCLE)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key. If
this cycle is executed before pallet rotation, the APC returns to the APC ready state without
changing pallets. If executed after pallet rotation, the APC continues the APC cycle.

(3) [F5] (1 STEP ADVANCE)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key. The
APC operation sequence is executed step by step in ascending order.

(4) [F6] (1 STEP RETURN)

This key is valid only when a green triangle is displayed at the upper left of the function key. The
APC operation sequence is executed step by step in descending order.

(5) [F7] (WINDOW CHANGE)

This key is used to switch the windows. The windows that can be switched are displayed in a
frame.

(6) [F8] (CLOSE)

Used to close the APC operation selection screen.

* For detailed information on APC, refer to the maintenance manual provided for each type of
machine.
 6115-E P-65
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-4-2. Automatic APC Operations

(1) Pallet Change
Automatic pallet change cycle is carried out by execution of M60 command.

(2) Workpiece Setup Completion

On receiving automatic pallet change (M code) command, the NC confirms that the workpiece
setup has been completed before executing the APC cycle. The workpiece setup completion
signal is sent when the [SETUP COMPLETION] button is pressed.
The APC does not operate if the workpiece setup completion is not confirmed (lamp OFF) even
when the automatic pallet change M code command is specified. In this case, the diagnosis
message tells that the workpiece setup is not confirmed. Make sure that the workpiece has
been set on the pallet and press the [SETUP COMPLETION] button.
In the manual mode, the NC always judges that the [SETUP COMPLETION] button is pressed.
When automatic pallet change is completed by M command, the NC automatically releases the
work ready completion state (and turns off the work ready completion lamp.)
Note that the [RESET] button is not effective in releasing the work ready completion state.

(3) Work Ready Cancel

When you want to release the work ready completion state in such a case where the [SETUP
COMPLETION] button is pressed by mistake, press the [W. LOAD RESET (or WORK READY
CANCEL)] button if such a button is provided. If not provided, set the [MANUAL INT.] switch on
the APC operation panel to ON and OFF to release the work ready completion state. When
released, the work ready indicating lamp goes off.
 6115-E P-66
SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION

3-4-3. Manual APC Operation

Pallets can be changed manually by setting the [MANUAL INT.] switch on the APC operation panel
to ON.

APC OPERATION

CYCLE START SETUP COMPLETION

MANUAL INT.
OFF ON

EMG. STOP
SLIDE HOLD DOOR
SE T
OPEN RE

CLOSE

ME32125R1100800200001

Fig.3-5 APC Operation Panel

(The above switch layout varies with the machine model.)

Switch Name Function

If this switch is set to ON during APC operation, the automatic pallet
change cycle is temporarily interrupted, enabling manual pallet change. At
this time, the lamp above the switch comes ON. If the manual pallet
MANUAL change is expected to cause accidents, the manual pallet change mode
INT. ON/OFF will not be established.To resume automatic pallet change cycle, set this
switch to OFF and press the [SETUP COMPLETION] button. The APC
unit automatically restarts APC operation from the interrupted sequence to
the cycle end.
SETUP After setting up a workpiece on the pallet, press this button. The button
COMPLETION lamp lights when the NC acknowledges setup completion.
OPEN: the APC door opens.
CLOSE: the APC door closes.
DOOR OPEN/ This toggle switch is valid even when the [MANUAL INI.] switch is set at
CLOSE OFF. However, the switch CLOSE command is invalid during automatic
pallet change cycle. If the switch is turned to CLOSE, the door will be
closed after completion of the automatic pallet change cycle.
CYCLE START Starts the NC.
SLIDE HOLD Stops the NC in the slide-hold mode.
Shuts off the control power to the NC. (Refer to SECTION 1, “1-3.
EMG. STOP
Emergency Stop”.)
 6115-E P-67
SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

MDI is the abbreviation for “manual data input”. This function allows a program to be written one block at a
time by inputting commands at the keyboard, and executed in the same way as in automatic operation.
To perform MDI operation, press the [MDI] key from the operation mode selection keys to establish the MDI
operation mode.

4-1. Procedure for MDI Operation

To perform MDI operation, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Input one block of commands.

The data is displayed in the “INPUT” field.

2 Press the (WRITE) key.

The input data is transferred to the BUFFER field. Note that RTMDI (Return from MDI) is
automatically inserted in addition to the data input in the “BUFFER” display area.
It is not possible to input more than one block of data to the BUFFER field or BUFFER display
area.
If a block of data is input to the BUFFER field although it already contains a block, this existing
input data is cleared.

3 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

The data in the BUFFER display area are executed. The data in the BUFFER display area are
transferred to the CURRENT display area in the MDI program screen.

4 Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3.

 6115-E P-68
SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

4-2. Automatic Operation and MDI Operation

 It is possible to interrupt automatic operation to execute MDI operation.

 When the operation mode is changed from automatic to MDI, the blocks having been read to
buffer area (“ ” symbol indicates the last block in the buffer area) are executed and then the
operation stops. Operation mode is changed to MDI after that.
If the NC is operating with the single block function ON, the operation mode changes to MDI
after the completion of the block that was executed when the MDI mode was selected.

[Program] [MDI]

N110
N111 G00 X100 Y100
N112
N113 RTMDI
N114
ME32125R1100900030001

Fig.4-1 Changing Operation Mode between Automatic and MDI

 If operation mode is changed to MDI during the execution of N110 block while the NC is
operating in the automatic mode (single block function OFF), the program is executed up to
N113 block then the NC stops. MDI operation may be executed in this state. After executing
several blocks in the MDI mode, return the operation mode to automatic and the execution of
the program restarts from N114.

 The commands entered in the MDI mode are executed in the same manner as if they were
specified in a program. Therefore, the modal information executed in the MDI mode operation
remains valid when the operation mode is changed to automatic. Similarly, the modal
information valid at the time the mode was changed from automatic to MDI applies to the
commands executed in the MDI mode.

 If the mode is changed from automatic to MDI in the cutter radius compensation mode, the
compensation mode is valid for the axis feed commands executed in the MDI mode.

 If the mode is changed to MDI during automatic operation (single block function OFF), it is
possible to input commands while the present block is executed. This allows the input
commands to be executed immediately after the completion of the present block.
Whether this operation is enabled or not is set at PROGRAM BUFFERING of NC optional
parameter (OPERATING RELATION PARAMETER).
 6115-E P-69
SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

4-3. Subprogram Call in MDI Operation

 In MDI operation, although the “call after axis move” (MODIN) command cannot be used,
simple call command (CALL) may be used. To call a subprogram, however, it is necessary to
select a main program that contains the command to call the desired subprogram before calling
it in MDI operation.

 During the execution of a subprogram, ON/OFF setting of the single block function is valid. If a
subprogram is called with the single block function OFF, the called subprogram is executed to
the end before the operation stops. If the single block function is ON, the operation stops after
the execution of one block in the subprogram. The subprogram is then executed block by block
as the [CYCLE START] button is pressed.
It is not allowed to input new data until the execution of subprogram ends.

[Supplement]

1) Commands not executable in MDI operation

 Branch commands (GOTO, IF)
 Schedule program commands (VSET, PSELECT, etc.)
2) MDI operation is permitted even during the execution of a schedule program if a main program
is not executed.
3) The [CYCLE START] button becomes valid when it is released.
 6115-E P-70
SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

4-4. MDI Input Selection Function

4-4-1. Overview
The MDI input selection function allows the MDI operation to be executed by selecting a command
from the finished command history or from the command list registered in advance.

The function has the following features.

- The MDI command can be executed by selecting the command from the HISTORY sheet or the
command list.
- The finished MDI commands are automatically stored in the HISTORY sheet.
- MDI commands frequently used can be registered in the command list.
- The command list can be edited in the program operation screen.
- Commands input in the command lines can be edited directly.

4-4-2. Procedure
The procedure for MDI input selection function is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the MDI mode key to display the MDI OPERATION screen.

2 Select [F1] (MDI EDIT) from the function menu.

3 The MDI SELECT pop-up window appears.

The MDI SELECT pop-up window has the COMMAND LIST sheet and the HISTORY sheet.

ME32125R1100900060001
 6115-E P-71
SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

4 Select the command to be executed.

Select either the COMMAND LIST sheet or the HISTORY sheet. Then select the command to
be executed from the list in the touch panel or by using the cursor key.

5 Input the selected command to the MDI command line.

When [F1] (MDI INPUT) is selected from the function menu, the selected command is input to
the MDI command line.
The input command can be edited using the cursor key, BS key, and DEL key in the command
line.

6 Press the Enter key.

The input command is displayed in the buffer.

7 When the START button in the machine operation panel is pressed, the command is executed.

[Supplement]

Supplement for HISTORY sheet

 Up to 20 pieces of history data are stored and updated serially in the HISTORY sheet.
 By selecting history [F7] (COMMAND LIST ADD) while the command displayed in the history
is selected, it is possible to copy the command to the command list from the HISTORY sheet.
It is advised that commands frequently used be registered in the command list.

[Supplement]

Supplement for command list

 The command list is stored as a file in "MD1:".
The file name is "COMMAND-LIST.MDI".
The command list file can be edited in the program edit screen.
 A command exceeding 128 characters cannot be executed as an MDI command.
 The maximum file size of the command list file is 2MB.

4-4-3. Parameter
The MDI input selection function can be turned on or off by setting the following parameters.
- Optional parameter (long word, word, bit) screen
No.110 bit5 ON: effective OFF: ineffective

4-4-4. Error message

9143 Failed to access the command list file.
The command list file cannot be opened, added or deleted.
[Character-string]
None
[Code]
1: The command list file is being edited.
2: The command list file is protected.
3: Out of space for the command list file.
4: The command list file cannot be opened because the file size is over.
5: The command list file cannot be opened because it is the directory.
6: Fatal error with the command list file.
 6115-E P-72
SECTION 4 MDI OPERATION

[Probable Faulty Locations]

Operation error. Or the command list file cannot be opened or cannot be written to the
command list file.
[Measures to Take]
1: If the file is being edited, quit editing.
2: If the file is protected, release the protection.
3: Secure the space by deleting unnecessary commands, and then add.
4: Reduce the file size by deleting unnecessary commands, and then start the operation.
5: Change or delete the directory name, and then start the operation.
6: Consult your local service center.
 6115-E P-73
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

“Automatic operation” means operation of the machine according to the operation commands in a program.

5-1. Program Files

There are the following four types of files:

 Main program files

 Subprogram files

 System subprogram files

 Schedule program files

Part programs are managed by classifying them according to the type of part (for example gear,
shaft or flange), and this is achieved by assigning both a “main file name” and “extension”.
Main file name: Consists of a character-string of 16 characters beginning with an alphabetic
character.
Extension: Consists of a character-string of 3 characters beginning with an alphabetic character.
The following characters can be used for file names: alphabetic characters, numerals and “-”
(hyphen).
A program is assigned a “main file name” first, then an “extension”. A period must be entered as a
delimiter between the main file name and the extension.
Normally, a program file comprises one or more programs: programs within a program file are
delimited by program names and program numbers and are handled as different programs.
Program names and program numbers are constituted as follows:

 Program name: Address character “O” and four alphanumerics beginning with an alphabetic
character.

 Program number: Address character “O” and four numerals.

Programs begin and end in four different ways depending on the type of program file, as follows.

 Main program
Begins with “program number” and ends with “M02” or “M30”.

 Subprogram
Begins with “program number” and ends with “RTS”.

 System subprogram
Begins with “program number” and ends with “RTS”.

 Schedule program
All the data in a schedule program file is the schedule program itself.
 6115-E P-74
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

(1) Main Program Files

Format for file name: Main file name.MIN
A file comprising one or more main programs, with the main file name followed by the extension
“MIN”.
There are two methods for making a main program file:

 Classifying programs according to type of workpiece, such as “gear”, “shaft”, or “flange”.

 Assigning programs for each workpiece one file name.

(2) Subprogram Files

Format for file name: Main file name.SUB
Patterns often repeated when cutting parts are filed in a subprogram file when preparing part
programs.
A subprogram file comprises one or more subprograms, with “SUB” used as the extension.
When selecting a main program that calls subprograms, the subprogram file for the relevant
subprogram(s) must also be called.

(3) System Subprogram Files

Format for file name: Main file name.SSB
Basically, system subprogram files are the same as the subprogram files explained above.
However, whereas subprogram files are called at any time as required, system subprogram
files are stored in the operation memory as frequently used machining patterns.
A system subprogram file comprises one or more system subprograms, and the file name
consists of the main file name and the extension “SSB”.
Once stored in the operation memory, programs can be accessed from the main program as
required.

(4) Schedule Program File

Format for file name: Main file name.SDF
Schedule programs are used when controlling several part programs prepared in accordance
with a production schedule.
A schedule program file consists of one schedule program, and its file name is suffixed by
“SDF”.

[Preparation before automatic operation]

Press the operation mode selection key [AUTO] to establish the automatic operation mode.
 6115-E P-75
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-2. Program Selection

5-2-1. Selection of Main/Subprogram

To execute a part program in the automatic operation mode, the program to be executed must be
selected.
All programs stored in the hard disk have file names. The required main program is selected from
the stored part programs, then the subprograms called by this main program are selected and the
programs are stored in the operation memory of the NC.
To select a part program, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (MAIN PRG_OPER) from the function menu.

2 Select [F1] (PROGRAM SELECT) from the pop-up function menu.

The MAIN PROGRAM SELECT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000030001

Fig.5-1 MAIN PROGRAM SELECT Pop-up Window

3 Designate the desired main program file in the main program file list.
The list can be scrolled using the page keys or the up/down cursor keys.
To change the display pattern of the list, select [F2] (FILE NAME) or [F3] (SORT) from the pop-
up function menu.
The respective changes to the list contents are as follows.

 FILE NAME: The file name pattern for list display is changed.

 SORT: The order of file names is changed on the basis of the file name, size, date or
extension name.

If a directory is found in the main program file list, locate the cursor on the directory and press
the [WRITE] key to display the directory's main program file list.
 6115-E P-76
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

4 From the subprogram file list, designate the subprogram file called in the main program. Use
the left/right cursor keys to select the input area.
If not designating a subprogram file, specify “NOT SELECT”.
The subprogram directory can be changed in the same way as changing directory of the main
program file list.

5 Input the main program name in the program name input area.

6 Select the [RUNNING METHOD], [PROGRAM SIZE], [SUB PROGRAM/BRANCH], [AUTO

SCALE (ANIM)], and [MATERIAL DRAW (ANIM)].
The [RUNNING METHOD], [PROGRAM SIZE], and [SUB PROGRAM/BRANCH] selection
buttons allow you to set the required parameters by a method other than the usual parameter
setting method as shown below. For details, refer to the table on the Step 7.
RUNNING PROGRAM SIZE SUB PROGRAM/
METHOD BRANCH
A-Mtd = NORMAL - (Not selectable)
B-Mtd = LARGE INCLUDE
S-Mtd = LARGE NOT

7 With the [AUTO SCALE] (ANIM) button, select whether the animation drawing range is
automatically adjusted to the material size (EFFECT) or not (INEFFECT) when the NC reads
the material data to be animated.
With the MATERIAL DRAW (ANIM) button, select whether the material is automatically drawn
(EFFECT) or not (INEFFECT) on the animation screen when a program is selected and the
animation material data is read.
 6115-E P-77
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

The table below shows the relationship between the running method and the program size.

Program Size =
Item Program Size = Large Volume
Normal
Running Method Method A Method B Method S
Limited by the total size of the stored
Main program
main programs
Subprogram Total size of the -
Restrictions programs is Total size of the
Library program programs differs Total size of the
on program limited by the size programs differs
size of the operation according to the
selected size of according to the
Schedule program buffer area. selected size of
operation buffer
area. operation buffer
area.
Not available
Subprogram function Available Available
(alarm)
Not available
Branch function Available Available
(alarm)
Designation Main program
of jump Subprogram Sequence label
Sequence label or
destination Sequence -
Library program sequence number
(branch number
command) Schedule program
Limits of sequence labels in main
No limit No limit No limit
program
Program select command
*1 *1 Ends immediately
execution time
*1 Execution time depends on the size of a program.

8 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

The designated main/subprogram file and main program is read to the operation memory and
the MAIN PROGRAM SELECT pop-up window closes.

9 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

This starts operation in accordance with the main program.

[Supplement]

1) An error occurs if the designated main program does not exist.

2) Once a program has been selected, it remains valid until the next program selection is made.
However, selection of a schedule program will make the selected program invalid.
3) NC does not read the lines that contain % codes from the first line to the line that does not
contain any % code. Once a line that does not contain any % code is found, NC starts reading
from the next % code. This function is applicable to the HD0: device.
4) NC does not read the first line if it contains any null code. If a null code is in the second or later
line, NC does not read from the null code onwards. This function is applicable to the TC: and
HD0: device.
5) By skipping % codes (null codes), display of the program to be executed differs from the
display of the program to be edited. With the one touch IGF edit function, NC displays the
location considering the lines that contain % codes (null codes).
 6115-E P-78
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-2-2. Schedule Program Function

The schedule program function allows continuous automatic machining of different types of
workpiece using such as a pallet changer.
The procedure for selecting and executing schedule programs is as follows:
For details on programming for the schedule program function, refer to SECTION 12 SCHEDULE
PROGRAMS in PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (SCHEDULE PRG_OPER) from the function menu.

2 Select [F1] (PROGRAM SELECT) from the function menu.

The SCHEDULE PROGRAM SELECT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000040001

Fig.5-2 SCHEDULE PROGRAM SELECT Pop-up Window

3 Designate the required program file in the schedule program list.

The list can be scrolled using the page keys or the up/down cursor keys. To move the cursor
between the program list area and the UPDATE setting areas, use the right/left cursor keys.
To change the display pattern of the list, select [F2] (FILE NAME), or [F3] (SORT) from the pop-
up function menu.
The respective changes to list contents are as follows.

 FILE NAME: The file pattern for list display is changed.

 SORT: The order of file names is changed on the basis of the file name, size, date or
extension name.

If a directory is found in the schedule program list, locate the cursor on the directory, and press
the [WRITE] key to display the directory's schedule program list.
 6115-E P-79
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

4 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

The designated schedule program file is read to the operation memory and the SCHEDULE
PROGRAM SELECT pop-up window closes.

5 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

CYCLE START
This starts operation in accordance with the schedule program.
If the [CYCLE STOP] key is provided on the machine operation
panel, it can be used to select cycle operation. That is, if schedule
operation is started after turning on this key, operation stops after
completing one main program. To execute the next main program,
press the [CYCLE START] button. ME32125R1101000040002

[Supplement]

1) Always reset the NC before selecting a schedule program. If a schedule program is

selected while the NC is running, an error occurs.
2) To carry out normal operation (automatic operation by selecting a program) after
selecting a schedule program, select the program again.
3) When schedule program operation is started by pressing the [CYCLE START] button
with the single block function on, a main program is selected by the schedule program
first, then the NC waits for a cycle start. Pressing the [CYCLE START] button causes the
NC to run in the normal single block mode.
Note that operation does not stop at a block of VSET, IF, and GOTO.
4) When the [RESET] switch is pressed during schedule program operation (due to
occurrence of an alarm, for example), and then the interrupted program is restarted, the
part program selected at the time the [RESET] switch was pressed is executed from the
beginning, and the scheduled operation is continued.
If the number of times the part program is to be repeated is specified in the program
selection block of the schedule program, the interrupted cycle is not counted (if operation
is reset during the third cycle, the operation on starting up again is still regarded as the
third cycle).
5) When the [CYCLE START] button is pressed after selecting a schedule program, a main
program is selected and operation starts after the selection of a main program. If the NC
is reset while a main program is selected, a main program is not selected.
6) The main program executed according to the execution of a schedule program is cleared
from the operation buffer after the completion of it.
 6115-E P-80
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-3. Cycle Start and Slide Hold

5-3-1. Cycle Start

Pressing the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operation panel starts NC operation in
accordance with the part program already selected. It also starts NC operation according to the one
block of a program input by the MDI operation.
When cycle start is executed after the NC has been reset, NC operation starts from the beginning of
a part program.
When cycle start is executed after a stop - for example a single block stop or program stop -
program execution starts from the next block. If the program is displayed, the step being executed is
indicated with an arrow “→”.
Pressing the [CYCLE START] button during slide hold restarts the interrupted function generation.

[Supplement]

1) Execution of a selected program starts at the point when the [CYCLE START] button is
released after being pressed. However, during the slide hold state, program operation is
started at the moment the [CYCLE START] button is pressed.
2) During program selection, sequence number search, and sequence restart search, pressing
the [CYCLE START] button has no effect.
3) While the [SLIDE HOLD] button is pressed, pressing the [CYCLE START] button has no
effect.
4) While the NC is operating, the [RUN] indicating lamp is lit, except when the machine is
stopped in the slide hold state.
5) Even in the data setting mode, cycle start is possible if the previously selected mode is
automatic or MDI and POSSIBLE is selected at CYCLE START AT THE SETTING of NC
optional parameter (OPERATING RELATION PARAMETER).
6) While the operation is interrupted due to the occurrence of an alarm (alarm P, A, B, C), cycle
start by pressing the [CYCLE START] button is impossible.
7) An error occurs if the [CYCLE START] button is pressed after a sequence restart search has
been executed. To start operation after the completion of a sequence restart search, press the
[SEQUENCE RESTART] key.

5-3-2. Slide Hold

Axis feed or program execution started by pressing the [CYCLE START] button can be suspended
by pressing the [SLIDE HOLD] button.
“Slide hold” means a stop during axis feed, while “start-up hold” means a stop either before or after
execution of axis motion commands.
“Slide hold” and “start-up hold” can be classified as follows:

(1) Stop during function generation

If the [SLIDE HOLD] button is pressed during rapid traverse or cutting feed, this axis motion is
stopped, with deceleration if necessary. If the axis stops before it reaches the target point, the
machine is placed in the slide hold state. If the axis has already reached the target point before
the operation is stopped by pressing the [SLIDE HOLD] button, all other machine operations
specified in the same block are completed before the machine enters the start-up hold state
(the same state as a stop in the single block mode, or program stop).
The machine also enters the slide hold state if a dwell operation is aborted due to the pressing
of the [SLIDE HOLD] button.
 6115-E P-81
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

(2) Stop during operations other than function generation (during miscellaneous function
operations)
If the [SLIDE HOLD] button is pressed during the execution of a miscellaneous function, the
[SLIDE HOLD] indicating lamp lights although the miscellaneous function operation does not
stop. Since the machine stops after the completion of the miscellaneous function operation, the
machine enters the start-up hold state.

[Supplement]

1) If a miscellaneous function command is specified with an axis motion command in the same
block, these commands are executed in the following manner.
With: Execution of a miscellaneous function command and an axis motion command start
simultaneously.
After: Execution of a miscellaneous function command starts after the completion of an axis
motion command.
In either case, operation is suspended by the pressing of the [SLIDE HOLD] button as
indicated below.
Pressing the [SLIDE HOLD] button during axis feed (including dwelling): Slide hold
Pressing the [SLIDE HOLD] button during operations other than axis feed: Start-up stop
2) While the machine is in the slide hold state (this does not include the start-up hold state), the
[SLIDE HOLD] indicating lamp is lit. Although the machine is still operating during the slide
hold state, the [RUN] indicating lamp is unlit.
3) When the machine is placed in the start-up hold state by pressing the [SLIDE HOLD] button,
both the [SLIDE HOLD] and [RUN] indicating lamps go off.
4) During tapping in G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (reverse tapping cycle) fixed cycle, axis feed
does not stop immediately even if the [SLIDE HOLD] button is pressed but the operation stops
in the slide hold state after the completion of axis feed for tapping. Note this does not apply to
a synchronized tapping cycle that is called by G284 and G274. For details, refer to SECTION
3, SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING FUNCTION in SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MANUAL.

Rapid traverse
Cutting feed

During this axis movement, slide hold does not take place.
ME32125R1101000060001

Fig.5-3 Slide Hold Operation during Tapping

5) Slide hold operation is enabled or disabled from the block where M141 (slide hold valid) or
M140 (slide hold invalid) is specified respectively. While M140 is valid, the machine does not
suspend operation even if the slide hold button is pressed. When the NC is reset, M141 is
valid.
 6115-E P-82
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-4. Resetting the NC

“Resetting” the NC means initializing the internal state of the NC unit.
The NC is reset in the following cases:

(1) When the [RESET] switch on the NC operation panel is pressed.

(2) When the [MACHINE LOCK] key on the machine operation panel is turned on or off.

(3) When the NC operation mode is changed from manual to MDI or automatic by pressing the
(MDI) or (AUTO) mode selection key on the NC operation panel.

(4) When the NC operation mode is changed from automatic or MDI to manual by pressing the
(MANUAL) mode selection key on the NC operation panel.

(5) When the operation mode is changed from manual to a data setting mode with the mode
selection keys on the NC operation panel, the NC is not reset; however, the NC is reset when
the mode is next changed to automatic or MDI.

(6) When a reset signal is received from an external device.

When the NC is reset, the machine stops immediately and the internal state of the NC unit is
initialized.
Resetting the NC with the procedure (3), (4), or (5) is referred to as "mode reset." Note that spindle-
related settings (direction, positioning, speed, gear selection) and coolant settings are NOT affected
by the mode reset and thus keep the previous setting.

[Supplement]

If the [RESET] switch is pressed while an axis is moving, the axis motion stops after deceleration.
The NC is actually initialized after the axis has stopped. Note that even if the [RESET] switch is
held down, the NC is reset only once.
 6115-E P-83
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-5. Sequence Number Search and Mid-Cycle Start

To start a main program part way through, search the desired sequence either by specifying the
sequence name or by using the cursor keys and press the [CYCLE START] button. The main
program starts from the located sequence.

5-5-1. Sequence Number Search

To execute a sequence number search, follow the procedure below:

Sequence Number Search by a Sequence Name or Sequence Number

In the automatic operation mode, check that the main program has been correctly selected (that it
has been read to the operation memory), then follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (MAIN PRG_OPER) from the function menu.

2 Select [F4] (NUMBER SEARCH) from the function menu.

The SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000100001

Fig.5-4 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH Pop-up Window

 6115-E P-84
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

3 Input the desired sequence name.

4 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

The designated sequence name is searched for from the start of the main program, and the
pointer moves to the position where a match is found.
On completion of the sequence search, the SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH pop-up window
closes.

An error is displayed in the following cases:

 When the designated sequence name does not exist in the program.

 When a schedule program file is being executed (from schedule cycle start to END).

 Set an NC optional parameter (OPERATING RELATION PARAMETER), SEQUENCE

NUMBER SEARCH AFTER NC START to enable or disable the sequence number search
during main program execution (including single block operation).

 When the main program has not been selected correctly.

[Supplement]

1) It is possible to execute a sequence number search during execution of a schedule program

or main program, provided that the NC is reset immediately beforehand.
2) It is also possible to carry out a sequence number search in the same manner as in a normal
part program.
 6115-E P-85
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Sequence Search by Cursors

In the automatic operation mode, check that the main program has been correctly selected (that it
has been read to the operation memory), then follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (MAIN PRG_OPER) from the function menu.

The CURRENT MAIN/SUB PROGRAM window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000110001

Fig.5-5 CURRENT MAIN/SUB PROGRAM Window

2 Move the pointer to a desired sequence by pressing the cursor keys.

[Supplement]

This method of sequence search (using cursor keys) is also usable on the screen showing a
main program.
 6115-E P-86
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-5-2. Mid-Cycle Start (Start after Sequence Number Search)

When the [CYCLE START] button is pressed after a sequence number search, the program is
executed from the present pointer position.
Since the program part skipped due to sequence number search is all invalid, achieve the status
that would result from executing the skipped part of the program before pressing the [CYCLE
START] button.

[Supplement]

1) The sequence number search operation just moves the pointer; modal command values and
coordinate command values are all disregarded.
Instructions relating to subprograms such as CALL and GOTO are also disregarded.
2) A sequence number search is used when restarting operation from the division between one
machining process and the next. For details on restarting at a block part way through
machining, refer to “5-6-1. RESTART”.
3) In a sequence number search, it is not possible to specify the number of times a sequence
should be repeated.
4) The presence of “/” (block delete) has no effect on a sequence number search.
 6115-E P-87
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-6. RESTART and Sequence Restart

The return search and sequence restart functions are used to restart automatic operation after
taking necessary measures like changing a tool if automatic operation is interrupted due to problems
such as tool breakage.
The procedure for restarting an interrupted automatic operation using these functions is indicated
below. The return search function processes the program up to the specified sequence while
moving the pointer. After that the sequence restart function moves the axes to the final target point
of the program having been processed at a cutting feedrate when the [SEQUENCE RESTART] key
is pressed. Then, the automatic operation restarts from the specified sequence when the [CYCLE
START] button is pressed.

5-6-1. RESTART
In the automatic operation mode, check that the main program has been correctly selected (that it
has been read to the operation memory), then follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (MAIN PRG_OPER) from the function menu.

2 Select [F2] (RESTART) from the function menu.

The RESTART pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000140001

Fig.5-6 RESTART Pop-up Window

 6115-E P-88
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

3 Specify the return search method - input a sequence name or block counter, or select [F6]
(LAST) from the pop-up function menu.
When you input the sequence name, the screen shows the relative number of blocks from
sequence name to the return point (SEQ. NAME/BLK COUNTER) and the number of
repetitions (REPEAT NUMBER) in addition to the current display.
Each of these input items is explained below. (For more details, refer to “SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS MANUAL SECTION 4 UPGRADED SEQUENCE RESTART FUNCTION,
Sequence Restart command”)

 A NUMBER OF BLOCK BEYOND SEQ. NAME

Input the number of relative blocks from the sequence name to the return point.

 REPEAT NUMBER
Input the number of times the specified sequence should be repeated. Setting is possible
for up to “9999” and if entry is omitted, it is regarded as “1”.

 AXIS MOVEMENT ORDER

Select from “NONE”, “+X”, “+Y”, “+Z”, “-X”, “-Y” and “-Z”.
Positive and negative signs (+, -) before the axis name means “move to the first” and
“move to the last”, respectively.

 MID-BLOCK RESTART (only when the mid-block restart function is selected)

Select from NOTHING, MC POSIT and SLIDE HOLD.

 RETURN AXIS
Input is required for this item only when “MC POSIT” is selected for “MID-BLOCK START”.
Input any of “X”, “Y” and “Z”.

 REAL 3D GRAPHIC DRAW DURING RESTART

Choose whether the animation drawing (real 3D) is effective or ineffective during restart
operation.
To specify the sequence blocks to the end of program, select [F6] (LAST) from the pop-up
function menu. If [F6] (LAST) is selected, the data set at the RESTART pop-up window is
ignored.

[Supplement]

The sequence name or block counter input field can accept the input of asterisk “*”.
The asterisk “*” means the previously executed block counter value (displayed on the title
bar of the screen). Further, + or – sign can be used for addition or subtraction of the block
counter value.
Ex. If you input “*–2” when the previous counter value is 415, the program return to the block
No. 413.

If a block counter is input instead of a sequence name, the RESTART pop-up window
does not display the relative number of blocks from the sequence name to the return point
or the number of repetitions.
Set the other items in the same manner as the items displayed by the input of a sequence
name.
 6115-E P-89
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

ME32125R1101000140002

Fig.5-7 RESTART Pop-up Windows

4 Select [F7] (OK).

The return operation is performed up to the specified sequence.
The return operation is performed in the same manner as normal operation excluding that
function generation and external output of S, T and M codes are not executed. Subprogram
call, return from a subprogram and coordinate system shift are all executed.
The term “block count” means the counted number of executed sequences beginning with the
start of program after resetting. Control statement such as GOTO and CALL is not counted.
Since the block count data and the sequence name are not cleared by the NC reset operation
or turning on/off of the power, they can be used effectively for restoring the operation after
resetting the NC. They are cleared at the start-up of the NC.

[Supplement]

1) An error occurs if return search is executed during the execution of a schedule or main
program.
2) If [F6] (LAST) is selected for [F4] (RESTART) method, restart operation is possible up to
M02 (or M30) in a program. In this case, the NC is not reset by M02 (or M30).

5-6-2. Sequence Restart

The sequence restart operation is possible only after the completion of return search operation.
(For return search, refer to “5-6-1. RESTART”.)
The status of the NC that should be after the execution of the program up to the specified sequence
is restored automatically in the order indicated below when the [SEQUENCE RESTART] key is
pressed.
 6115-E P-90
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Automatic Restoration of Miscellaneous Functions

 Restoring the last S code

If there is an S command, the S code of that command is executed unconditionally.

 T code is not restored automatically.

Since a T code (next tool command) is not restored automatically, it is necessary to set the
correct tool number in the tool data setting mode if the presently displayed next tool number is
incorrect. If the next tool number is “0”, input it in the MDI operation before executing search.

 Only M codes related to spindle operation can be restored.

Since M codes are processed in groups, the last modal state of the individual M code groups is
restored.

 M03, M04, M05 and M19 are regarded as M codes in the same group, and the last state of
them is restored.

 M codes related to ATC operation (M06, M63, M64 and M65) and those related to APC
operation (M60, etc.) are not restored automatically. The operator must select a tool.

 One-shot M codes (M00, M01, etc.) are not restored automatically.

 The axes move to the point to be reached at the execution of the return sequence at a manual
cutting feedrate.

 When the axes reach the return point in the sequence restart operation, the operation stops at
that point independent of the on/off state of the single block function.
To restart the operation, press the [CYCLE START] button.

(1) Execute by inputting sequence name “N100”.

The NC prepares for the restoration of the last state after the execution of N100.

RESTART

N99
N100

ME32125R1101000160001

Fig.5-8 Sequence Return Search

(2) Press the [SEQUENCE RESTART] key. The auxiliary commands such as S, T and M are output
to the PLC and after the confirmation of the answer signals for these commands, the axes move
to the target point in the restart sequence at a manual cutting feedrate.

(3) The axes stop at the return point independent of the on/off state of the single block function.
To restart the operation, press the [CYCLE START] button.
 6115-E P-91
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-7. Sequence Stop (Optional)

The sequence stop function allows the operation to be stopped at a specified sequence. It is
possible to specify the desired sequence during automatic operation. Note that the sequence
specified for this operation must be the one having been not executed.
The operation stops in the same manner as in the single block stop.
After the stop, pressing the [CYCLE START] button can restart the operation.
The sequence stop operation procedure is indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (MAIN PRG_OPER) from the function menu.

2 Select [F3] (NUMBER STOP) from the pop-up function menu.

The NUMBER STOP pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000170001

Fig.5-9 NUMBER STOP Pop-up Window

 6115-E P-92
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

3 Input the desired sequence name.

4 Select [F6] (ENTRY).

When the block of the specified sequence name is read during automatic operation, operation
stops after the execution of the specified sequence.
Execution by sequence name N112
After the execution of N112, operation stops before executing N113.

N105
N106
:
NUMBER STOP :
:

N111
N112
N113
ME32125R1101000170002

Fig.5-10 Sequence Stop

In the state a sequence name has been set for number stop, it is possible to specify a new
sequence name to change the present setting. Selection of [F7] (ENTRY CANCEL) cancels
the specified number stop.

[Supplement]

1) Setting of a number stop is cleared when the NC is reset.

2) Sequence names are treated as character string and comparison of numbers is not
executed.
3) An error occurs if sequence stop is set during schedule operation.
4) Setting of number stop is possible both before and during the execution of a main
program as long as the main program is selected correctly.
5) If a sequence name of the sequence already executed is set as the sequence name for
sequence stop, the set sequence name is disregarded.
6) Operation will not be stopped by the number stop function with the blocks with following
settings. Be careful when specifying a block for sequence stop.
 Block having only the sequence name
 Block without the address command excluding the sequence name or program name
(comment only, or variables and calculation only)
 Block that changes the flow of control (CALL, GOTO, IF, G/M code macro call, etc.)
 Block to be skipped or block specified with the NOEX command (not executed)
 6115-E P-93
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-8. Single Block

When the [SINGLE BLOCK] key on the machine operation panel is turned on, the single block
function is turned on and the program stops after executing one block.
The single block function has two modes as indicated below.

Execute single block

In this mode, the program stops at the block that contains a command calling for axis movement,
miscellaneous function operation, coordinate system setting, etc.
The program does not stop at a block that contains a control statement (CALL, IF, GOTO, etc.),
macro call, return, or NOEX statement.

Read single block

In this mode, the program stops at all blocks.

[Supplement]

1) The “execute single block” mode is usually selected. To check the program including control
statements, select the “read single block” mode.
2) The “read single block” mode is selected by the setting at STOP IN THE PARTICULAR
CONTROL SINGLE BLOCK of NC optional parameter (OPERATING RELATION
PARAMETER).
3) In the “single block” mode, whether or not the single block function is turned on is determined
according to the status of the [SINGLE BLOCK] key after the execution of a block.
4) If the single block function is turned on during automatic operation, the program stops after the
execution of the block being executed when the function is turned on. If blocks of commands
having been read into the buffer area, these blocks are executed one by one each time the
[CYCLE START] button is pressed. When the buffer area is emptied, a new block is read and
executed when the [CYCLE START] button is pressed.
5) The “read single block” mode can be used to stop a schedule program at a control statement,
IF, GOTO, VSET etc.
6) During the execution of a program called using the CALL command in the MDI mode, the on/
off setting of the single block function is valid.
7) How the single block function is executed during the execution of a fixed cycle is described in
SECTION 7, FIXED CYCLES in PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
8) If area machining is executed with the single block function turned on, operation stops at each
movement.
 6115-E P-94
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-9. Optional Block Skip

When the [BLOCK SKIP] switch on the machine operation panel is turned on, the block skip function
is turned on and the blocks preceded by a slash code (/) are skipped.
For details, refer to SECTION 1, PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS, “1-6. Optional Block Skip” in
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

5-10. Program Branch (Optional)

Press the [NC operation] key on the additional operation panel and press the function key
(PROGRAM BRANCH 1) or (PROGRAM BRANCH 2).The program branch function is turned on
and the program branch commands specified in a program are executed.
For details, refer to SECTION 1, PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS, “1-7. Program Branch Function”
in PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

ME32125R1101000200001

5-11. Optional Stop

When the [OPTIONAL STOP] key on the machine operation panel is turned on, the optional stop
function is turned on and the execution of a program is suspended when a block containing M01 is
executed.
For restarting the suspended program, press the [CYCLE START] button. The program stop state is
canceled and the program is restarted.
If the [OPTIONAL STOP] key is off, M01 is disregarded and the program is continuously executed
even if M01 block is executed.
 6115-E P-95
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-12. Mirror Image Function

5-12-1.Mirror Image (Local Coordinate System)

Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel and then press the [MIR.
IMG] key on the right side of the screen. When the desired axis is selected using the function key,
the mirror image function is activated with the selected axis. In the mirror image function, the sign of
the coordinate data is reversed.
To turn on the mirror image function, press the [MIRROR IMAGE] function key (X, Y, Z) while
pressing the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] function key.

ME32125R1101000220001

 The mirror image function may also be turned on by specifying a G code (G62) in a program.
This is called the programmable mirror image function. The relationship between the mirror
image function controlled by the setting of keys and the programmable mirror image function is
indicated below.
Mirror Image Function Controlled Mirror Image Function
Mirror Image Status
by [MIRROR IMAGE] Key Controlled by G Code
OFF OFF Not reversed
OFF ON Reversed
ON OFF Reversed
ON ON Not reversed
This relationship is determined for the individual axes.
For details of the programmable mirror image function, refer to SECTION 4 PREPARATORY
FUNCTIONS, “4-2. Programmable Mirror Image” in PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
 6115-E P-96
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Example:

Absolute commands Incremental commands

N80 G90 X100 Y100 N80 G90 X100 Y100

[MIRROR IMAGE] key
is pressed at this point
N81 X50 Y80 N81 G91 X-50 Y-20

Y Y (50,120) (150,120)
(100,100) 4 3
(−50,80) 100 100
1 1 (100,100) 2
2
( 50,80)
50 50 (50,80) (150,80)

X X
50 100 50 100

4
3 (50,−80)
(−50,−80)

1 X, Y: Normal 3 X, Y: Normal
2 X: Mirror image ON 4 X: Normal
Y: Normal Y: Mirror image ON
ME32125R1101000220002

Fig.5-11 Relationship between MIRROR IMAGE Key Setting and Programmable Mirror Image
Function

When the mirror image function is turned on by pressing a [MIRROR IMAGE] key, the sign of
programmed commands is reversed.
 6115-E P-97
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

[Supplement]

1) If a [MIRROR IMAGE] key is turned on during automatic operation, the mirror image function
becomes valid from the block newly read. If several blocks have already been read into the
buffer area when the key is turned on, these blocks are executed as programmed.
2) While the program is executed with the single block function on, switching the mirror image
state on and off after the execution of a block causes the new mirror image function state to
apply to the next block and on.
Example:

While the program is executed with the single

block function on, if the mirror image function
N100 is turned on after the execution of N101 and
then the [CYCLE START] button is pressed,
N101
program restarts in the state the mirror image
N102 function is on from N102.
Mirror image function ON
ME32125R1101000220003

Fig.5-12 Mirror Image Function during Single Block Mode Operation

3) The mirror image function is valid for the setting of a work coordinate system (G92 IP__).
4) The mirror image function is valid for the command that specifies the center of scaling (G51
IP__).
5) The mirror image function is invalid for the coordinate shift command (G11 IP__).
6) G codes specifying the direction and I, J, and K commands are changed if necessary.
Circular interpolation (G02, G03)
Cutter radius compensation (G41, G42, etc.)
7) Positioning direction determined for uni-directional positioning operation (G60) is not affected
by the setting for the mirror image function.
Example:

Mirror image ON Mirror image OFF

ME32125R1101000220004

Fig.5-13 Direction of Positioning in Mirror Image ON / OFF State

8) On the screen, the “–” sign is displayed preceding address characters of the axes for which
the mirror image function is on.
 6115-E P-98
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-12-2.Mirror Image Function in Work Coordinate System

If a program is executed in a local coordinate system, the mirror image function operates in that
local coordinate system.
It is possible to have the mirror image function operate in the presently selected work coordinate
system by changing the parameter setting.

Parameter Setting

The following parameter is used to select a coordinate system in which the mirror image function
operates.

NC Optional Parameter (MIRROR IMAGE)

The mirror image function operates in a local coordinate
LOCAL
system.
The mirror image function operates in a work coordinate
WORK
system.

[Supplement]

1) Initial setting for this parameter is LOCAL.

2) If you have changed the setting for this parameter, turn off and back on the power.
Note that the new setting is not recognized even if the setting is simply changed.

Mirror Image Effects in Different Coordinate Systems

Assuming that the local coordinate system X’-Y’ is set in a work coordinate system X-Y, which is set
in the X-Y plane with machining area A defined as shown in Fig. 5-14, the mirror image function
influences machining area A as shown below.

Y
c
Y'
d
A
b
X'
a

0'

0 X

ME32125R1101000250001

Fig.5-14 Effects of Mirror Image Function in Different Coordinate Systems

 6115-E P-99
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Absolute Programming <G90>

<Mirror image in local coordinate system>

Y
Y' c
d
d' A
c' b
X'
AX a b"'
a' a"'
b' a" 0' AY
b" 0 c"' X
AXY d"'
d"
c"

ME32125R1101000260001

Fig.5-15 Mirror Image in Local Coordinate System in Absolute Programming

<Mirror image in work coordinate system>

c' Y c
d' Y' d
AX A
b' b
a' a X'

0'

0 X

a" a"'
b"'
b"
AY
AXY
d"'
d"
c"'
c"

ME32125R1101000260002

Fig.5-16 Mirror Image in Work Coordinate System in Absolute Programming

 6115-E P-100
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Incremental Programming <G91>

<Mirror image in local coordinate system>

Y Y'
c

d'' d A b
c' b"'
AX a' a ' X'
"
b' a" a AY c"'
b" "'
AXY d" d

0 c" X

ME32125R1101000270001

Fig.5-17 Mirror Image in Local Coordinate System in Incremental Programming

<Mirror image in work coordinate system>

Y Y'

c' c

AX dd' A b
b'
a'
a X'
a" a"'
b" 0 d" " AY b"'
AXY d
c" c"'
0 X

ME32125R1101000270002

Fig.5-18 Mirror Image in Work Coordinate System in Incremental Programming

 In incremental programming, if a local coordinate system is set without rotation, there are no
differences between the areas defined by the mirror image function in a local coordinate system
and a work coordinate system.
<Explanation for drawings>
AX : X-axis mirror image is ON for machining area A
AY : Y-axis mirror image is ON for machining area A
AXY : X- and Y-axis mirror image is ON machining area A
a → b → c → d Order of machining
ME32125R1101000270003
 6115-E P-101
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-13. Override
The override function changes feedrates and spindle speeds within a certain range during machine
operation.

5-13-1.Feedrate Override
The feedrate override function changes axis feedrates during machining operation.
The feedrate override function provides the following two types of override capability.

 Rapid traverse override

 Cutting feed override

Rapid Traverse Override

This function is valid for manual rapid traverse operation and rapid
traverse of an axis specified in a program (G00, G60, etc.).
Actual rapid traverse rate will be “rapid traverse rate” x “override
value”.
If you select “100%”, the axes traverse at the rapid traverse rate
determined by the machine specification.

ME32125R1101000300001

Cutting Feed Override

This function is valid for cutting feed of an axis specified in a

program (G01, G02, G03, etc.).
Actual cutting feedrate will be “F value” x “override value”.

ME32125R1101000310001
[Supplement]

1) The override setting is disregarded during tapping cycle (G74, G84) and synchronized tapping
operation (G274, G284).
2) After the execution of M136 (cutting feed override invalid), axis feed commands are executed
at the feed override setting of 100% until this mode is canceled by M137.
3) Axes do not move if the override is 0%.
 6115-E P-102
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-13-2.Spindle Override
The spindle override function changes the spindle speed.
The NC unit operates according to the spindle speed command
output from the PLC.
Actual spindle speed is displayed on the screen.
When the [OVERRIDE 1%] key is ON, the rate of increment and
decrement is set to 1%; when OFF, the rate is set to 10%. For the
detail, refer to “3-2-5. Spindle Override 1%” in SECTION 3 MANUAL
OPERATION in OPERATION.

ME32125R1101000320001
 6115-E P-103
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-14. Manual Intervention and Restart

The manual intervention function allows a program to be suspended at a desired point enabling
manual operation.
The procedure for manual intervention is indicated below.

Procedure :

1 During automatic or MDI mode operation, stop the operation by pressing the [SLIDE HOLD]
button or turning on the single block function.

2 Select [F2] (ACT POSI ENLARGE) from the function menu.

The ACTUAL POSITION pop-up window is displayed.

[Supplement]

Step 3 below is an operation to display the manually operated axis movement distance on
the screen. Manual intervention is possible without performing step 3).

ME32125R1101000330001

Fig.5-19 ACTUAL POSITION Pop-up Window

 6115-E P-104
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

3 Select [F6] (SHIFT ON/OFF) from the pop-up function menu of the ACTUAL POSITION pop-up
window. The window opens to display manually operated distance.
Each time you select [F6] (SHIFT ON/OFF), the window changes from MANUAL SHIFT
ACTUAL to MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL and to the end of the window.

Screen display
MANUAL SHIFT ACTUAL: Manually operated distance from the position where the present
manual intervention mode was turned on.
MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL: Total of manually operated distance

ME32125R1101000330002

Fig.5-20 MANUAL SHIFT Window

4 Select the manual intervention mode by pressing the [MID. AUTO MANUAL] key on the
machine operation panel.
In this mode, following manual operations are permitted.

 Manual cutting feed and rapid traverse

 Pulse handle feed

 Spindle operation

 Tool change, etc.

 6115-E P-105
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5 To restart automatic operation, restore the miscellaneous function status, return the axes to the
position where the manual intervention mode was turned on by either manual axis feed
operation or pulse handle operation, then press the [SEQUENCE RESTART] key. The axes
are positioned at the position where the manual intervention mode was turned on. At the same
time, position data in the MANUAL SHIFT ACTUAL window returns to “0”.

In automatic return to the manual intervention start point called by pressing the
[SEQUENCE RESTART] key, all axes move at the manual cutting feedrate. Therefore, the
axes must be manually moved to the position where sequence restart operation does not
cause interference before pressing the [SEQUENCE RESTART] key.
The manually operated distance remains added to the axis position data unless the
[SEQUENCE RESTART] key is pressed.

6 Turn off the [MID. AUTO MANUAL] key again to turn it off or press the [SEQUENCE
RESTART] key, and the manual intervention mode is canceled automatically.

1
Path when [SEQUENCE RESTART] key
1
is not pressed after manual operation
Manual operated distance
2 2
Path when [SEQUENCE RESTART] key
Manual intervention start point is pressed after manual operation
Programmed tool path

1 Manual operation
([SEQUENCE RESTART] key not pressed)
2 Manual operation
2 3
([SEQUENCE RESTART] key pressed)
3 Manual operation
([SEQUENCE RESTART] key not pressed)
Manually operated distance (total)
1
Programmed tool path
ME32125R1101000330003

Fig.5-21 Tool Path - Manual Intervention and Sequence Restart

[Supplement]

1) After performing manual operation using the manual intervention function, miscellaneous
functions and other statuses (spindle speed, tool change, etc.) are not restored
automatically. An operator must restore the status manually.
2) If tool length offset and cutter radius compensation data are changed after changing a
tool manually, the newly set data is not made valid even after the sequence restart
operation.
 6115-E P-106
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-15. Pulse Handle Shift Operation

In the operation of a machining center, it is sometimes required to operate the Z-axis manually while
positioning on the X-Y plane is made using a program. Also, there are cases that stock to be
removed differs on each workpiece if a cast workpiece is machined.
The pulse handle shift function is provided to allow axis movement using the pulse handle to be
inserted to programmed axis movements.
The procedure for carrying out pulse handle shift operation is described below.

Procedure :

1 Press the [P. HANDLE SHIFT] key while holding down the
[INTERLOCK RELEASE] key to turn the pulse handle override to ON.

ME32125R1101000340001

2 Select the axis to be operated using the pulse handle and also select the pulse multiplication
ratio.

3 Turn the pulse handle to move the selected axis by a required distance.
The distance moved in this operation is added to the distance displayed in MANUAL SHIFT
TOTAL window.
If you move an axis in this manner, this distance is not automatically restored and the moved
distance remains. To restore the axis to the previous state, return the axis by turning the pulse
handle while observing the display in the MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL window.

[Supplement]

1) The same window as displayed in manual intervention operation is used to indicate the
manually shift distance.
To display this window, follow the same procedure explained in the 5-14.
2) The display on the MANUAL SHIFT ACTUAL window is reset to “0” at the start of manual
intervention.
3) The display in the MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL window is reset to “0” when the power is
turned on or off.
4) Whether such position data should be reset to “0” when the NC is reset is determined by
the setting of THE MANUAL SHIFT (ACTUAL/TOTAL) for NC optional parameter (AUTO
SET AT NC RESET/POWER ON).
5) The distance moved by the pulse handle shift operation is taken into account for judging
travel end.
6) If the [P. HANDLE SHIFT] key is off, operation of the pulse handle during machine
operation has no effect.
7) Whether to add the manual shift amount to the actual position is determined by the
setting at ALL ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY IGNORE THE MANUAL SHIFT AMOUNT
for NC optional parameter (DISPLAY RELATION PARAMETER).
 6115-E P-107
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-16. Lock Functions

5-16-1.Machine Lock
When the [MACHINE LOCK] key on the machine operation panel is turned
on while pressing the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] key, the machine lock
function is turned on. In this state, actual position data is updated as a
program is executed without actually operating the machine.

ME32125R1101000350001
[Supplement]

When the [MACHINE LOCK] key is turned on or off, the NC is reset.

5-16-2.Axis Command Cancel

Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel and then press the [NC
OPE.] key on the right side of the screen. When the function key (AXIS COM. CANCEL) is pressed,
the axis command cancel function is turned on. In this state, commands of parameter specified axes
are disregarded, i.e., movement of such axes is disabled. The axes to be disabled are set at the NC
optional parameter (AXIS COMMAND CANCEL).

[Supplement]

1) The home position return command given by an external signal is executed for all axes
disregarding the setting for disabled axis.
2) Manual operation or manual interruption is enabled even if an axis command cancel is valid.
 6115-E P-108
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-16-3.Auxiliary (S.T.M) Function Lock

Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the machine operation panel and then press the [NC
OPE.] key on the right side of the screen. When the function key (S.T.M. LOCK) is pressed, the STM
lock function is turned on. In this state, only axis movement commands are executed without
auxiliary (S, T, M) functions.

[Supplement]

1) Override and dry run functions are valid as in normal operation.

2) Spindle operation is not controlled.
3) The home position return command given by an external signal is executed even in the STM
lock state.
4) Manual auxiliary operation in the manual intervention mode is permitted even in the STM lock
state.

ME32125R1101000370001
 6115-E P-109
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-17. Dry Run

When the [DRY RUN] key on the machine operation panel is turned on while pressing the
[INTERLOCK RELEASE] key, the dry run function is turned on. In this state, F commands in a
program, specified for cutting feed modes (G01, G02, G03, etc.) are disregarded and all axis feed
commands are executed at the feedrate set by the [JOG SPEED] dial on the machine operation
panel.

ME32125R1101000380001

 Whether or not the dry run function is valid in the rapid traverse (G00) mode operation is
determined according to the setting at DRY RUN EFFECTIVE EVEN FOR G00 of NC optional
parameter (OPERATING RELATION PARAMETER).

 It is possible to change the on or off state of the dry run function even during the execution of a
block of commands. The new dry run function state becomes valid immediately.

 When the [DRY RUN] key is turned on, STM functions are executed as programmed.

 The dry run function is valid in the machine lock state.

The value of the bit 0 set in the NC optional parameter bit No.78 can set the function that restricts
dry run during the fixed cycle to enabled or disabled.

[Supplement]

Pay attention on using the dry run function since this function is valid during a tapping cycle (G74,
G84) and in the skip function (G31) on state.
 6115-E P-110
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-18. Library Program Registration

A library program is registered when executing a subprogram or a G code macro in the MDI mode or
for executing a program that contains subprogram call command in method S large volume
operation.
The NC reads subprograms which are called from a main program at the same time the main
program is read according to the program selection operation. In addition to this, if the library
program registration function is used, execution of other subprograms is enabled.
To register a library program, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Press the (AUTO) mode selection key.

The indicating lamp at the upper of the (AUTO) key lights, the
ME32125R1101000390001
automatic operation mode is established, and the AUTO
OPERATION screen is displayed.

2 Select [F2] (LIBRARY PROGRAM) from the function menu.

If “LIBRARY PROGRAM” is not displayed in the function menu, press the extension key.
The LIBRARY PROGRAM pop-up window is displayed and the pop-up function menu of the
library program is displayed.

ME32125R1101000390002

Fig.5-22 LIBRARY PROGRAM Pop-up Window

 6115-E P-111
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-18-1.Registering a Library Program

The procedure below shows the procedure for registering a library program.

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (REGIS.) from the pop-up function menu.

The LIBRARY PROGRAM REGISTRATION window is displayed.

ME32125R1101000400001

Fig.5-23 LIBRARY PROGRAM REGISTRATION Pop-up Window

2 Select a file in the file list and input a program name in the PROGRAM NAME column.
To move the cursor from the file list to the PROGRAM NAME input area or other input area,
use the cursor keys.

3 Select [F7] (OK).

[Supplement]

1) If you select “ALL SSB FILES”, a subprogram is searched in all of the system
subprogram files (SSB file) and found subprograms are all registered as a library
program.
2) If the entry of a program name is skipped, a subprogram is searched in the selected files
and found subprograms are all registered as a library program.
3) Up to 65 subprograms may be registered. (Expansion up to 260 is optionally possible.)
4) A main program cannot be registered as a library program.
 6115-E P-112
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-18-2.Erasing a Library Program

Procedure :

1 Select a library program to be erased in the LIBRARY PROGRAM window.

2 Select [F2] (DELETE).

The message for confirmation is displayed. When YES is selected, the selected library
program is erased.

5-18-3.Initializing Library Program Storage Buffer Area

Procedure :

1 Select [F3] (INIT) from the LIBRARY PROGRAM window pop-up function menu.
The message for confirmation is displayed, then all of the library programs are deleted.
 6115-E P-113
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-18-4.Specifying the Library Program Storage Buffer Area Size

The procedure below shows the procedure for specifying the library program storage buffer area.

Procedure :

1 Select [F4] (BUFFER SIZE) from the LIBRARY PROGRAM window pop-up function menu.
The BUFFER SIZE pop-up window is displayed.

2 Input the buffer size.

3 Select [F7] (OK).

The area of the specified size (number of bytes) is secured for registering library programs.
If the size of the buffer area is specified, all states such as library program registration and
program selection are cleared.
To secure as large area as possible for NC program operation memory area for the operation
that does not use a library program, input “0” for the buffer size.

The library programs registered in the operation indicated above may be called and executed
as desired in such as MDI mode operation. Then can also be used in method S large volume
operation or equivalent operation like DNC operation.

[Supplement]

1) All subprograms stored in the file having extension “LIB”, are automatically registered in
the library program storage buffer area when the power is turned on for the NC.
Therefore, by storing frequently used G code macro and other sequences in the LIB file,
they can be used any time as normal G codes.
2) Library programs are distinguished by a program name. Therefore, library programs
assigned the same program name cannot be registered.
If a subprogram in user programs has the same name as a library program, calling such
a program causes the library program to be called and the subprogram in user programs
cannot be called.
3) If a file with extension “LIB” is modified, make sure to turn off the power once and turn it
on again.
 6115-E P-114
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-19. Editing Selected Program

5-19-1.QUICK EDIT Function

Outline
The Quick Edit function allows you to edit a part program with the cursor located in the pointer line of
the program running in the automatic operation mode or located in the alarm detected line.
Perform quick editing according to the procedure below.

Operation Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select AUTO from the mode selection keys to establish the automatic mode.

2 Select the function key [F6] (QUICK EDIT) from the function menu.
The quick edit window appears on the screen and the cursor moves to the program execution
pointer.
The program can be edited on this edit window.

ME32125R1101000440001

Fig.5-24 QUICK EDIT Window

3 To finish editing, press [F7] (PROGRAM SELECT) or [F8] (QUIT).

When you select [F7] (PROGRAM SELECT), the NC saves the currently edited program and
selects the saved program (by reading the program from the memory into the NC operation
buffer). Then, the NC terminates the editing mode.
The program can be edited with the same manner as in usual program editing.
 6115-E P-115
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

[Supplement]

1) The function key [F6] (QUICK EDIT) is valid only in the automatic operation mode. The
function key indication is shaded off in MDI or manual operation mode.
2) Quick editing is possible only with the currently selected program.
3) In the quick editing mode, the file to be edited varies with the program displayed on the
screen.
 When a main program is displayed on the screen
The cursor moves to the execution pointer in the main program (MIN), in the user program
(SUB), or in the system sub program (SSB).
During execution of a maker sub program (MSB) or a library program (LIB), the cursor
moves to a block of the source program.
An error occurs if no main program is selected while a schedule program selected.

 When a schedule program is displayed on the screen

The cursor moves to the schedule program execution pointer.
An error occurs when no schedule program is selected.
4) When [F6] (QUICK EDIT) is selected in the process of single block reading, number search, or
sequence number search, the cursor moves to the reading pointer position.
5) When [F6] (QUICK EDIT) is selected in the state of alarm A or B, the cursor moves to the
alarm detected line.
6) The function key [F7] (PROGRAM SELECT) cannot be selected during automatic operation
(program is running).
 6115-E P-116
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-19-2.Editing the Main Program

In the automatic operation mode, editing operation for currently selected main program can be
carried out. Preparatory procedure for editing operation of the selected program is as follows:

Procedure :

1 Press the (AUTO) mode selection key to establish the automatic operation mode.

2 Select [F1] (MAIN PRG_OPER) from the function menu. The MAIN PROGRAM pop-up
window is displayed.

3 Select [F7] (MAIN PRG_EDIT) from the pop-up function menu. The MAIN PROGRAM EDIT
window is displayed on the screen. The main program can be edited in this window.

ME32125R1101000450001

Fig.5-25 Editing Screen of Selected Program

4 To complete the editing operation, select [F7] (PROGRAM SELECT) or [F8] (QUIT). When [F7]
(PROGRAM SELECT) is selected, the edited program is selected (by reading from the
memory into the NC run memory) to complete editing.

The editing operation is the same as general program editing operation. For details, refer to the
“DATA OPERATION, SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS, 5-3. Program Editing Operations”.

[Supplement]

1) The program editing in the automatic operation mode can be carried out only in the normal
editing mode.
2) The program editing in the automatic operation mode can be carried out only for the program
currently read.
3) During automatic operation (while executing the program), [F7] (PROGRAM SELECT) cannot
be selected.
 6115-E P-117
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-20. Operation End Lamp (Optional)

The operation end lamp lights at the end of operation if a checkmark is put at OPERATION END
LAMP IS MADE EFFECTIVE of machine user parameter (INDICATING LAMP).
The operation end lamp lights when the following conditions are satisfied.

Mode Conditions
At the completion of a program
1. Schedule program
Single block OFF
After the execution of END
Automatic operation
2. Main program
After the execution of M00, M01, M02, or M30

The lamp goes off when the operation is restarted.

At the occurrence of an alarm, the operation end lamp goes off when the NC is reset.

5-21. Operation End Buzzer (Optional)

The operation end buzzer sounds at the end of operation if a checkmark is put at OPERATION END
BUZZER IS MADE EFFECTIVE of machine user parameter (BUZZER).
The operation end lamp lights when the same conditions as applied to the operation end lamp are
satisfied.
Duration of buzzer sounding is set at OPERATION END BUZZER TIMER of machine user
parameter (BUZZER).
The buzzer stops sounding when the operation is restarted.

5-22. Alarm Lamp (Optional)

The error lamp lights at the occurrence of an alarm if a checkmark is put at ALARM LAMP IS MADE
EFFECTIVE of machine user parameter (INDICATING LAMP).
The lamp goes off when the NC is reset.

5-23. Automatic Power OFF

The power is shut off when the Automatic power OFF switch lamp is lit and the next conditions are
met.

Mode Conditions
At the completion of a program
1. Schedule program
Single block OFF
After the execution of END
Automatic operation
2. Main program
After the execution of M02 or M30

If a program contains a block for changing or setting a parameter, it is recommended to make

backup function at the execution of M02/M30 valid (by selecting DOES at BACKUP WHEN M02 OR
M30 IS EXECUTED of NC optional parameter (BACKUP)).
 6115-E P-118
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-24. Work Counter (Optional)

The counter operates to increase the counter data at the execution of
machining end signal (M02, M30).
Counting range is 0 to 999999 (6 digits).
The counter has the reset function. 0 0 0 0 0 0

RESET
ME32125R1101000500001
 6115-E P-119
SECTION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5-25. Hour Meter (Optional)

5-25-1.Control Power On Time Hour Meter

The hour meter accumulates the NC power ON time. Control Power ON

Counting range is 0 to 99999.9 hours

01234 5 H

HOUR METER

5-25-2.NC Running Time Hour Meter

ME32125R1101000510001

NC Runnig
The hour meter accumulates the RUN indicating lamp ON time.
Counting range is 0 to 9999.9 hours
The counter has the reset function. RESET

1 2 3 4 5 H

HOUR METER

5-25-3.Cutting Time Hour Meter ME32125R1101000520001

Cutting Time
The hour meter accumulates the time an axis has been moved in the
G01, G02 or G03 mode in automatic or MDI operation.
Counting range is 0 to 9999.9 hours RESET
The counter has the reset function.
1 2 3 4 5 H

HOUR METER
ME32125R1101000530001

5-25-4.Spindle Rotating Time Hour Meter

Spindle Rotating
The hour meters accumulates the time the spindle has rotated (CW or
CCW) in any operation mode.
Counting range is 0 to 9999.9 hours RESET
The counter has the reset function.
1 2 3 4 5 H

HOUR METER
[Supplement] ME32125R1101000540001

If hour meter option is selected, [Control power On Time Hour Meter] and [NC Running Time
Hour Meter] are usually mounted.
 6115-E P-120
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

This section describes major screen displays of NC operation panel in the operation mode (manual, MDI, and
automatic).
The following screens are displayed by selection from the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window in each
operation mode. For the operating method of screen transitions, refer to the “FUNDAMENTALS, SECTION 1.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTION, 1-2-2. Screen Operations”.

6-1. AUTO OPERATION Screen Display

One-screen operation is enabled on the AUTO OPERATION screen, allowing a lot of information to
be displayed in one screen by dividing the screen into several windows.
The display window currently selected (active window) is boxed with a blue border; which can be
switched by pressing [F8] (CHANGE WINDOW). The active windows also can be switched by
touching the display window directly.
The function keys to be shown will change according to the display window each time the active
window is changed.
The AUTO OPERATION screen has two sheets: the [ACTUAL POSI] sheet and the [WK SETUP]
sheet; which can be switched by pressing the sheet. The sheets also can be switched by touching
the tab on the upper right of the screen directly.
 6115-E P-121
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-1-1. ACTUAL POSI sheet

The ACTUAL POSI sheet displays the following four kinds of information in one screen at the same
time: (1) ACTUAL POSITION display, (2) ANIMATED SIMULATION display, (3) NC PROGRAM
display and (4) MACHINE STATUS display.
When the IGF data are opened with the advanced one-touch IGF M function, the operation in
preparation state or operation in preparation cancel state window is displayed according to the IGF
data setting. The operation in preparation state displays the following four kinds of information in one
screen at the same time: (1) ACTUAL POSITION display, (2) ANIMATED SIMULATION display, (5)
PROCESS SHEET display (operation in preparation state) and (3) NC PROGRAM display. The
operation in preparation cancel state displays the following three kinds of information in one screen
at the same time: (1) ACTUAL POSITION display, (2) ANIMATED SIMULATION display and (6)
PROCESS SHEET display (operation in preparation cancel state).
The display windows to be displayed on the screen are described below.

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

ME32125R1101100180001
 6115-E P-122
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(5)

ME32125R1101100180002

(6)

ME32125R1101100180003
 6115-E P-123
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

ACTUAL POSITION display window (1)

[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]

[8] [9] [10]

[6] [7]

[11] [16]
[12] [14] [17]
[13] [15] [18]
[19]
ME32125R1101100190001

[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]

[8] [9] [10]

[6] [7]

[22] [23]
[11] [16]
[12] [20] [24] [26]
[13] [17] [18] [25]
[21] [19]
ME32125R1101100190003

The display information in the ACTUAL POSITION display window can be switched by pressing the
page key and [F5] (WORK/PROGRAM).
The detail of window display is as follows.

No. Display Description Remarks

[1] ACTUAL POSITION Current title Change the display by [F5]
(PROGRAM)/ACTUAL (WORK/PROGRAM).
POSITION (WORK)
[2] WORK/LOCAL/SLOPE/ Current coordinate system
SLOPE LOCAL/TABLE
BASE
[3] POSITION Current position
[4] DISTANCE Remaining distance
[5] TARGET/RELATIVE/LOAD Target position / relative Change the display by the
position / load page key.
[6] Lamp mark (●) Colorless: within the travel limit
range
Red: out of the travel limit range
[7] X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W Axis name
[8] Current position Current position of each axis in Change the displayed by [F5]
the current execution block (WORK/PROGRAM).
 6115-E P-124
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

No. Display Description Remarks

[9] Remaining distance Distance from the current Change the displayed by [F5]
position of each axis to the (WORK/PROGRAM).
target position specified in the
program
[10] Target position Target position: The target Change the display by the
Relative position coordinate value specified in page key.
Load the program of each axis Change the coordinate
Relative position: The position system to be displayed by
set in “relative position setting” [F5] (WORK/PROGRAM).
and the travel amount from the
set position are displayed.
Load: Load data of each axis
[11] Co / Cos Current coordinate system no. /
current coordinate system no.
(system)
[12] H / Hs Tool length offset no. / tool
length offset no. (system)
[13] D / Ds Tool radius compensation no. /
tool radius compensation no.
(system)
[14] Tool length offset amount Tool length offset amount in the Change the display by the
current tool length offset no. page key.
[15] Tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation Change the display by the
amount amount in the current tool page key.
radius compensation no.
[16] S Specified rotation speed
including override
[17] Fm / Fr / Dt Feed per minute / feed per
revolution / dwell time
[18] Tc Current tool number
[19] Tn Next tool number
[20] Sc Actual rotation speed Change the display by the
page key.
[21] Fc Actual feedrate Change the display by the
page key.
[22] CW/CCW/STOP/ORIENT Spindle rotation state Change the display by the
page key.
[23] Spindle load Spindle load Change the display by the
page key.
[24] Load monitoring lamp Spindle load monitoring state Change the display by the
page key.
[25] Load monitoring no. Spindle load monitoring no. Change the display by the
page key.
[26] Load monitoring setting Spindle load monitoring setting Change the display by the
value value page key.
The function keys to be displayed with the CURRENT POSITION display window as follows.
 6115-E P-125
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

ME32125R1101100190002

To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.
The detail of function keys is described below.

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the program.
F2 ENLARGE CNT.POS Displays the “enlarge current position” window.
OPERATE TOOL Displays the ATC window where manual ATC operation is enabled.
F3 SEARCH RESTORE Displays the “search restoration” window to enable search
restoration.
LIBRARY PROGRAM Displays the “LIBRARY PROGRAM” window, where the library
program is displayed and registered.
F4 SEARCH NUMBER Displays the “search number” window to enable number search.
PROGRAM Displays the program message.
MESSAGE
F5 STOP SEQUENCE Displays the “sequence stop” window to enable sequence stop.
WORK/PROGRAM Changes the display of “current position” and “remaining distance”
to the work coordinate system or the program coordinate system.
F6 SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative position
zero.
NC OPER. MONITOR Displays the “NC operation monitor”.
F7 QUICK EDIT Shows the “quick edit” pop-up window.
CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.
 6115-E P-126
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

ANIMATED SIMULATION window (2)

In the ANIMATED SIMULATION display area, the ANIMATED SIMULATION window and the
Collision Avoidance System window (optional) are displayed. These windows alternate by pressing
[F2] (ACS DISP/ANIME DISP).
The detail of each window is as follows.

(1) ANIMATED SIMULATION windows

[1] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

[2]
[9]

[10]
ME32125R1101100200001

[1] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[9]

[10]
ME32125R1101100200002

(*2)

When the real 3D simulation function is provided, the display between 2D and 3D can be
switched by pressing [F1] (SWITCH 2D /3D).
The detail of window display is as follows.
No. Display Description
[1] ANIMATED SIMULATION (2D The title of the window
GRAPHIC / REAL 3D ) (*1) 2D GRAPHIC: The development view is
displayed.
REAL 3D: The 3-dimensional graphic is
displayed. (*1)
[2] Graphic display area Displays the processing result of the 2D / 3D
graphic. (*1)
[3] G.Co The graphic zero no.
[4] HIGH OFF: high-speed drawing OFF
ON: high-speed drawing ON
 6115-E P-127
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

No. Display Description

[5] TRACE OFF: machining trace display OFF
ON: machining trace display ON
[6] MATERIAL OFF: blank drawing OFF
ON: blank drawing ON
[7] SECTION OFF: blank section display OFF
ON: blank section display ON
[8] TRANSPARENT OFF: blank transparent display OFF
ON: blank transparent display ON
[9] SPEED OVER (normally not displayed ) Displayed when the feedrate exceeds the
ANIMATED SIMULATION display limit.
[10] CUTTING TIME Displays the time after NC start.
(*1) Optional: Real 3D simulation function

The function keys to be displayed with the ANIMATED SIMULATION window in the ANIMATED
SIMULATION display area are as follows.
To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.

 With 2D display

ME32125R1101100200003

 With 3D display

ME32125R1101100200004
 6115-E P-128
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

 Detail of function keys

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 TRACE/MATERIAL Switches ON/OFF between machining trace and blank
drawing.
Trace: OFF → Trace: OFF → Trace: ON → Trace: ON
→ Repeat
Material: OFF → Material: ON → Material: OFF →
Material: ON → Repeat
2D/3D CHANGE (*1) Switches the display between development view and
3D.
SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the
program.
F2 AUTO SCALE Scales the drawing area automatically.
ENLARGE CNT.POS Displays the “enlarged current position” window.
F3 CHANGE AREA Changes the drawing area.
SEARCH RESTORE Displays the “search restoration” window to enable
search restoration.
DRAW BLANK Draws a blank using the blank model.
F4 CHANGE ANGLE Changes the viewing angle.
SEARCH NUMBER Displays the “search number” window to enable number
search.
ERASE BLANK Erases a blank.
F5 SECTION CHANGE Changes the blank section position.
STOP SEQUENCE Displays the “sequence stop” window to enable
sequence stop.
SECTION/TRNSPRNT Switches ON/OFF between blank section display and
transparent display.
Section: OFF → Section: OFF → Section: ON →
Section: ON → Repeat
Trnsprnt: OFF → Trnsprnt: ON → Trnsprnt: OFF →
Trnsprnt: ON → Repeat
F6 HIGHDRAW ON/OFF Switches ON/OFF with high-speed drawing.
GRAPHIC DATA Set the graphic data.
SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative
position zero.
F7 QUICK EDIT Shows the “quick edit” pop-up window.
CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the
window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.
(*1) Optional: Real 3D simulation function
 6115-E P-129
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(2) Collision Avoidance System window (*2)

ME32125R1101100200005

The function keys to be displayed with the Collision Avoidance System window in the
ANIMATED SIMULATION window are as follows.
To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.

ME32125R1101100200006

The detail of function keys is described below.

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 DEF. JIG/MATERIAL Creates the fixture and blank model data.
SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the program.
F2 ANIME DISP Changes the window to the ANIMATED SIMULATION window.
ENLARGE CNT.POS Displays the “enlarged current position” window.
F3 MAGNI. REDUCE After the function key is pressed, the display can be zoomed in
and out by using the page key, and the display area can be
moved by using the cursor key.
SEARCH RESTORE Displays the “search restoration” window to enable search
restoration.
F4 ANGLE CHANGE After the function key is pressed, visual angle can be changed
by using the cursor key.
SEARCH NUMBER Displays the “search number” window to enable number search.
F5 MATERIAL It is possible to select that the blank on the display is to be
displayed in solid or transparent.
STOP SEQUENCE Displays the “sequence stop” window to enable sequence stop.
F6 INIT. VIEW Initializes the changed viewing point.
SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative position
zero.
F7 CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.
(*2) Option: Collision Avoidance System function
 6115-E P-130
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

NC PROGRAM display window (3)

The NC program display window displays the MAIN/SUB PROGRAM window, the SCHEDULE
PROGRAM window and the MAIN PROGRAM window.
The MAIN/SUB PROGRAM window is shown below.

[3]
[1] [2] [4]

[5]

ME32125R1101100210001

The display of MAIN/SUB PROGRAM window can be switched between the display based on the
execution pointer position and the display based on the read pointer position by pressing [F1]
(EXECUTE/READ).
The SCHEDULE PROGRAM window is shown below.

[3]
[1] [2] [4]

[5]

ME32125R1101100210002
 6115-E P-131
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The display in the SCHEDULE PROGRAM window can be switched by pressing [F2] (MAIN/SUB
SCHE).
The MAIN PROGRAM (EXEC) window is as shown below.

[3]
[1] [2] [4]

[5]

ME32125R1101100210004

By displaying the SUB PROGRAM window in the MACHINE STATE display window, the NC
PROGRAM display window changes to the MAIN PROGRAM (EXEC) window.
The detail of window display is as follows.

No. Display Description

[1] MAIN/SUB PROGRAM (EXEC) The title of the window
MAIN/SUB PROGRAM (READ) (EXEC): The program is displayed based on the
SCHEDULE PROGRAM position of execution pointer.
MAIN PROGRAM (EXEC) (READ): The program is displayed based on the
MAIN PROGRAM (READ) position of read pointer.
SCHEDULE: The SCHEDULE PROGRAM is
displayed.
[2] Program name The program name being selected or executed
[3] Sequence no., sequence name The sequence no. and sequence name being
executed
[4] Block counter Block counter
[5] Program display area The detail of the program being selected or executed

The function keys to be displayed with the MAIN/SUB PROGRAM window in the NC program
display window are as follows.
To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.

ME32125R1101100210003
 6115-E P-132
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 EXECUTE/READ The program display area is switched between the execution
pointer position base and the read pointer position base.
SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the program.
F2 MAIN/SUB SCHE The target of program display is changed to either MAIN/SUB
PROGRAM or SCHEDULE PROGRAM.
ENLARGE CNT.POS Displays the “enlarged current position” window.
F3 LIBRARY PROGRAM Displays the registered library program and registers the library
program.
SEARCH RESTORE Displays the “search restoration” window to enable search
restoration.
F4 PROGRAM MESSAGE Displays the program message output by the message function.
SEARCH NUMBER Displays the “search number” window to enable number search.
F5 STOP SEQUENCE Displays the “sequence stop” window to enable sequence stop.
F6 SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative position
zero.
F7 QUICK EDIT Shows the “quick edit” pop-up window.
CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.

 Enlarging program display

When the cursor is located at NC program display window, the program can be displayed in the
enlarged window by pressing [F6] (program display enlarge).

[1] [4]

[3]

[2]

ME32125R1101100210005
 6115-E P-133
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

No. Display Description

[1] MAIN PROGRAM (EXEC) Title of the window
MAIN PROGRAM (READ) MAIN PROGRAM: Only the main program is
MAIN/SUB PROGRAM (EXEC) displayed.
MAIN/SUB PROGRAM (READ) MAIN/SUB PROGRAM display: Either the main
program or the sub program is displayed.
(EXEC): The program is displayed based on the
position of execution pointer.
(READ): The program is displayed based on the
position of read pointer.
* The display is switched by pressing [F1]
(EXECUTE/READ) or [F2] (MAIN/SUB SCHE).
Program display area (large) The program is displayed according to the title of the
window.
[2] SUB PROGRAM (EXEC) Title of the window
SUB PROGRAM (READ) SUB PROGRAM: The sub program is displayed.
SCHDULE SCHDULE: The schedule program is displayed.
(EXEC): The program is displayed based on the
position of execution pointer.
(READ): The program is displayed based on the
position of read pointer.
* The display is switched by pressing [F1]
(EXECUTE/READ) or [F2] (MAIN/SUB SCHE).
Program display area (small) The program is displayed according to the title of the
window.
[3] SUPER Lights up with Hi-CUT or SUPER NURBS mode ON.
SPATLT Lights up with a spare tool in use.
PSLCT Lights up when a program is selected.
FIXED CYCLE Lights up during a fixed cycle.
RETURN Lights up during return search.
DWELL Lights up during dwelling.
[4] O**** Name of the currently running program.
N**** Name of the currently running sequence.
(Axis name) Actual position Axis name and the actual position.
Co Work coordinate system no.
S Spindle speed command.
H Tool length offset no. currently selected.
D Tool radius compensation no. currently selected.
T Actual tool no. (left) and next tool no. (right)
Fm Command feedrate
CUTTING Time since NC start
The enlarged program display window closes by pressing [F6] (program display reduce).
 6115-E P-134
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

MACHINE STATE display window (4)

In the MACHINE STATE display window, the BLOCK DATA window, DIAGNOSTIC window, LOCAL
VARIABLE window, and program display window (SUB PROGRAM window, MAIN/SUB PROGRAM
window) are displayed. The windows can be switched by pressing the page key with the MACHINE
STATE display window active.

BLOCK DATA window DIAGNOSTIC window

Program display window LOCAL VARIABLE window

ME32125R1101100220001

The detail of each window is as follows.

(1) BLOCK DATA window

[1]

[2] [3]

[4]
ME32125R1101100220002
 6115-E P-135
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

No. Display Description

[1] MACHINE STATE The title of the window
[2] G code G code currently valid
[3] M code M code currently valid
[4] MLOCK Machine lock ON
DRYRN Dry-run ON
SNGLB Single block ON
Probe contact mark OFF/ON OFF: probe not contacted
ON: probe contacted
Touch sensor contact mark OFF/ON OFF: touch sensor not contacted
ON: touch sensor contacted
DWELL During dwell motion
MANUAL INT. Manual interruption ON
F-LIMIT 1 Super motion
F-LIMIT 2
F-LIMIT 3
F-LIMIT 4
F-LIMIT 5
HiCut STANDARD
HiCut HIGH SPEED
HiCut F-LIMIT 1
HiCut F-LIMIT 2
HiCut F-LIMIT 3
HiCut F-LIMIT 4
HiCut F-LIMIT 5
Super HI-QUALITY
Super STANDARD
Super HIGH SPEED
Super F-LIMIT 1
Super F-LIMIT 2
Super F-LIMIT 3
Super F-LIMIT 4
Super F-LIMIT 5
CHG. TARGET PNT.
The function keys to be displayed are the same as the CURRENT POSITION display window.
 6115-E P-136
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(2) DIAGNOSTIC window

[1] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[2]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

[13]
[14] [15]

[16]

ME32125R1101100220004

No. Display Description

[1] MACHINE STATUS The title of the window
[2] TGT(WORK) Target position of the work coordinate system
reference
[3] RDIF Difference between target position and encoder
coordinate
[4] IN-P IN-P range
[5] AXCAN Axis command cancel
[6] FDREL.P/N Axis travel possible or not possible
[7] X/Y/Z/A/B/C Axis name
[8] Position Target position of the work coordinate system
reference of each axis
[9] Position Difference between target position and encoder
coordinate of each axis
[10] IN/OUT IN (gray): within IN-P range
OUT (yellow): out of IN-P range
[11] EN/DIS EN(gray ): axis command cancel invalid
DIS(yellow ): axis command cancel valid
[12] EN/DIS EN (gray): The machine allows axis travel.
DIS (yellow): The machine does not allow axis
travel.
[13] RPD.OVR Rapid override value yellow: 0 %
* When the rapid override is 0.5%, it displays as
1%, however, axes move at 0.5%.
[14] FED.OVR Cutting feed override value yellow: 0%
[15] SPINDLE Spindle rotation state
CW/CCW/STOP CW: forward rotation
CCW: reverse rotation
STOP(yellow): stop
 6115-E P-137
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

No. Display Description

[16] S.BLOCK Gray: single block OFF
Yellow: single block ON
OP.STOP Gray: optional stop SW OFF
Yellow: optional stop SW ON
PRG.STOP PRG.STOP (gray): not stopped by M00/M01
/M00.STOP M00.STOP (yellow): stopped by M00
/M01.STOP M01.STOP (yellow): stopped by M01
HLD.STOP Gray: not during slide hold
Yellow: during slide hold
M.LOCK Gray: machine lock OFF
Yellow: machine lock ON
S.T.M Gray: not waiting for S.T.M answer
Yellow: waiting for S.T.M answer
LIMIT Gray: no axis limit
Yellow: axis limit
PN.UNLK Displays the panel operation SW
/PN.EDLK PN.UNLK (gray): operation enabled
/PN.LOCK PN.EDLK (yellow): some operations disabled
PN.LOCK (yellow): all operations disabled
The function keys to be displayed are the same as the CURRENT POSITION display window.
 6115-E P-138
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(3) LOCAL VARIABLE window

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5]

ME32125R1101100220005

No. Display Description

[1] LOCAL VARIABLE The title of the window
[2] No (1 to 255) Numbers (The number of the variable defined newly
will be smaller.)
[3] VAR NAME Local variable name
[4] DATA Local variable setting value
[5] PROGRAM The program name with which the local variable is
defined
The function keys to be displayed are the same as the CURRENT POSITION display window.
 6115-E P-139
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(4) Program display window

The program display window is displayed on the lower half of the RUN screen, which allows you
to check the main program and the sub program, or the schedule program and the main/sub
program at the same time.

‫ޤޣ‬ ‫ޤޣ‬ ‫ޤޣ‬ ‫ޤޣ‬

‫ޤޣ‬

‫ޤޣ‬ ‫ޤޣ‬ ‫ޤޣ‬ ‫ޤޣ‬

‫ޤޣ‬

ME32125R1101100220003

No. Display Description

[1] SUB PROGRAM (EXEC) Title of the window
SUB PROGRAM (READ) (EXEC): The program is displayed based on the
MAIN/ SUB PROGRAM position of execution pointer.
(EXEC) (READ): The program is displayed based on the
MAIN/ SUB PROGRAM position of read pointer.
(READ) * The display is switched by pressing [F1] (EXECUTE/
READ) or [F2] (MAIN/SUB SCHE).
[2] Program name The name of the program being selected or executed.
[3] Sequence no., sequence The sequence no. and sequence name being
name executed.
[4] Block counter Block counter
 6115-E P-140
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

No. Display Description

[5] Program display area SUB PROGRAM:
Sub program content that is called from the currently
running main program.
MAIN/ SUB PROGRAM:
Program content currently selected or run.
The function keys to be displayed are the same as those in the NC PROGRAM display window.
 6115-E P-141
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

PROCESS SHEET display window

The PROCESS SHEET display window, which is displayed when the advanced one-touch IGF M
function is provided, displays the PROCESS SHEET. The PROCESS SHEET has the following two
states.

 Operation in preparation state

The process to be executed is determined with the process sheet, and the machining program
is selected.

 Operation in preparation cancel state

The process to be executed is not determined, and the machining program is not selected.

Activate the PROCESS SHEET display window and the two states can be switched by pressing [F1]
(PREPARE CANCEL or PREPARE START) as shown below.

ME32125R1101100230001

For the detail, refer to [OSP-P300M ADVANCED ONE-TOUCH IGF M REFERENCE MANUAL].
The detail of each process sheet is as follows.

(1) PROCESS SHEET display (operation in preparation state) (5)

When the IGF data with which operation preparation is enabled are opened, the process sheet
is displayed with the operation in preparation state. With this state, items on the window cannot
be edited.

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5] [6] [9] [10]

[7] [8]

[11] [12] [13] [14]

[15]
ME32125R1101100230002
 6115-E P-142
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The detail of window display is as follows.

No. Display Description Remarks
[1] PROCESS SHEET The title of the window
[2] SINGLE PROCESS/ Displays the operation Can be switched by [F2]
CONTINUOUS method. (EXECUTE MODE) and in the
operation in preparation
cancel state.
[3] 1, 2, 3, … Serial number of process
[4] MACHINING UNIT Process kind
[5] DIA. Tool diameter used with the
process
[6] T Tool no. used with the
process
[7] H Tool length offset with the Displays "A", "B", or "C".
process Can be edited in the operation
in preparation cancel state.
[8] D Tool radius compensation Displays "A", "B", or "C".
us with the process Can be edited in the operation
in preparation cancel state.
[9] ROT. Spindle rotation speed Can be edited in the operation
during machining in preparation cancel state.
[10] FEED/min / FEED/rev Cutting feedrate during Can be edited in the operation
machining in preparation cancel state.
[11] Machining part name The name of machining part
with the process specified
by the cursor position
[12] Zero no. The zero no. of the process PP is displayed with 5-axis
specified by the cursor machines.
position
[13] SPIN.OR The override value with the Displays the set value by [F4]
spindle rotation speed of (OVERRIDE LEARNING).
the process specified by the
cursor position
[14] FEED OR The override value with the Displays the set value by [F4]
cutting feedrate of the (OVERRIDE LEARNING).
process specified by the
cursor position
[15] Message display column Displays the message. Displays the appropriate
message.
The function keys to be displayed with the PROCESS SHEET display window in the operation
in preparation state are as follows.

ME32125R1101100230003

To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.
The detail of function keys is described below.
 6115-E P-143
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Function
Description
Position Name
F1 PREPARE CANCEL Cancels the machining program which is automatically
selected.
SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the
program.
F2 EXECUTE MODE Selects the operation method. This key can be selected
with the preparation cancel state.
Among processes with which operation selected by [F3]
(EXECUTE PROCESS) is executed, select either
SINGLE PROCESS or CONTINUOUS; the former is the
mode with which only the process specified by the
cursor is operated and the latter is the mode with which
the processes from the one selected by the cursor
position are operated.
ENLARGE CNT.POS Displays the “enlarged current position” window.
F3 EXECUTE PROCESS Selects the process to be executed. Can be selected in
the operation in preparation cancel state.
SEARCH RESTORE Displays the “search restoration” window to enable
search restoration.
LIBRARY PROGRAM Displays the “library program” window, where the library
program is displayed and registered.
F4 OVERRIDE LEARNING The override value of the spindle rotation speed and
cutting feedrate that can be switched on the operation
panel is retained to the process specified by the cursor
position.
SEARCH NUMBER Displays the “search number” window to enable number
search.
PROGRAM MESSAGE Displays the program message.
F5 STOP SEQUENCE Displays the “sequence stop” window to enable
sequence stop.
F6 SAVE The IGF data are overwritten and saved. The override
value of the spindle rotation speed and cutting feedrate
is reflected to the IGF data.
SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative
position zero.
F7 PROCESS EDIT Allows the IGF edit to be executed on the program
operation window.
CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the
window.
QUICK EDIT Shows the “quick edit” pop-up window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.
 6115-E P-144
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(2) PROCESS SHEET display (operation in preparation cancel state) (6)

When the IGF data that need to be changed for operation preparation are opened, the process
sheet is displayed in the operation in preparation cancel state. With this state, setting values
can be changed at each item.
The description different from [(1) PROCESS SHEET display (operation in preparation state)
(5)] are described below.

[1] [2]
[3] [4]

[6]

[5]
ME32125R1101100230004

No. Display Description Remarks

[1] H Tool length offset used with Can be edited.
machining Select "HA", "HB" or "HC".
[2] D Tool radius compensation Can be edited.
used with machining Select "HA", "HB" or "HC".
[3] ROT. Spindle rotation speed Can be edited.
during machining Re-calculate the feed per minute
and feed per revolution value to
display them.
[4] FEED/min /FEED/rev Cutting feedrate during Can be edited.
machining
[5] Message display Displays the message and Displays the message and guide
column guide text. text suitable for the operation
and the cursor position.
[6] Drawing window Displays the blank and the
shape to be processed.
The function keys to be displayed with the PROCESS SHEET display window with the
operation in preparation cancel state are as follows.
For the detail of the function keys, refer to [(1) PROCESS SHEET display (operation in
preparation state) (5)].

ME32125R1101100230005
 6115-E P-145
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-1-2. WK SETUP sheet

The WK SETUP sheet displays the following four kinds of information in one screen at the same
time: (1) ACTUAL POSITION display, (2) ANIMATED SIMULATION display, (7) WORK ZERO
display and (4) MACHINE STATUS display. When the IGF measurement function (optional) or the
manual measurement function (optional) is provided, the following three kinds of information are
displayed at the same time: (1) ACTUAL POSITION display, (2) ANIMATED SIMULATION display
and (8) WORK ZERO and MANUAL MEAS. display.
The display windows to be displayed on the screen are described below.

(7)

ME32125R1101100240001
 6115-E P-146
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

(8)

ME32125R1101100240002

Fro (1) ACTUAL POSITION display, (2) ANIMATED SIMULATION display, and (4) MACHINE
STATUS display, refer to the description regarding the [ACTUAL POSI] sheet since the contents are
the same. (Refer to (1): ACTUAL POSITION display window, (2):ANIMATED SIMULATION display
window, and (4):MACHINE STATE display window)
 6115-E P-147
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

WORK ZERO display window (7)

In the WORK ZERO display window, the offset value of work coordinate system zero can be set and
checked. Moreover, the selected zero group no. can be selected as the current zero group no.,
allowing the operator to check the zero group no. currently selected.

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5] [6]

ME32125R1101100250001

The detail of window display is as follows.

No. Display Description

[1] WORK ZERO The title of the window
[2] Co./Cos.. The zero group no. currently selected
[3] 1 mm/1 in Unit (1 mm/1 inch)
[4] X/Y/Z/A/B/C Axis name
[5] The number of the selected work Zero group no.
coordinate system groups (up to 400)
[6] -99999.999 to 99999.999 The offset value of work coordinate system zero of
(-9999.9999 to 9999.9999) each axis

The zero group no. currently selected is displayed in highlighted in yellow.

 6115-E P-148
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The function keys to be displayed with the WORK ZERO display window are as follows.
To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.

ME32125R1101100250002

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 SET The input value is used as the zero offset value.
SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the program.
F2 ADD The zero offset value is set by adding the input value to the existing
value.
OPERATE TOOL Displays the ATC window where manual ATC operation is enabled.
ENLARGE Displays the “enlarged current position” window.
CNT.POS
F3 CAL The zero offset value is determined so that the input value becomes
the current position.
F4 FIND Search for a random zero offset no. or selected zero offset no.
COPY 1ROW Copies all the values in the selected line.
F5 SELECT ZERO Set the selected zero offset no. as the current zero offset no.
PASTE Pastes the value last copied.
F6 DELETE 1ROW Deletes all the values in the selected line.
SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative position zero.
F7 QUICK EDIT Shows the “quick edit” pop-up window.
CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.
 6115-E P-149
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The setting procedure of the workpiece coordinate system zero offset value is described as below.

Procedure :

1 Display the RUN screen in the operation screen mode and select the WK SETUP sheet.
The currently selected zero group no. is displayed in highlight or displayed in the screen title
bar.

2 Select the zero group no. to be set and the target axis.
Ten groups of zero offset data are displayed in one screen. To display the zero offset data of
11th and subsequent groups, use the page key.
To select the desired zero group no. and the target axis in the displayed screen, use the cursor
key.

3 Enter the zero offset value by pressing [F1] (SET) and [F2] (ADD) and [F3] (CAL).

a. When the zero offset value is already known

Select [F1] (SET) from the function menu to enter the zero offset value.

b. When moving the zero from the value that has been set
Select [F2] (ADD) from the function menu to enter the relative travel value from the
currently set value.

c. When setting the position where the machine is stopped as the new workpiece coordinate
system zero
Select [F3] (CAL) from the function menu to enter “0”.

4 Press the [WRITE] key.

The data in the selected input range of the setting table is changed according to the function
(SET, ADD or CAL) selected in step 3.

[Supplement]

The local coordinate system is used only with programs.

The manual setting procedure of the zero group no. is described as below

Procedure :

1 Display the RUN screen in the operation screen mode and select the WK SETUP sheet.
The currently selected zero group no. is displayed in highlight or displayed in the screen title
bar.

2 Select the zero group no. to be set and the target axis.
Ten groups of zero offset data are displayed in one screen. To display the zero offset data of
11th and subsequent groups, use the page key.
To select the desired zero group no. and the target axis in the displayed screen, use the cursor
key.

3 Press [F5] (SELECT ZERO) to display the zero selection pop-up window.

4 Press [F7] (OK).

The zero group no. which is displayed in highlight or displayed in the screen title bar is
changed to the number selected in step 2.
 6115-E P-150
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

WORK ZERO and MANUAL MEAS. display window (8)

When the WK SETUP sheet is selected with the IGF measurement function (optional) or the manual
measurement function (optional), the WORK ZERO and MANUAL MEAS. display windows are
displayed.
In the WORK ZERO and MANUAL MEAS. display windows, the following operations can be
performed: workpiece measurement, setting and checking the offset value of work coordinate
system zero, setting the selected zero group no. as the current zero group no., and checking the
zero group no. currently selected.

[1] [2] [3] [7]

[4]

[5] [6] [8]

ME32125R1101100260001
 6115-E P-151
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The detail of window display is as follows.

No. Display Description

[1] WORK ZERO The title of the window
[2] Co./Cos. The zero group no. currently selected
[3] 1 mm/1 in Unit (1 mm/1 inch)
[4] X/Y/Z/A/B/C Axis name
[5] The number of the selected work Zero group no.
coordinate system groups (up to 400)
[6] -99999.999 to 99999.999 The offset value of work coordinate system zero of
(-9999.9999 to 9999.9999) each axis
[7] MANUAL MEAS./INTERACT. MEAS Displays the measurement mode.
The measurement mode can be switched by
pressing [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT).
[8] Measurement diagram (end face)

Measurement diagram (angle)

Measurement diagram (step)

Measurement diagram (circle)

Measurement diagram (between end faces)

Measurement diagram (corner)

Measurement diagram (angle and center between

two circles)

Measurement diagram (circle: three circles)

Measurement diagram (intersection: four points)

The zero group no. currently selected is displayed in highlighted in yellow.

 6115-E P-152
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The function keys to be displayed when the cursor is located in the work zero table are as follows.
To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.

ME32125R1101100260002

The function keys to be displayed after pressing [F6] (WORK GAUGING) (with the cursor located at
the measurement diagram) are as follows.
To change the function keys, press the extension key on the right of the [F8] key.

ME32125R1101100260003

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 SET The input value is used as the zero offset value.
SELECT PROGRAM Displays the “program selection” window to select the program.
MANUAL/ The measurement mode is switched to either MANUAL or
INTERACT INTERACT.
F2 ADD The zero offset value is set by adding the input value to the existing
value.
OPERATE TOOL Displays the ATC window where manual ATC operation is enabled.
ENLARGE Displays the “enlarged current position” window.
CNT.POS
F3 CAL The zero offset value is determined so that the input value becomes
the current position.
F4 FIND Search for a random zero offset no. or selected zero offset no.
COPY 1ROW Copies all the values in the selected line.
PREPARE MEAS. Prepares for measurement.
F5 SELECT ZERO Set the selected zero offset no. as the current zero offset no.
PASTE Pastes the value last copied.
DISPLAY MEAS. Displays the measurement result.
GAUGING PARAM. Displays the “gauging parameter” window to set the interactive work
gauging parameter
F6 WORK GAUGING Moves the cursor to the measurement diagram.
DELETE 1ROW Deletes all the values in the selected line.
SET REL.POS. Displays the “position setting” window to set the relative position zero.
SET ZERO Moves the cursor to the work zero table.
F7 QUICK EDIT Shows the “quick edit” pop-up window.
CHANGE DISPLAY Displays the CHANGE DISPLAY window to change the window.
F8 CHANGE WINDOW Changes the active window.
 6115-E P-153
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Work Gauging Parameter

There are 2 items in the gauging parameter for the work gauging. Once set, the parameters remain
constant unless changes are made.

 Maximum travel distance until contact

Manually position the touch probe, and set the travel distance until contact when there is
contact with the workpiece
In case the set travel amount is exceeded but the contact signal is not confirmed, an alarm is
raised and the touch probe returns to the start position.
Factory setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.).

 Spindle raise amount during OD gauging

Set the retract amount of the spindle. During the gauging cycle of the OD gauging mode, the
spindle is retracted in the Z-axis direction to avoid interference with the workpiece.
Factory setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
 6115-E P-154
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-2. ACTUAL POSITION Display

6-2-1. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 1/4

ME32125R1101100020001

Fig.6-1 ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 1/4

 6115-E P-155
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

The screen items are described below:

Indicates the axis (additional axis) names. For the axis controlled
X Y Z (A B C)
by the mirror image function, “-” sign is put before the axis name.
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position of the currently executed block.
Indicates the distance from the actual position to a target value
DISTANCE
specified by the program.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the program S command value multiplied by the override
S
value.
Indicates the programmed F command value multiplied by the
Fm
override value.
Indicates the current tool number. Next tool number is indicated to
T
the right of a triangle mark.
H Indicates the tool length offset number currently used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.
 6115-E P-156
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Information Window

Select [F3] (LOAD ON/OFF) and [F4] (ANIMATE ON/OFF). Load information appears in the pop-up
window. Then, press the extension key and select [F5] (TOOL ON/OFF).
Tool information appears in the pop-up window.
Example: When [F3] (LOAD ON/OFF) is selected

ME32125R1101100030001

Fig.6-2 LOAD ON/OFF Window

Example: When [F5] (TOOL ON/OFF) is selected

ME32125R1101100030002

Fig.6-3 TOOL ON/OFF Window

 6115-E P-157
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Enlarged size and reduced size

The selection of display size between enlargement and reduction is available for LOAD ON/OFF
window and TOOL ON/OFF window respectively. In either size, the display position can be changed
by drag.

No. Bit Bit status Status of function

Displaying LOAD ON/OFF window in enlarged size
87 6
Displaying LOAD ON/OFF window in reduced size

No. Bit Bit status Status of function

Displaying TOOL ON/OFF window in enlarged size
87 7
Displaying TOOL ON/OFF window in reduced size

 When setting in reduced size (example: LOAD ON/OFF window)

The window position can be changed by drag on the right edge of the ON/OFF window.

ME32125R1101100030003

Fig.6-4 Reduced size

 6115-E P-158
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

 When setting in enlarged size (example: LOAD ON/OFF window)

The window position can be changed by drag on the right edge of the ON/OFF window.

ME32125R1101100030004

Fig.6-5 Enlarged size

 6115-E P-159
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-2-2. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 2/4 (RELATIVE ACTUAL

POSITION Display Screen)

ME32125R1101100040001

Fig.6-6 ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 2/4

Each item displayed in the screen is the same as that in the ACTUAL POSITION display screen 1/4
except for “RELATIVE ACT POSI”.

Relative Actual Position

The relative actual position obtained by the following equation is displayed at every axis.

Relative actual position = (Encoder coordinates value*1) – (Reference position*2) –

(Tool length offset value) – (Machine zero)

*1 Like the other actual position display, the manual shift amount can be added to the encoder
coordinate values. (Whether to add the manual shift or not can be determined by the setting
at NC optional parameter (bit) No. 5 bit 7.)
*2 The reference position is the origin (in the machine coordinate system) for obtaining the
relative actual position.
The reference position can be obtained by the following formula:

Reference position = (Encoder coordinate value) – (Input value*) – (Tool length offset amount) –
(Machine zero)

* The input value is used to set the actual position.

ME32125R1101100050001

For the setting of reference position of relative actual position, refer to the following pages.
 6115-E P-160
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Method of Setting Reference Position for Relative Actual Position

The reference position for relative actual position can be set in the following procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F2] (ACT POSI ENLARGE) from the function menu. The ACTUAL POSITION pop-up
window is displayed, and the pop-up function menu is also displayed.

2 Select [F4] (RELATIVE ACT POSI) from the pop-up function menu. RELATIVE ACTUAL
POSITION is displayed in the ACTUAL POSITION pop-up window, and “POSITION SET
(RELATIVE)” is displayed in the pop-up function menu.

3 Select [F5] (POSI SET (RELATIVE)) from the pop-up function menu. The POSITION SET pop-
up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101100060001

Fig.6-7 POSITION SET Pop-up Window

[Supplement]

[F5] (POSI SET (RELATIVE)) is displayed only when Relative Actual Position is displayed in
the ACTUAL POSITION pop-up window.

4 Input the coordinate values that becomes the reference in the relative coordinates system.
Replace any input value of X, Y, and Z with the coordinate value of actual position. The newly
set value becomes a reference value in the relative coordinate system.
 6115-E P-161
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

5 Select [F8] (CLOSE).

The coordinate value entered at the step 4 is displayed in the RELATIVE ACTUAL POSITION
pop-up window.

[Supplement]

1) Input range of position setting is as follows:

Linear axis ..... -99999.999 to +99999.999mm
(In case of inch unit system, convert an input value inside the NC to mm and then check
the range described above.)
Rotary axis .....
-99999.999 to +99999.999 deg (0.001deg)
-9999.9999 to +9999.9999deg (0.0001deg)
2) If a reference value is set in the ALL AXES input box, the setting data has two unit
system of length and angle when there is a rotary axis as additional axis.
3) For the rotary axis index function, it is not possible to set the reference position.
The displayed relative actual position is the same as normal actual position.
However, if the reference position is specified for all axes (when setting the ALL AXES
input box), an error does not occur because a value for the index axis is unconditionally
set to 0.
4) The reference position is not backed up. When the power is turned off, all values are
reduced to zero for all axes (Zero point of machine coordinate system becomes a
reference position).
However, in the multi-turn rotary table spec., when actual position of work coordinate
system is represented by “Degree” during NC reset (a check mark is put in a bit 1 of the
NC optional parameter bit No.2), reckon backward a reference point to convert the
relative actual position to a value in a range of 0 to 360°. Therefore, if work zero point is
not zero, it becomes a value other than 0.
5) Even if the reference position is changed, the work coordinate value is not changed.
6) The relative actual position of the linear axis is displayed as “-OVERFLOW” when the
relative actual position is less than -99999.999mm (inch system:-9999.9999inch), and as
“+OVERFLOW” when the relative actual position is more than +99999.999mm (inch
system:+9999.9999inch).
The same is also true for the reference position.
7) Depending on the spec., the relative actual position of the rotary axis (rotary table) is
displayed as follows.
The relative actual position of the rotary table and the indexing axis (excluding the rotary
table with LS, multi-turn rotary table, removable axis) is displayed by converting to a
range between 0 and 360°. Similarly, the reference position is also displayed by
converting the angular position within a range between 0 and 360°. In regard to the
relative actual position of the rotary table with LS and the multi-turn rotary table spec., the
value obtained by the equation above is displayed as it is. In case of multi-turn rotary
table spec., the actual position can be converted to 360° at NC reset by setting the
parameter (bit 1 of NC optional parameter bit No.2), and the relative actual position can
also be converted to a range between 0 and 360° by setting the parameter above. If the
additional axis has been removed in the removable axis spec., the relative actual position
is displayed as “-----”.
 6115-E P-162
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-2-3. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 3/4 (Detail Display Screen)

ME32125R1101100070001

Fig.6-8 ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 3/4

The screen items are described below:

XYZ Axis names

ACT POSI (WORK) Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining movement up to the coordinate value
DISTANCE
specified by the program.
TARGET POINT Indicates the coordinate system specified by the program.
ACT POSI (LOCAL) Indicates the actual position in the local coordinate system.
ACT POSI (MACHINE) Indicates the actual position in the machine coordinate system.
RELATIVE ACT POSIT Same with the actual position display screen 2/4.
SPDLST Indicates current spindle conditions (specified by the program).
SPGEAR Indicates current spindle gear conditions.
Co, S, Fm, T, H, D Same with the actual position display screen 1/4.
EXECUTE BLOCK Indicates a currently executed block.
NEXT LINE Indicates a block to be executed next.
 6115-E P-163
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-2-4. ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 4/4

ME32125R1101100080001

Fig.6-9 ACTUAL POSITION Display Screen 4/4

The screen items are described below:

XYZ Axis names

MIRROR IMAGE Indicates the current ON/OFF state of the mirror image function.
ACTUAL POSITION (LOCAL) Indicates the actual position in the local coordinate system.
APA (WORK) Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
ACTUAL POSITION (WORK) Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
ACTUAL POSITION
Indicates the actual position in the machine coordinate system.
(MACHINE)
TARGET POINT (WORK) Indicates the value in the work coordinate system.
DISTANCE REMAINING TO Indicates the remaining distance to the coordinates specified by
TARGET the program.
MANUAL SHIFT AMOUNT Indicates the amount of movement caused by the current manual
(CURRENT) interruption or pulse handle interruption.
MANUAL SHIFT AMOUNT Indicates total amount of movement caused by manual
(TOTAL) interruption or pulse handle interruption.
RELATIVE ACTUAL
Same with the actual position display screen 2/4.
POSITION
Co, S, Fm, T, H, D Same with the actual position display screen 1/4.
 6115-E P-164
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-3. MAIN PROGRAM Display

6-3-1. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Machine Conditions

ME32125R1101100090001

Fig.6-10 MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Machine Conditions

The screen items are described below:

CURRENT MAIN/SUB
Displays the main (or sub) program source.
PROGRAM
XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
TARGET Indicates the programmed target coordinates.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the programmed S command value multiplied by the
S
override value.
Indicates the program F command value multiplied by the override
Fm
value.
Indicates the current tool number.
T
Next tool number is indicated to the right of a triangle mark.
H Indicates the tool length offset number currently used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.

[Supplement]

A mark “ ” displayed at the head of a block in the program display area indicates a block position
currently read in the buffer, and “↑” indicates a block position currently executed.
 6115-E P-165
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-3-2. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Subprogram

ME32125R1101100100001

Fig.6-11 MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Subprogram

The screen items are described below:

READ MAIN PROGRAM Displays the main program source.

XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the program S command value multiplied by the override
S
value.
Indicates the program F command value multiplied by the override
Fm
value.
T Indicates the current tool number.
H Indicates the tool length offset number currently used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.
READ SUB PROGRAM Displays the subprogram source.
 6115-E P-166
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-3-3. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Valid G/M Code

ME32125R1101100110001

Fig.6-12 MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Valid G/M Code

The screen items are described below:

CURRENT MAIN/SUB
Displays the main (or sub) program source.
PROGRAM
XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the programmed S command value multiplied by the
S
override value.
Indicates the programmed F command value multiplied by the
Fm
override value.
T Indicates the current tool number.
H Indicates the tool length offset number current used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.
G code Displays the currently valid G code.
M code Displays the currently valid M code.
 6115-E P-167
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-3-4. MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Schedule Program

ME32125R1101100120001

Fig.6-13 MAIN PROGRAM Display Screen with Schedule Program

The screen items are described below:

CURRENT MAIN/SUB
Displays the main (or sub) program source.
PROGRAM
XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the programmed S command value multiplied by the
S
override value.
Indicates the programmed F command value multiplied by the
Fm
override value.
T Indicates the current tool number.
H Indicates the tool length offset number current used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.
SCHEDULE PROGRAM Displays the schedule program source.
 6115-E P-168
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-4. SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display

6-4-1. SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display Screen with Machine Conditions

ME32125R1101100130001

Fig.6-14 SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display Screen with Machine Conditions

The screen items are described below:

SCHEDULE PROGRAM Displays the schedule program source.

XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
TARGET Indicates the programmed target coordinate system.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the programmed S command value multiplied by the
S
override value.
Indicates the programmed F command value multiplied by the
Fm
override value.
T Indicates the current tool number.
H Indicates the tool length offset number currently used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number current used.
 6115-E P-169
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-4-2. SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display Screen with Main Program

ME32125R1101100140001

Fig.6-15 SCHEDULE PROGRAM Display Screen with Main Program

The screen items are described below:

SCHEDULE PROGRAM Displays schedule program source.

XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the work coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the programmed S command value multiplied by the
S
override value.
Indicates the programmed F command value multiplied by the
Fm
override value.
T Indicates the current tool number.
H Indicates the tool length offset number currently used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.
CURRENT MAIN/SUB
Displays the main (or sub) program source.
PROGRAM
 6115-E P-170
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-5. MDI PROGRAM Display

ME32125R1101100150001

Fig.6-16 MDI PROGRAM Display Screen

The screen items are described below:

CURRENT Displays the currently executed input data.

BUFFER Displays the input data stored in the buffer.
XYZ Axis names
ACT POSI Indicates the actual position in the program coordinate system.
Indicates the remaining distance from the actual position to the
DISTANCE
programmed target coordinates.
TARGET Indicates the target coordinate value specified by the program.
BLOCK DATA (CURRENT) Indicates valid G and M codes in the executed block.
Co Indicates the work coordinate system number.
Indicates the programmed S command value multiplied by the
S
override value.
Indicates the programmed F command value multiplied by the
Fm
override value.
T Indicates the current tool number.
H Indicates the tool length offset number currently used.
D Indicates the tool diameter offset number currently used.
 6115-E P-171
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

6-6. BLOCK DATA Display

ME32125R1101100160001

Fig.6-17 BLOCK DATA (CURRENT) Display Screen

The block data display screen has four screens (1/4 to 4/4): Current, Next, Next But One, Next But
Two.
The following information is displayed in the Next, Next But One, Next But Two screens:

 Next; Displays a block data executed next.

 Next But One; Displays a block data executed next but one.

 Next But Two; Displays a block data executed next but two.

The screen items are described below:

G CODE Displays the valid G codes.

M CODE Displays the valid M codes.
XYZ Axis names
TARGET POINT Indicates the programmed target coordinate values.
I to F1 Indicates a block data item.
S to D (Refer to the following page “Items of one block data”.)
Np Hole number for coordinate calculation
Hc Work coordinate system number
Indicates currently executing data item.
Sr to Buffer Data
(Refer to the following page “Currently executed data item”.)
 6115-E P-172
SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN DISPLAY

Items of one block data

I I command value J J command value

K K command value F F command value
Fd Feed command value (0.001 mm/8 ms) Ft F command value during dwell
F1 Feedrate (F1 digit command) S Spindle rpm command value
Tc Current tool number Tn Next tool number
M M command value H Tool length offset number
D Tool diameter offset number

Currently executed data item

Sr Actual spindle rpm min-1 {rpm}

So The S command of the program multiplied by override value. min-1 {rpm}
Fm Actual feedrate mm/min
Fr Actual feedrate mm/rev
Pr No. of repetition of main program by scheduled operation —
Pe No. of execution of main program by scheduled operation —
Nr Restart hole number —
Ns Sequence specified by sequence stop —
Cr Commanded repetitive number of subprogram —
Ce Actual repetitive number of subprogram —
BC Block counter —
Buffer Data Presence or absence of buffer data —
 6115-E P-173
SECTION 7 HELP FUNCTION

SECTION 7 HELP FUNCTION

7-1. HELP Screen

Use the help function when any alarm occurs or if there is any question about operation or
programming. When the [HELP] key is pressed during alarm occurrence, the alarm-related help
screen appears. When pressed in non-alarm state, the following help screen appears.

ME32125R1101200010001

Fig.7-1 HELP Screen

The area showing the items from the Screen Operations to Manual Operation is called the help
information display area, and the left column where the menus are displayed is called the menu
display area. The above screen is called the contents screen. This section describes how to use the
help function.
 6115-E P-174
SECTION 7 HELP FUNCTION

7-1-1. Using the Menu Display Area

This menu is displayed on all the help screens.
Press the menu item using the touch panel or a mouse to select the item that you want to referred
to.

ME32125R1101200020001

Fig.7-2 Help Screen Menu Display Area

The menu items are as follows:

 Operation
Displays the contents for the machine operation guide.

 Program Operation
Displays the contents for the file operation guide.

 Data Setting
Displays the contents for the data setting guide.

 Program Format
Displays the contents for the program format guide.

 Alarm & Error

Displays the contents for the alarm & error guide.

 Search
Displays the search result of an alarm, G code, M code, system variable, or mnemonic code.

7-1-2. Item Selection from Contents Screen

Display the help screen from the contents screen of each item in the following method.

Procedure :

1 Point the white button on the left of the required item using the touch panel or a mouse.

2 Press the button using the touch panel or the mouse.

 6115-E P-175
SECTION 7 HELP FUNCTION

7-2. Search
It is possible to search the guide information by entering an alarm No., G code, M code, system
variable, or mnemonic code. The searching procedures is as follows:

Procedure :

1 Move the cursor to the character-string search column using the touch panel or a mouse.

2 Enter the number, variable name, or code that you want to search.
For searching the alarm No. 2218, enter “2218.”
For searching a G code G01, enter “G01.”
For searching an M code M83, enter “M83.”
For searching a system variable VAPAZ, enter “VAPAZ.”
For searching a mnemonic code MODOUT, enter “MODOUT.”

3 Press the [WRITE] key or press the Search button.

The searched guide information will appear.

7-3. Terminating Help Screen

Press the [x] mark at the upper right of the screen.

7-4. Supplementary Information

If an alarm occurs while the help screen is displayed, press the help key again. The guide
information on the alarm will appear.
DATA OPERATION
 6115-E P-176
SECTION 1 DATA SETTING MODES

SECTION 1 DATA SETTING MODES

1-1. Guide to Modes

The data setting operations of this NC unit are performed in the following three modes:

(1) Tool data Setting mode

In this mode, tool data (tool number, tool attribute, tool shape, tool offset value) and data in the
pot/tool table are set.

(2) Parameter Setting mode

In this mode, system parameters, user parameters, common variables, NC optional
parameters, and workpiece zero offset value are set.

(3) Program operation mode

In this mode, NC part programs are read, edited, input and output, and their files are managed.

 When a mode selection key on the NC operation panel is pressed, the indicating lamp in its
upper corner is lit.

 Once program execution has been started in the automatic or MDI operation mode, the
program is executed continuously even when the mode is changed to a data setting mode
(EDIT/AUX, PARAMETER, TOOL DATA). Thus it is possible to edit, input and output data and
set parameters and tool data during automatic operation.
 6115-E P-177
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

In the tool data setting mode, the data hold by each tool (tool no., tool attribution, tool shape, tool offset value,
etc.) and the pot / tool correspondence table can be set.

2-1. Basic Operation with Tool Data Setting

The basic operation procedure for tool data setting is described as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the “tool data setting” key among the mode selection keys.

2 Displays the TOOL DATA sheet in the TOOL DATA screen.

To display the TOOL DATA screen, press [F8] (CHANGE DISPLAY).

To display the TOOL DATA sheet, press the sheet keys or touch the TOOL

DATA sheet on the right top of the screen.

3 Register the tool data. (For the detail, refer to “2-2-1.REGIST TOOL DATA”.)
Press [F1] (REGIST TOOLDATA).
Enter the required tool data including the tool no., tool attribution, tool shape, and tool offset
value. Then press [F7] (OK).

4 Displays the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet.

To display the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet, the sheet keys or touch the

MAGAZINE INFO. sheet on the right top of the screen.

5 Set the pot / tool correspondence table. (For the detail, refer to 2-3-1. INSERT TOOL.)
Locate the cursor to the desired pot number, and press [F1] (INSERT TOOL).
When the data list of the tools that have not been mounted in the magazine is displayed, locate
the cursor to the tool data to be inserted, and press [F7] (OK). Then the tool data are set to the
pot number.
The tool set in the pot / tool correspondence table can be mounted into the spindle by the ATC.
 6115-E P-178
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2. Tool Data Operation

The details of the TOOL DATA sheet shown in the TOOL DATA screen are as follows.

[1] [2] [3] [10] [11] [9]

[13] [14] [15]

[12]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[16]

[17] [18]

ME32125R1101500100001

No. Display Description

[1] Left half of the screen Tool data list
[2] ALL TOOL/SHAPE/MG/LIFE The item selected with [F6] (FILTER).
[3] 0 to 999 Total number of the tools displayed in the tool list
[4] TOOL NO. (1 to 99999999) Tool no.
 6115-E P-179
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

No. Display Description

[5] ATT Tool attributes
P/A/U/B/T/G/Q/Z/M/S/E/L/F/ P : Indexing not possible tool
H/R/J/K/V/W/X/N/C A : AT tool
U : U-axis tool
B : Tool with cap
T : Turning tool
G : Grinding tool
Q : Probe
Z : Reference tool
M : Heavy tool
S : Light tool
E : Long tool
L : Large-diameter tool
F : Super large diameter tool
H : Small-diameter tool
R : Standard boring tool
J : Medium-diameter tool
K : Medium-diameter boring tool
V : Large-diameter single-side boring
W : Large-diameter double-side boring
X : Super large diameter boring bar single-side
N : ATC not possible
C : Thru-spindle coolant possible
[6] KIND Tool kind
UNDEF./ACS.TL/CNT-DRL/SPT-DRL/ UNDEF. : not set
DRILL/REAMAR/BORING/BACK- ACS.TL: other tools
BOR/CHAMFER/TAP/HELI-TAP/END- CNT-DRL: center drill
MILL/BL-EMILL/RD-EMILL/FACE- SPT-DRL: spot drill
MILL/SIDE-CTR DRILL: drill
REAMAR : reamer
BORING: boring
BACK-BOR : back boring
CHAMFER : chamfering cutter
TAP: tap
HELI-TAP: helical tap
END-MILL: flat end mill
BL-EMILL: ball end mill
RD-EMILL: corner R end mill
FACE-MILL: milling cutter
SIDE-CTR: side cutter
[7] DIA (0 to 999.9999) Tool diameter (”D1” value set with the tool shape)
[8] POT (1 to 999/SP/ (POT)/-) 1 to 999 : The POT no. to which the tool is mounted
SP/ (POT): The tool mounted in the spindle
- : tools not mounted in the magazine
[9] Right half of the screen Tool data detail
The detail of tool data selected in the tool data list
[10] TOOL NO. The tool no. selected in the tool data list
[11] TOOL NAME Tool name
 6115-E P-180
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

No. Display Description

[12] TOOL-L OFST Tool length offset
TOOL-L OFST (GEOMETRY) (*1) Top: 1st tool length offset amount (HA)
Middle: 2nd tool length offset amount (HB)
Bottom: 3rd tool length offset amount (HC)
Tool length geometry amount (*1)
Top: 1st tool length geometry amount (HA)
Middle: 2nd tool length geometry amount (HB)
Bottom: 3rd tool length geometry amount (HC)
[13] TOOL-L OFST (WEAR) (*1) Tool length wear offset (*1)
Top: 1st tool length wear amount (HA)
Middle: 2nd tool length wear amount (HB)
Bottom: 3rd tool length wear amount (HC)
[14] CUTTER R COMP Tool radius compensation amount
CUTTER R COMP (GEOMETRY) (*1) Top: 1st tool radius compensation amount (DA)
Middle: 2nd tool radius compensation amount (DB)
Bottom: 3rd tool radius compensation amount (DC)
Tool radius geometry amount (*1)
Top: 1st tool radius geometry amount (DA)
Middle: 2nd tool radius geometry amount (DB)
Bottom: 3rd tool radius geometry amount (DC)
[15] CUTTER R COMP (WEAR) (*1) Tool radius compensation amount (*1)
Top: 1st tool radius wear amount (DA)
Middle: 2nd tool radius wear amount (DB)
Bottom: 3rd tool radius wear amount (DC)
[16] TOOL GEOMETRY (TYPE) Refer to the description in [6].
[17] TOOL GEOMETRY (SHAPE) L1: tool length 1
L2: tool length 2
D1: tool diameter 1
D2: tool diameter 2
D3: tool diameter 3
A1: tool angle 1
A2: tool angle 2
TN: tap nominal amount
R : tool radius
PT: thread pitch
CA: chamfering angle
NP: nose projection
IT: incomplete
IC: chamfer length
[18] TOOL GEOMETRY (FLUTES) The number of flutes
(*1) Optional: Tool wear offset function
 6115-E P-181
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

The function keys to be displayed with the cursor located in the tool data list window (left half of the
screen) are as follows.

ME32125R1101500100002

The function keys to be displayed with the cursor located in the tool data detail window (right half of
the screen) are as follows.

ME32125R1101500100003

The items which can be selected by the cursor in the tool data detail window can be edited using
[F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), and [F3] (CAL) without opening the TOOLDATA EDIT window by [F2] (EDIT
TOOLDATA).
The items that can be operated on the TOOL DATA sheet are described below.
 6115-E P-182
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA

It is possible to register new tool data.

ME32125R1101500110001

Display the TOOL DATA sheet and press [F1] (REGIST TOOLDATA). The TOOLDATA EDIT window
appears with the default setting values. Enter the required tool data and press [F7] (OK) to register
the tool data.
If F8 (CANCEL) is pressed, tool data will not be registered.
The details of the TOOLDATA EDIT window are as follows.

[1] [2]

[3] [7]

[4]
[5]
[6]

[8] [11] [12] [13] [14]

[9]

[10]
ME32125R1101500110002
 6115-E P-183
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

No. Display Description

[1] TOOL NO. (0 to 99999999) The tool no. of the tool data currently displayed.
[2] ATT Tool properties are displayed in alphabet.
P/A/U/B/T/G/Q/Z/M/S/E/L/F/ P : Indexing not possible tool
H/R/J/K/V/W/X/N/C A : AT tool
U : U-axis tool
B : Tool with cap
T : Turning tool
G : Grinding tool
Q : Probe
Z : Reference tool
M : Heavy tool
S : Light tool
E : Long tool
L : Large-diameter tool
F : Super large diameter tool
H : Small-diameter tool
R : Standard boring tool
J : Medium-diameter tool
K : Medium-diameter boring tool
V : Large-diameter single-side boring
W : Large-diameter double-side boring
X : Super large diameter boring bar single-side
N : ATC not possible
C : Thru-spindle coolant possible
[3] TOOL NAME Tool name
[4] TOOL PROPERTIES (TOOL Tool type
TYPE)
Normal tool/Indexing not possible
tool/AT tool/U-axis tool/Tool with
cap/Turning tool/Grinding tool
[5] TOOL PROPERTIES (DIA. TYPE) Tool diameter type
None/Large-diameter tool/Super
large diameter tool/Small-diameter
tool/Standard boring tool/Medium-
diameter tool/Medium-diameter
boring tool/ Large-diameter single-
side boring/ Large-diameter
double-side boring/ Super large
diameter boring bar single-side
[6] TOOL PROPERTIES (HEAVY Tool weight type
TYPE)
None/ Heavy too/Light tool
[7] TOOL PROPERTIES (S_UPPER The maximum speed of the tool
LIM)
[8] TOOL GEOMETRY (TYPE) Refer to [16] of the description about the TOOL DATA
sheet in “2-2. Tool Data Operation”.
[9] TOOL GEOMETRY (SHAPE) Refer to [17] of the description about the TOOL DATA
sheet in “2-2. Tool Data Operation”.
[10] TOOL GEOMETRY (FLUTES) The number of flutes
 6115-E P-184
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

No. Display Description

[11] TOOL-L OFST Tool length offset
TOOL-L OFST (GEOMETRY) (*1) Top: 1st tool length offset amount (HA)
Middle: 2nd tool length offset amount (HB)
Bottom: 3rd tool length offset amount (HC)
Tool length geometry amount (*1)
Top: 1st tool length geometry amount (HA)
Middle: 2nd tool length geometry amount (HB)
Bottom: 3rd tool length geometry amount (HC)
[12] TOOL-L OFST (WEAR) (*1) Tool length wear offset (*1)
Top: 1st tool length wear amount (HA)
Middle: 2nd tool length wear amount (HB)
Bottom: 3rd tool length wear amount (HC)
[13] CUTTER R COMP Tool radius compensation amount
CUTTER R COMP (GEOMETRY) Top: 1st tool radius compensation amount (DA)
(*1) Middle: 2nd tool radius compensation amount (DB)
Bottom: 3rd tool radius compensation amount (DC)
Tool radius geometry amount (*1)
Top: 1st tool radius geometry amount (DA)
Middle: 2nd tool radius geometry amount (DB)
Bottom: 3rd tool radius geometry amount (DC)
[14] CUTTER R COMP (WEAR) (*1) Tool radius compensation amount (*1)
Top: 1st tool radius wear amount (DA)
Middle: 2nd tool radius wear amount (DB)
Bottom: 3rd tool radius wear amount (DC)
(*1) Optional: Tool wear offset function

[Supplement]

On the TOOLDATA EDIT screen, the items on the screen may vary and sheets may be added
depending on the optional specifications.
After the options are provided, it is necessary to set the tool data required with the options.
For the detail, refer to the instruction manual for each option.

Registering the tool shape

Display the TOOL DATA sheet and press function key [F1] (REGIST TOOL DATA) to display the
following function key.

ME32125R1101500040001

The tool shape can be registered by pressing function key [F4] (SET TOOL MODEL).
Refer to “OSP-P300S/P300M BASIC OPERATION MANUAL” for details on tool shape registration.
 6115-E P-185
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2-2. EDIT TOOL DATA

It is possible to edit the tool data that have been registered.

ME32125R1101500120001

Select the tool to be edited from the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet,
and press [F2] (EDIT TOOLDATA). Then the TOOLDATA EDIT window appears. After editing the
tool data, the tool edit will be completed by pressing [F7] (OK). If [F8] (CANCEL) is pressed, the tool
data before being edited will be maintained.
For the detail of the TOOLDATA EDIT window, refer to “2-2-1.REGIST TOOLDATA”.

[Supplement]

 The contents of the tool data edited in the TOOL DATA sheet are reflected to the tool data in
the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet and vice versa.
 When a program is being executed, if [F2] (EDIT TOOLDATA) is executed against the inserted
tool data, or if [F7] (OK) from the TOOLDATA EDIT window is executed, the error “5200 Main
program executing 8” occurs.

2-2-3. DELETE TOOL DATA

It is possible to delete the tool data that have been registered.

ME32125R1101500130001

Deleting tool data (by entering a tool no.)

Select the tool to be deleted from the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet.
When [F3] (DELETE TOOLDATA) is pressed, the DELETE TOOLDATA window appears.

ME32125R1101500140001

The selected tool data are deleted by pressing [F6] (YES)

If [F7] (NO) is pressed, the tool data will not be deleted.
 6115-E P-186
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Deleting tool data (by selecting two or more tool numbers)

When [F3] (DELETE TOOLDATA) is pressed with TOOL DATA sheet, the following function keys are
displayed

ME32125R1101500150001

When [F1] (SEL-TOOL DATA) is pressed, the DELETE SELECTED TOOL DATA window appears.

ME32125R1101500150002

ME32125R1101500150003

Locate the cursor to the tool data to be deleted on the DELETE SELECTED TOOL DATA window,
check the mark by pressing [F1] (CHECK [+] [-]). If the cursor is located to the data already has the
check mark and [F1] (CHECK [+] [-]) is pressed, the check mark is removed.
Pressing [F2] (ALL ITEM ON/OFF) places or removes the check mark to and from all tool data
boxes.

After the check marks are placed onto the tool data to be deleted, press [F7] (OK).

ME32125R1101500150004

When the confirmation window is displayed, press [F6] (YES). The selected tool data will be deleted.
If [F7] (NO) is pressed, the selected tool data are not deleted.
 6115-E P-187
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

[Supplement]

 In the tool list displayed in the DELETE SELECTED TOOL DATA window, the SEARCH
function and the FILTER function can be used.
For the detail of SEARCH function, refer to “2-2-4. TOOL DATA SEARCH”. For the detail of
FILTER function, refer to “2-2-5. TOOL DATA FILTER”.
 If a tool data is deleted, S_UPPER LIM set value, TOOL NO. greater than 1,000, TOOL OFST
values are all deleted. When registering a tool data, reset appropriate S_UPPER LIM set
value and TOOL OFST values for each tool.

2-2-4. TOOL DATA SEARCH

It is possible to search the tool data that have been registered according to the tool no., pot no., and
current tool no.

ME32125R1101500290001

Locate the cursor to the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet, and press [F5]
(SEARCH). Then the TOOL DATA SEARCH window appears.

ME32125R1101500290002

SEARCH T.NO.

Press [F5] (T.NO/POT.NO) to select SEARCH T.NO. in the TOOL DATA SEARCH window. Enter the
tool no. to be searched for and press [F7] (OK). Then the cursor will move to the entered tool no. If
the entered tool no. is not found in the tool data list, the cursor will not move.

POT NO. SEARCH

Press [F5] (T.NO/POT.NO) to select POT.NO SEARCH in the TOOL DATA SEARCH window. Enter
the pot no. to be searched for and press [F7] (OK). Then the cursor will move to the tool of entered
pot no. If the entered tool no. is not found in the tool data list, the cursor will not move.

ACT TOOL NO. SEARCH

When [F1] (SPINDLE MNT TOOL) is pressed, the cursor will move to the current tool no.
When the current tool no. is not found, the cursor will not move.
 6115-E P-188
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2-5. TOOL DATA FILTER

By pressing the FILTER key, the display kind in the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL
DATA sheet is changed.

ME32125R1101500330001

Locate the cursor to the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet, and when [F6]
(FILTER) is pressed, the FILTERING window appears.

ME32125R1101500330002

Filtering condition is divided into two groups (TOOL GEOMETRY, MG); which becomes effective by
putting a mark in the check box.
The check mark in the check box with the item selected by the cursor can be placed and removed
by pressing [F1] (CHECK [+] [-]).
Filtering is set based on the following conditions.

 When ALL is checked, the setting of other items in the group is ignored.

 When two or more items in the same group are checked, the tool data that includes at least one
checked item are displayed.
Example) When DRILL and REAMER of TOOL GEOMETRY are checked, the tool data in
which either DRILL or REAMER is set in KIND are displayed in the tool data list.

 When check marks are placed over different groups, the tool data that satisfy all the conditions
of the checked groups are displayed.
Example) When DRILL of TOOL GEOMETRY and MOUNT TOOL of MG are checked, the
tool data in which DRILL is set in KIND and that is mounted in the magazine are
displayed in the tool data list.

When the filtering conditions are decided, press [F7] (OK).

The tool data that satisfy the conditions are displayed in the tool data list.
 6115-E P-189
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2-6. Sorting Tool Data

It is possible to arrange the display of tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet
in ascending or descending order by the tool no. and the pot no.

ME32125R1101500340001

Locate the cursor to the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet and press [F7]
(SORT). Then the following function keys are displayed

ME32125R1101500340002

When [F1] (T.NO. (UP)) is pressed the tool data list is arranged in ascending order according to the
tool no.
When [F2] (T.NO. (DOWN)) is pressed the tool data list is arranged in descending order according to
the tool no.
When [F3] (POT NO. (UP)) is pressed the tool data list is arranged in ascending order according to
the pot no.
When [F4] (POT NO. (DOWN)) is pressed the tool data list is arranged in descending order
according to the pot no.

2-2-7. COPY TOOL DATA

It is possible to copy the tool data that have been registered.

ME32125R1101500350001

Select the tool to be copied from the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet
and press [F1] (COPY TOOLDATA). Then the COPY TOOL DATA window appears.

ME32125R1101500350002

Enter the tool no. in TO, and press [F6] (YES). Then the tool data with the specified tool no. are
copied. If [F7] (NO) is pressed, the tool data will not be copied.
 6115-E P-190
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2-8. TOOL DATA IN / OUT

The tool data can be read from the file (input) and can be output to the file.

ME32125R1101500360001

Locate the cursor to the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet and press [F3]
(TOOLDATA IN/OUT). Then the following function keys are displayed.

ME32125R1101500360002

When [F1] (TL-DATA INPUT) is pressed, the TOOL DATA INPUT SELECTION window is displayed,
which allows the tool data to be read from a file.
When [F2] (TL-DATA OUTPUT) is pressed, the TOOL DATA OUTPUT SELECTION window is
displayed, which allows the tool data to be output to the file.

The details of the TOOL DATA INPUT SELECTION window and the TOOL DATA OUTPUT
SELECTION window are as follows.

[TOOL DATA INPUT SELECTION window]

[1] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

[2]

[3]
[4]
[5]
[12] [13]
ME32125R1101500360003

[TOOL DATA OUTPUT SELECTION window]

[1]

[2]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [3]

[12] [4]
[5]
[13]
ME32125R1101500360004
 6115-E P-191
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

No. Display Description

[1] TOOL DATA INPUT The title of window
SELECTION /TOOL DATA
OUTPUT SELECTION
[2] TOOL DATA INPUT FOLDER The folder list in the device displayed in [3].
LIST/TOOL DATA OUTPUT The background of the selected folder name is highlighted
FOLDER LIST in yellow.
[3] MD1: */US0: */US1: * The device name for the tool data input/output folder list
[4] DEVICE NAME The device name of input/output destination
[5] FOLDER NAME The folder name of input/output destination
[6] : data to be input or output
: not data to be input or output
[7] TOOL NO. ( /blank) Tool no.
: At tool data input, the tool no. already exists.
[8] GNo Group no.
[9] MNT. (○/ blank) ○: The tool is mounted in the magazine.
Blank: The tool is not mounted in the magazine.
[10] TOOL TYPE Refer to the description in [6] in “2-2.Tool Data Operation.”
[11] TOOL NAME. Tool name
[12] Guide message Guide message display area
[13] OK OK button

The function keys to be displayed with the TOOL DATA INPUT SELECTION window and the TOOL
DATA OUTPUT SELECTION window are as follows.

[TOOL DATA INPUT SELECTION window]

 When the cursor is located at TOOL DATA INPUT FOLDER LIST

ME32125R1101500360005

 When the cursor is located at “tool data selection list” (right half of the screen)

ME32125R1101500360006

[TOOL DATA OUTPUT SELECTION window]

 When the cursor is located at TOOL DATA OUTPUT FOLDER LIST

ME32125R1101500360007

 When the cursor is located at “tool data selection list” (left half of the screen)

ME32125R1101500360008
 6115-E P-192
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Function
Description
Key Name
F1 SELECT ON Selects the folder specified by the cursor as the input/output folder.
The mounted tools cannot be selected at the time of tool data input.
SELECT Selects the data specified by the cursor as the input/output data target.
F2 FOLDER MAKE Creates the folder in the tool data output folder list.
NOT SELECT Does not select the data specified by the cursor as the input/output data
target.
F3 FOLDER Deletes the folder specified by the cursor in the tool data input/output
DELETE folder list.
ALL CHOICE Selects all the data in the tool data selection list.
The mounted tools cannot be selected at the time of tool data input.
F4 DIR DISPLAY Changes the device for the tool data input/output folder list.
INIT Cancels all selections for input/output data.
F5 SORT When the cursor is located at the tool data input/output folder list, the list is
arranged according to the folder name and date.
When the cursor is located at the tool selection list, the list is arranged
according to the tool no., tool kind and tool name.
F6 REFRESH The tool data input/output folder list and the tool data selection list are
updated.
F7 OK Executes tool data input/output.
The button cannot be pressed if no data to be input or output are selected.
F8 CLOSE Closes the tool data input/output selection window.
 6115-E P-193
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

TOOL DATA INPUT

The operation procedure for tool data input is described as follows.

Procedure :

1 Display the TOOL DATA INPUT SELECTION window.

Locate the cursor to the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet, press
[F3] (TOOLDATA IN/OUT) and then [F1] (TL-DATA INPUT).

ME32125R1101500370001

ME32125R1101500370002

2 Select the input folder.

Locate the cursor in TOOL DATA INPUT FOLDER LIST to the folder where the tool data to be
input are stored, and press either [F1] (SELECT ON) or the Enter key.

ME32125R1101500370003

ME32125R1101500370004

3 Select the tool data to be input.

Select the data to be input by either [F1] (SELECT) or [F3] (ALL CHOICE) from “tool data
selection list” (right half of the screen).
 6115-E P-194
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

4 Enter the tool data.

When [F7] (OK) is pressed, the INPUT CONFIRMATION window appears.

ME32125R1101500370005

To cancel the input, press [F7] (NO).

To execute input, press [F6] (YES).
When the input data have been already registered to tool data, the OVERWRITE
CONFIRMATION window appears.

ME32125R1101500370006

Press [F7] (NO) to cancel the input.

To enable overwrite and execute input, press [F6] (YES).
 6115-E P-195
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

TOOL DATA OUTPUT

The operation procedure for tool data output is described as follows.

Procedure :

1 Display the TOOL DATA OUTPUT SELECTION window.

Locate the cursor to the tool data list (left half of the screen) in the TOOL DATA sheet, and
press [F3] (TOOL DATA IN/OUT) and then [F2] (TL-DATA OUTPUT).

ME32125R1101500380001

ME32125R1101500380002

2 Select the tool data to be output.

Select the data to be output from the “tool data selection list” (left half of the screen) by either
[F1] (SELECT) or [F3] (ALL CHOICE).
 6115-E P-196
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

3 Select the output folder.

Select the folder to output the tool data from the TOOL DATA OUTPUT FOLDER LIST, and
press either [F1] (SELECT ON) or the Enter key.
At this time, if the tool data already exist in the selected folder, message “Some tool data files
exist in the selected folder.” is displayed in the guide message display area.

ME32125R1101500380003

ME32125R1101500380004

When the folder to be selected is not found in the tool data output folder list, create the folder
by pressing [F2] (FOLDER MAKE).

4 Output the tool data.

When [F7] (OK) is pressed, the OUTPUT CONFIRMATION window appears

ME32125R1101500380005

Press [F7] (NO) to cancel the output.

To execute output, press [F6] (YES).
When the tool data to be output already exist in the specified output folder, the OVERWRITE
CONFIRMATION window appears.

ME32125R1101500380006

Press [F7] (NO) to cancel the output.

To enable overwrite and execute output, press [F6] (YES).
 6115-E P-197
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-2-9. Relation Parameters

Register parameters related to the tool data, such as REFERENCE TOOL NUMBER and PROBE
NUMBER.

ME32125R1101500050001

Press the Extension key on the TOOL DATA screen and then [F7] (PARAM.) to show the RELATION
PARAM screen.

ME32125R1101500050002

[NO 1: REFERENCE TOOL NUMBER]

During OPERATE TOOL, sets the tool number to be selected when REFERENCE TOOL SELECT is
executed.
[NO 2: PROBE NUMBER]
During OPERARTE TOOL, sets the tool number to be selected when PROBE SELECT is executed.
[NO 3: RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE] (*)
If the tool length offset amount is the absolute value from the spindle nose, sets “ABSOLUTE”, and if
it is the relative value from the reference tool, sets “RELATIVE”.
[NO 4: PREFERENCE TOOL OFFSET] (*)
Sets the PREFERENCE TOOL OFFSET if “RELATIVE” is set on NO 3.
[NO 5: PERMIT. TOOL PROJ. DIFF] (*)
Sets the permissible difference between the tool projection amount of the tool model and the tool
length offset amount (HA).
If the difference between the “tool projection amount of the tool model from the spindle nose” and
the “tool length offset amount (HA)” of the tool data exceeds this set value, the value is displayed in
yellow on the pot / tool correspondence table.

(*) Option: Setting not possible if the Collision Avoidance System function is not provided.

[Supplement]

 Refer to "2-3-5. OPERATE TOOL" for details on manual tool operation.

 When the Collision Avoidance System is provided, it is necessary to select the toolholder
model and the tool projection amount of the correspondent tool model. For details, refer to
"OSP-P300M Collision Avoidance System Instruction Manual – Basic / Tutorial".
 6115-E P-198
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-3. Operating the MAGAZINE INFO.

The details of the TOOL DATA window in the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet are as follows.

[1] [10]

[2] [3] [4]

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

ME32125R1101500390001

No. Display Description

[1] Left half of the screen The magazine information data list (pot / tool
correspondence table )
[2] ACT T-NO. (1 to 99999999/ Current tool no., current tool attribution
N/A, tool attribution) (For the tool attribution, refer to the TOOL DATA EDIT
window detail [2] in “2-2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA”.)
[3] NXT T-NO. (1 to 99999999/ Next tool no., next tool attribution
N/A, tool attribution) (For the tool attribution, refer to the TOOL DATA EDIT
window detail [2] in “2-2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA”.)
[4] MG POSITION (1 to 999) Magazine position
[5] POT (1 to 999) Pot no.
[6] TOOL NO. (1 to 99999999) The tool no. for the pot no.
[7] ATT Tool attribution
(Refer to the TOOL DATA (Refer to the TOOL DATA EDIT window detail [2] in “2-2-1.
EDIT window detail [2] in “2- REGIST TOOL DATA”.)
2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA”.)
[8] KIND Tool kind
(Refer to the tool data sheet (Refer to the tool data sheet detail [6] in “2-2. Tool Data
detail [6] in “2-2. Tool Data Operation.”)
Operation.”)
[9] DIA (-999.999 to 999.999) Tool diameter (tool shape D1)
 6115-E P-199
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

No. Display Description

[10] Right half of the screen Tool data detail
The detail of the tool data being selected by the magazine
information data list
(For the detail of this window, refer to the tool data sheet
details [9] to [18] in “2-2. Tool Data Operation.”)
The function keys to be displayed when the cursor is located at the magazine information data list
window (left half of the screen) are as follows.
[F1] (CHECK MODEL) is displayed when the Collision Avoidance System is provided.

ME32125R1101500390002

The function keys to be displayed when the cursor is located at the tool data detail window (right half
of the screen) are as follows.

ME32125R1101500390003

The items which can be selected by the cursor in the tool data detail window can be edited using
[F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), and [F3] (CAL) without opening the TOOL DATA EDIT window by [F2] (EDIT
TOOL DATA).

The operation done in the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet is described below.

 6115-E P-200
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-3-1. INSERT TOOL

It is possible to set the tool data that have been registered and the dummy tool to the pot no.

ME32125R1101500400001

Locate the cursor to the pot no. to which the tool data are to be set from the pot / tool
correspondence table in the magazine information data list (left half of the screen) in the MAGAZINE
INFO. sheet.
Then, when [F1] (INSERT TOOL) is pressed, the SELECT TOOL window appears. The SELECT
TOOL window lists the tools not mounted in the magazine among the registered too data.

ME32125R1101500400002

ME32125R1101500400003

Inserting a registered tool

Select the tool data to be set to the pot from the tool data list in the SELECT TOOL screen and press
[F7] (OK).
The tool data selected in this window are set to the pot no. selected in the pot / tool correspondence
table.

[Supplement]

When the adjacent tool may interfere due to the tool diameter, set the tool data of the tool as a
large-diameter tool to the pot. A dummy tool is automatically set to the pots before and after the
pot with a large-diameter tool to avoid tool interference. In addition, large-diameter tools cannot
be set to the pot numbers of before and after the pot number to which the tool is set.
 6115-E P-201
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Inserting a dummy tool

After the SELECT TOOL screen is displayed, press [F1] (INSERT DUMMY). The dummy tool is set
to the pot no. selected in the pot / tool correspondence table.

Pot / tool correspondence table

ATC method
The ATC has the following two methods: memory random ATC and fixed address ATC.
In the memory random ATC method, the current tool mounted in the spindle is returned directly to
the pot in which the next tool that is to be mounted in the spindle. Thus the correspondence between
the tool number and the pot number will keep changing.
In the fixed address ATC method, the current tool mounted in the spindle is returned to the specified
pot. Thus the correspondence between the tool number and the pot number will not change.
For the multiple-magazine, it is required to set the fixed address ATC method onto each magazine.

Setting of the pot / tool correspondence table

There are two methods to set the tool numbers and pot numbers as described below.
(A) Create the initial correspondence table for the tool numbers and pot numbers to be used
in advance. Based on that initial table, set the correspondence between tool numbers and
pot numbers to the pot / tool correspondence table on the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet. Then
set each tool to the specified pot on the magazine side.
(B) Mount the tool to the spindle. Then set the tool to the specified pot in the manual tool
change cycle or to an empty pot that is selected automatically.
For the method in (A), refer to “2-1. Basic Operation with Tool Data Setting” in SECTION 2 TOOL
DATA SETTING in DATA OPERATION.
For the method in (B), refer to “3-3. ATC” in SECTION 3 MANUAL OPERATION in OPERATION.

[Supplement]

1) The pot numbers that can be set are from 1 to the number of magazine pots.
2) When a large-diameter tool is set to a pot, the dummy tool is set on the adjacent pot on the
both sides automatically.
3) When setting a large-diameter tool, an error occurs if a tool number has been set to either of
the adjacent pots, rejecting setting the tool.
4) The definition of large-diameter and small-diameter tools is defined on each machine
specification.
5) The definition of large-diameter and heavy tools is defined on each machine specification.

Note

If the setting of large-diameter tool and heavy tool is missed, it may lead to tool interference, fall of
tool, or ATC trouble. Enter the data correctly while referring to the ATC item in the instruction
manual of each machine.
 6115-E P-202
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Registering tool data

After the TOOL SELECTION window is displayed, the tool data can be newly registered.
When the TOOL SELECTION window is displayed, press [F2] (REGIST TOOL DATA) to display the
TOOLDATA EDIT window, which allows the tool data to be newly registered. For how to register the
tool data, refer to “2-2-1. REGIST TOOL DATA”.
The registered tool data will be added to the tool data list in the TOOL SELECTION window
immediately.

Searching for tool data

Tool data can be searched from the tool data list in the TOOL SELECTION window.
Press [F5] (SEARCH) to search for tool data. For the detail of searching method, refer to “2-2-4.
TOOL DATA SEARCH”.

[Supplement]

It is not possible to perform a current tool number search when searching tool data in the
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet.

Filtering tool data

The display kind of the tool data list in the TOOL SELECTION window can be changed.
Tool data can be filtered by pressing [F6] (FILTER). For the detail of filtering tool data, refer to “2-2-5.
TOOL DATA FILTER”.

Tool setting

The tool data can be set in a batch on the pot / tool correspondence table.
By pressing [F1] (TOOL-SET), all the tool data with the same number as the pot number are set.
The tool data with only the “tool no.” registered on the TOOL DATA sheet will be set.
In the following cases, the pot / tool correspondence table cannot be set in a batch.

 The tool data is set in the pot tool correspondence table

 The tool data is set in the ACT TOOL NO. and in the NXT TOOL NO.

 A tool data with the same number as the pot number is registered in the TOOL DATA sheet

The procedure to set the pot / tool correspondence table in a batch is as follows.

Procedure :

1 If the tool data is set on the pot / tool correspondence table or on the ACT TOOL NO. of the
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet, delete the tool data by pressing [F3] (DETACH TOOL. (Refer to “2-3-
4. DETACH TOOL”.)
Also, if a tool data with the same number as the pot number is registered in the TOOL DATA
sheet, delete the tool data by pressing [F3] (DELETE TOOLDATA). (Refer to “2-2-3. DELETE
TOOL DATA”.)

2 Move the cursor pot / tool correspondence table in the MAGAZINE INO. sheet.

3 Press [F1] (INSERT TOOL).

 6115-E P-203
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

4 By pressing the extension key and [F1] (TOOL-SET), the tool data is set in a batch in the pot /
tool correspondence table.

ME32125R1101500060001

2-3-2. EDIT TOOL DATA

It is possible to edit the tool data applied to the magazine.

ME32125R1101500470001

Locate the cursor to the tool data to be edited in the pot / tool correspondence table in the magazine
information data list (left half of the screen) in the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet, and press [F2] (EDIT
TOOLDATA).
Then the TOOLDATA EDIT window appears, and the tool data can be edited in the window.
For the detail of tool data edit, refer to “2-2-2. EDIT TOOL DATA”.

[Supplement]

The contents of the tool data edited in the TOOL DATA sheet are reflected to the tool data in the
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet and vice versa.

2-3-3. REGIST INSERT TOOL DATA

It is possible to register the tool data and insert the tool to the pot.

ME32125R1101500070001

When there is no tool at the cursor position on the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet, or if the dummy tool is
not set, [F2] displays “REGIST INSERT”. To input the tool data, display the TOOLDATA EDIT screen
by pressing [F2] (REGIST INSERT). For the detail of tool data edit, refer to “2-2-2. EDIT TOOL
DATA”. By pressing [F7] (OK), the tool data edit is completed, a new tool data is registered and
stored on the pot no.

[Supplement]

1) When there is a tool at the cursor position on the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet, [F2] displays “EDIT
TOOLDATA”.
2) When the tool of the pot no. which “REGIST INSERT TOOL DATA” is to be performed is a
dummy tool, and the tool attribution of the tool at the adjacent pot no. is large-diameter tool,
“8208 ERROR Can not clear tool No.” will occur and the tool cannot be inserted.
3) If [F2] (REGIST INSERT) is pressed while a program is being executed, or [F7] (OK) is
pressed on the TOOLDATA EDIT screen, error “5200 Main program executing 7” occurs.
 6115-E P-204
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-3-4. DETACH TOOL

It is possible to delete the tool data applied to the magazine from the pot / tool correspondence
table.

ME32125R1101500480001

Detaching a tool

Select the tool data (of the tool) to be detached from the pot / tool correspondence table in the
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet, and press [F3] (DETACH TOOL). Then the DETACH TOOL window
appears.

ME32125R1101500490001

By pressing [F6] (YES), the tool data are deleted from the pot / tool correspondence table.
If [F7] (NO) is pressed, the tool data will not be deleted from the pot / tool correspondence table.

[Supplement]

If the tool to be detached is a dummy tool, and the tool attribution of the tool at the adjacent pot
no. is large-diameter tool, “8208 ERROR Can not clear tool No.” will occur and the tool cannot be
detached.
 6115-E P-205
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Detaching two or more tools

When [F3] (DETACH TOOL) is pressed from the pot / tool correspondence table in the MAGAZINE
INFO. sheet, the following function keys are displayed.

ME32125R1101500500001

By pressing [F1] (SEL-TOOL DATA), the DETACH TOOL window appears.

ME32125R1101500500002

ME32125R1101500500003

Locate the cursor to the tool data of which tool is to be detached from the DETACH TOOL window,
check the mark by pressing [F1] (CHECK [+] [-]). If the cursor is located to the data already has the
check mark and [F1] (CHECK [+] [-]) is pressed, the check mark is removed.
Pressing [F2] (ALL ITEM ON/OFF) places or removes the check mark to and from all tool data
boxes.

After the check marks are placed onto the tool data to be detached, press [F7] (OK).

ME32125R1101500500004

When the confirmation window is displayed, press [F6] (YES). Then the selected tool data are
deleted from the pot / tool correspondence table.
If [F7] (NO) is pressed, the selected tool data will not be deleted from the pot / tool correspondence
table.
 6115-E P-206
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

[Supplement]

In the tool list displayed in the DETACH TOOL window, the SEARCH function and the FILTER
function can be used.
For the detail of SEARCH function, refer to “2-2-4. TOOL DATA SEARCH”. For the detail of
FILTER function, refer to “2-2-5. TOOL DATA FILTER”.

2-3-5. OPERATE TOOL

Using this key, the ATC operation can be performed.

ME32125R1101500510001

To perform OPERATE TOOL, set the operation mode to “manual operation mode”.
When [F4] (OPERATE TOOL) is pressed, the ATC FUNCTION window appears.

ME32125R1101500510002

ME32125R1101500510003

TOOL CHANGE

When [F1] (TOOL CHANGE) is pressed, the tool in TOOL NO. is set as the current tool.
When no tool is set in TOOL NO., set a tool in TOOL NO. by pressing any of the following keys: [F2]
(PROBE SELECT), [F3] (REF. TOOL SELECT), [F4] (TOOL NO. SELECT), and [F5] (CUR. TOOL
SELECT).
If tool change is not executed, check the display of the INTERLOCK CONDITION window in the
ATC FUNCTION window.

PROBE SELECT

By pressing function key [F2] (PROBE SELECT), the tool set for the probe at the RELATION
PARAM screen is set for the selected tool number.
When the tool to be set has not been registered to the magazine pot, “8207 ERROR Registered tool
none” will occur.
When the tool to be set has been mounted to the current tool, “8219 ERROR Cannot set the same
tool number as ACT TOOL.” will occur.
 6115-E P-207
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

REFERENCE TOOL SELECT

By pressing function key [F3] (REF. TOOL SELECT), the tool set for the reference tool at the
RELATION PARAM screen is set for the selected tool number.
When the tool to be set has not been registered to the magazine pot, “8207 ERROR Registered tool
none” will occur.
When the tool to be set has been mounted to the current tool, “8219 ERROR Can not set the same
tool number as ACT TOOL.” will occur.

TOOL NO. SELECT

When [F4] (TOOL NO. SELECT) is pressed, the following window appears.

ME32125R1101500190001

Enter a tool no. in the window shown above and press [F7] (OK). Then the input tool no. is set in
TOOL NO.
When the input tool no. has not been registered to the magazine pot, “8204 ERROR Nonregistered
tool” will occur.
When the input tool no. has been mounted to the current tool, “8219 ERROR Can not set the same
tool number as ACT TOOL.” will occur.

CURSOR TOOL SELECT

Locate the cursor to the tool to be set in TOOL NO. and press [F5] (CUR. TOOL SELECT) to set the
tool no. selected by the cursor in TOOL NO.
When the tool no. selected by the cursor has not been registered to the magazine pot, “8216
ERROR Set impossible” will occur.
When the tool no. selected by the cursor has not been mounted to the current tool, “8219 ERROR
Can not set the same tool number as ACT TOOL.” will occur.

TOOL RETURN

When [F1] (TOOL RETURN) is pressed, the current tool is returned to the pot (1-cycle start is
executed) by setting NXT TOOL NO. to NONE.
If tool return is not executed, check the display of the INTERLOCK CONDITION window in the ATC
FUNCTION window.

NEXT TOOL RETURN

When [F2] (NEX.TOOL RETURN) is pressed, the next tool is returned to the pot by performing
either return cycle start or next tool return cycle (M64). Which cycle operation is performed is
determined depending on the magazine specification.
If next tool return is not executed, check the display of the INTERLOCK CONDITION window in the
ATC FUNCTION window.
 6115-E P-208
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

PROBE ON

If the tool set for the probe number at the RELATION PARAM screen is set for the current tool, the
probe power turns ON by pressing function key [F3] (PROBE ON).

PROBE OFF

If the tool set for the probe number at the RELATION PARAM screen is set for the current tool, the
probe power turns OFF by pressing function key [F4] (PROBE OFF).

NEXT PAGE

When information over two or more pages is displayed in the INTERLOCK CONDITION window in
the ATC FUNCTION window, the page can be switched by pressing [F6] (NEXT PAGE).

MIN/MAX

When [F7] (MIN/MAX) is pressed with the ATC FUNCTION window displayed, the ATC FUNCTION
window is minimized.
When the ATC FUNCTION window is in a minimized state, the ATC FUNCTION window appears by
pressing [F7] (MIN/MAX).

CLOSE

The ATC FUNCTION window is closed by the CLOSE key.

[Supplement]

Refer to "2-2-9. Relation Parameters" for details on relation parameters.

 6115-E P-209
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-3-6. TOOL DATA SEARCH

It is possible to search the tool data in the pot / tool correspondence table according to the tool no.,
pot no., and current tool no.

ME32125R1101500520001

Locate the cursor to the magazine information data list (left half of the screen) in the MAGAZINE
INFO. sheet, and press [F5] (SEARCH). Then the TOOL DATA SEARCH window appears.

ME32125R1101500520002

For the detail of searching method, refer to “2-2-4. TOOL DATA SEARCH”.

[Supplement]

It is not possible to perform a current tool number search when searching tool data in the
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet.

2-3-7. SPINDLE/POT
Move the cursor between the tool data of the tool in the pot and in the spindle.

ME32125R1101500530001

When the cursor is selecting tool data of the tool in the pot, press [F7] (SPINDLE/POT). Then the
cursor will move to the tool data of the tool in the spindle.
When the cursor is selecting tool data of the tool in the spindle, press [F7] (SPINDLE/POT). Then
the cursor will move to the tool data of the tool in the pot.

2-3-8. Tool model nose position check (when the Collision Avoidance
System function is provided)
The interference check function in the Collision Avoidance System function cannot be performed
correctly if the sticking out amount of a tool model is not the same as the one of actual tool.
Therefore, the tool model nose position check function is provided to check tools registered in the
pot-tool correspondence table in the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet in the TOOL DATA screen by
comparing the sticking out amount of the tool model with the tool length offset value. If the sticking
out amount is not properly set, the tool number is indicated in yellow to notify the operator of the
cautionary state.
 6115-E P-210
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Tool model nose position check

In the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet in the TOOL DATA screen, locate the cursor to the pot-tool
correspondence table and then press the extension key to display [F1] (CHECK MODEL).
When [F1] (CHECK MODEL) is pressed, tools registered in the actual and next tool data and in the
pot-tool correspondence table are checked by comparing the sticking out amount of the tool model
with the tool length offset value. If the sticking out amount is not properly set, the tool number is
indicated in yellow to notify the operator of the cautionary state. Moreover, when the cursor is
located at a tool with which sticking out amount of tool model is not properly set, message “Tool
length offset differs from sticking out of Modeling” appears in the message column under the pot-tool
correspondence table.
Indication of tool number in yellow is cleared by pressing [F1] (CHECK MODEL) after setting the
sticking out amount of the tool model correctly.

Fig. Example of display after tool model nose check

(tool numbers 5, 7, 11, and 16 are not properly set.)
ME32125R1101500280001

[Supplement]

 When a new tool is mounted, the tool number is indicated in yellow even if the sticking out
amount of the tool model has been properly set. After mounting a tool, check the tool sticking
out amount by pressing [F1] (CHECK MODEL).
 For the details of how to set sticking out amount of tool model, refer to “OSP-P300M Collision
Avoidance System – Basic Edition/Tutorial – Operation Manual”.
 6115-E P-211
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Relation Parameters

Parameters used in the tool model nose position check function can be set in “relevant parameter” in
the TOOL DATA screen.
For the details of relevant parameters, refer to “2-2-9. Relation Parameters”.
The parameters used in the tool model nose position check function are as follows.

NO Parameter name Description

3 Tool length offset method Set “absolute” and “relative” when a tool length offset value
is an absolute value from the spindle end and when a
relative value from the reference tool, respectively.
4 Reference tool length Set a reference tool length when NO3 “tool length offset
method” is ”relative”.
5 Permission amount for tool Set a permissible value of the difference between a tool
sticking out sticking out amount and a tool length offset value for tool
model.
 6115-E P-212
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-4. Options in the TOOL DATA SETTING window

Information in the TOOL DATA SETTING window may be changed from the contents described in
this section depending on the option setting.
The sheet may be added, the function keys may be added, or the displayed items in the MAGAZINE
INFO. and TOOL DATA sheet may be added.
For the detail of additional optional items, refer to the instruction manual of each optional item.
 6115-E P-213
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-5. TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION

Three sets of tool length offset (HA/HB/HC) and tool radius compensation (DA/DB/DC) are provided
to each tool. They can be set in the TOOL OFFSET sheet on the TOOL DATA EDIT screen. In
addition to that, 999 sets of tool length offset (H1 to H999) and tool radius compensation (D1 to
D999) can be set.

[Supplement]

When the tool number is between 1 and 999, HA takes the offset amount of the same offset
number as the tool number.
Example)
When the tool number is “50”, HA refers to the offset amount of H50.

ME32125R1101500020001

Fig.2-1 TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION Screen

The TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION screen displays the tool length offset data and cutter radius
compensation data setting table and the actual position data of the selected tool.
The function menu displayed on the TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION screen contains the
following six items.

SET Sets the input value directly as the tool offset data.
ADD Sets the tool offset data by adding the input value to the existing data.
Determines the tool offset data based on the calculation made for the input
CAL data.
(This can be used only when inputting the tool length offset data.)
FIND Searches for the tool offset number.
DATA IN/OUT Inputs, outputs, or verifies the data.
DISPLAY
Displays the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window.
CHANGE

The setting procedure of 999 sets of tool length offset and tool radius compensation is described
below.
 6115-E P-214
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

Procedure :

1 Press the (TOOL DATA) mode selection key.

The indicating lamp in the upper corner of the key lights and the tool
data setting mode is established.
ME32125R1101500020002
Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the TOOL OFFSET/
COMPENSATION screen.
The presently selected tool offset data is displayed in yellow in the setting table.

[Supplement]

If, last time the tool data setting mode was active, another mode was selected while a
screen other than the TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION screen such as TOOL DATA
screen was displayed, the operation above will redisplay the screen for that mode.

2 Select the tool offset number for which the offset data should be set.
Each screen page displays 20 sets each of tool length offset data and cutter radius
compensation data.
To display the 21st and later sets, use the page keys. When a page key is pressed, two setting
tables scroll right or left in a pair.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired offset data in the displayed screen page.

3 Using [F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), or [F3] (CAL) in the function menu, input the tool length offset or
cutter radius compensation data.
When a numerical value is input after selecting a menu item, the value is displayed in the buffer
field.

a. When the tool offset data is already known

Select [F1] (SET) from the function menu and input the tool offset data.

b. To obtain the tool offset data by adding to or subtracting from the axis
Select [F2] (ADD) and input the amount to be added or subtracted from the current setting.

c. To input the tool length offset data by manually gauging the tool length offset data for the
tool presently mounted in the spindle
To set the tool offset data using this method, it is necessary to set the zero point for the tool
axis.
After that mount a tool in the spindle and manually contact the tool tip to the reference
plane.
Select [F3] (CAL) from the function menu and enter “0”. (Note that [F3] (CAL) may be used
only for setting the tool length offset data.)

4 Press the (WRITE) key.

The data in the selected input area of the setting table is changed in accordance with the
function selected in step 3 (SET, ADD, or CAL).
 6115-E P-215
SECTION 2 TOOL DATA SETTING

2-5-1. Other Operations

Data Input/Output Operation

This NC has the data input/output function for transferring and entering various parameters. The
data input/output function of this NC unit is used to transfer the tool data and various parameter data
set in the NC unit to the internal memory or USB flash drive, or used to enter the previously saved
parameters in the NC unit. This function allows you to easily re-produce the previous machining
conditions when performing the previous machining again. For details, refer to SECTION 4
“PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION”.
 6115-E P-216
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-1. Types of Parameter

The NC parameters are classified into the types listed below. Each type of parameter has its own
setting screen.

 ZERO

 Common variables

 User parameter

 G/M code macro

 System parameters

 Home position

 Home position movement order

 Spindle parameter

 Machine axis parameters

 Pitch error compensation

 NC optional parameters (various types)

 NC optional parameters (long word, word, bit)

 Rotary axis parameter

Refer to ADDITIONAL AXIS (ROTARY AXIS) in SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MANUAL.

 Tapping torque monitor parameter

Refer to SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING/TORQUE MONITORING FUNCTION in SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS MANUAL.

 Hi-cut pro control parameter

Refer to Hi-CUT Pro in SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MANUAL.

 Spindle load monitor parameter

Refer to SIMPLIFIED LOAD MONITOR FUNCTION in SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MANUAL.

 Machine user parameters

 Machine system parameters

[Supplement]

The available parameter types depend on the machine specifications.

 6115-E P-217
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-2. Basic Parameter Setting Operations

3-2-1. Parameter Setting Screens

Parameters are set on the relevant PARAMETER setting screen, which can be displayed after
pressing the P (PARAMETER) mode selection key to establish the parameter setting mode.
To display the PARAMETER screen, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Press the P (PARAMETER) mode selection key.

P
The indicating lamp at the upper of the key is lit and the parameter
setting mode is established.
ME32125R1101600020001

[Supplement]

The screen displayed is the same as displayed last time the parameter setting mode was
established. Immediately after the power is turned on, the screen at the topmost position in
the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window (described later) is displayed.

2 Select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window.

ME32125R1101600020002

Fig.3-1 DISPLAY CHANGE Pop-up Window

3 Select the desired parameter setting screen from the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window by
using the page keys or the up/down cursor keys.

4 Select [F8] (CLOSE) in the pop-up function menu of the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window.
The DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window closes and the selected parameter setting screen is
displayed.
 6115-E P-218
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-2-2. Setting Parameters

Selecting the Input Field

Input fields for specific parameters can be selected by the following methods.

Selection using the cursor keys

Pressing the up/down/left/right cursor keys shifts the focus of input area selection up, down, left, and
right.
If, when making parameter settings in a setting table, the required input area is not currently
displayed, scroll the setting table by holding down a cursor key.

Selection using the page keys

If, when making parameter settings in a setting table, some input areas are not currently displayed,
the setting table can be scrolled in page units by pressing the PAGE keys.
In cases where the parameter screen for one item comprises multiple pages (for example, machine
user parameters), the page keys can also be used to move between the individual pages.

Selection using function menu [F4] (FIND)

In cases where there are many parameter setting items (for example with common variables and
optional parameters (long word, word, bit)), [F4] FIND is displayed at the function menu. After
selecting this menu, set the desired data number (or bit number in the case of bit designation), the
cursor is located at the data input area for the specified number.
 6115-E P-219
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Inputting and Setting Parameters

There are two methods for inputting and setting parameters: the selection method and the numerical
value input method.

Selection method

Selection using MENU in the function menu

The function menu [F1] (MENU) can be used to select the desired item from a number of
possibilities.
Selecting [F1] (MENU) displays a pop-up function menu in which the selection possibilities are
assigned to the function keys. Pressing the function key corresponding to the desired item selects
and decides the input of the selection, after which the pop-up function menu closes.

ME32125R1101600050001

Fig.3-2 Selection from the Function Menu

[Supplement]

In addition to the method of setting parameter data using the function keys, there is another
parameter setting method where the asterisk (*) key, numeral keys, and the [WRITE] key are
used.
1) “*” key input
Displays the same pop-up function menu as displayed when [F1] is selected.
2) Numeral key input
You may press a numeral key and then the [WRITE] key instead of selecting a function key
from between [F1] and [F8] in the pop-up function menu. For example, enter “1” for selecting
[F1], 2 for [F2] and 3 for [F3].
 6115-E P-220
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Selection using the “check mark” in the function menu

For parameter settings that are made by assigning or not assigning a check mark (for example, bit
settings), use the “check mark” item at the [F1] position in the function menu.
On selecting the [F1] (check mark), a pop-up function menu is displayed and check mark present
and absent items are assigned to the function menu. When the check mark “present” or “absent”
item is selected from the function menu, this input is confirmed and the pop-up function menu
closes.
The [check mark] menu item is only displayed at [F1] when the cursor is located at an input area
where the setting is determined by the presence or absence of a check mark.

ME32125R1101600050002

Fig.3-3 Setting with a Check Mark

[Supplement]

In addition to the method of setting parameter data using the function keys, there is another
parameter setting method where the asterisk (*) key, numeral keys, and the [WRITE] key are
used.
1) “*” key input
Displays the same pop-up function menu as displayed when [F1] is selected.
2) Numeral key input
You may press a numeral key and then the [WRITE] key instead of selecting a function key
from between [F1] and [F8] in the pop-up function menu. For example, enter “1” for selecting
[F1], 2 for [F2] and 3 for [F3].

Inputting Numerical Values

For parameter settings that require input of numerical values, use [F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), and [F3]
(CAL); these function menu items are displayed whenever they are needed.
The functions of these items are as follows.

Sets the input value (value displayed in the input buffer) directly as a parameter
[F1] (SET)
value.
Adds the input value (value displayed in the input buffer) to the value currently
[F2] (ADD)
set and sets the result as the new parameter value.
Generates a new parameter value by calculation based on the input value
[F3] (CAL)
(value displayed in the input buffer) and internal data.
 6115-E P-221
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-2-3. Other Operations

Parameters that Become Valid on Turning the Power ON

Some parameters, if setting is changed, require the power to the NC to be turned off once and then
back on so that the new setting is made valid. If the setting is changed for these parameters, a
message “4217 Alarm D Power ON effective parameter set” is displayed at the alarm line in the
display screen.
After changing the setting for these parameters, turn off the power to the NC and turn it back on.

Selecting the Parameter Screen Display

Since there are many parameter setting screens, it is not always possible to select the required one
from the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window quickly. If this is a problem, it is possible to designate
the parameter setting screens to be displayed in the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window as
required.
To change the menu displayed in the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window, proceed as follows.

Procedure :

1 Select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) from the function menu to display the DISPLAY CHANGE
pop-up window.

2 Select [F1] (MENU CHANGE) from the function menu to display the MENU CHANGE pop-up
window (if MENU CHANGE is not displayed, press the [Extend] key).
The MENU CHANGE pop-up window is displayed when [F1] (MENU CHANGE) is selected.

ME32125R1101600080001

Fig.3-4 MENU CHANGE Pop-up Window

3 Use the page keys or up/down cursor keys to select the parameter setting screen to be
displayed in, or deleted from, the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window.
 6115-E P-222
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

4 Selecting the [F1] (check mark) from the pop-up function menu for the MENU CHANGE pop-up
window alternately turns the check mark display on and off.
When a check mark is entered in the check box for ALL DISPLAY, all of the parameter setting
screen titles are displayed in the DISPLAY CHANGE pop-up window.

5 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu of the MENU CHANGE pop-up window. The
MENU CHANGE pop-up window closes and the display on/off settings are terminated.

Data Input/Output Operation

This NC has the data input/output function for transferring and entering various parameters. This
data input/output function is used to transfer the tool data and various parameter data set in the NC
unit to the internal memory or USB flash drive, or used to enter the previously saved parameters in
the NC unit. This function allows you to easily re-produce the previous machining conditions when
performing the previous machining again. For details, refer to SECTION 4 “PARAMETER I/O
FUNCTION”.
 6115-E P-223
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-3. Setting the Parameters

3-3-1. General Parameters

Work Coordinate System Zero Point

The zero point of a work coordinate system indicates the origin of a work coordinate system
referenced to the zero point of the machine coordinate system.
20 sets of a work coordinate system can be set for the standard specifications of the NC and this
number can be expanded to 50, 100, 200 or 400 sets.

Basic Procedure for Setting Zero Offset Data

To set the zero offset data of a work coordinate system, display the PROGRAM ZERO screen.
To display the PROGRAM ZERO screen, press the “parameter setting” key form the mode selection
keys, and then press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to select ZERO. If ZERO is not
shown when [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) is pressed, press the Extension key after pressing [F8]
(DISPLAY CHANGE), and then press [F1] (MENU CHANGE). Check the box for ZERO in the
MENU CHANGE pop-up widow, and press [F7] (OK).

ME32125R1101600980001

Fig.3-5 PROGRAM ZERO Screen

The PROGRAM ZERO screen shows the zero offset data (set table), which indicate the distance to
a work coordinate system zero point from the machine coordinate system zero point, and also the
actual position data in the presently selected work coordinate system and the remaining distance to
the target point.
 6115-E P-224
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

The function menu displayed on the PROGRAM ZERO screen contains the following five items:

SET Sets the input value directly as the zero offset data.
ADD Sets the zero offset data by adding the input value to the existing data.
Determines the zero offset data so that the input value is taken as the
CAL
actual position data.
FIND Searches for the zero offset number.
DATA IN/OUT Inputs, Outputs, or verifies the data.

The basic procedure for zero offset setting (setting the origin of a work coordinate system) is as
follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the “parameter setting” key from the mode selection keys.
The lamp on the “parameter setting” key lights up and the parameter setting mode is
established. The PROGRAM ZERO screen (Fig.3-5) is displayed.
The data of the currently selected work coordinate system is displayed in yellow in the setting
table.

2 Select the zero offset number and the axis for which the zero offset data should be set.
One screen displays the ten sets of zero offset data.
Use the page keys to display the 11th zero offset data an on.
To select the desired offset number and the axis on the screen, use the cursor keys.

3 Input the zero offset data using [F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), and [F3] (CAL).
After selecting a function menu, input a value and the input value is displayed in the buffer field.

a. When the zero offset data are already known

Select [F1] (SET) from the function menu and input the zero offset data.

b. When shifting the zero point from the existing point

Select [F2] (ADD) from the function menu and input the zero point shift distance.

c. When setting the actual position as the zero point of a new work coordinate system, select
[F3] (CAL) from the function menu and enter “0”.

4 Press the (WRITE) key.

The data in the selected input area of the set table is changed in accordance with the function
selected in step 3 (SET, ADD, or CAL).

[Supplement]

A local coordinate system is used only in programming.

The zero offset can be set on the WK. SETUP sheet on the RUN screen. For the detail, refer to
“WORK ZERO display window” in 6-1-2. in SECTION 6 NC OPERATION PANEL/SCREEN
DISPLAY in OPERATION.
 6115-E P-225
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Common Variables

In the standard specification there are 200 common variables numbered VC1 to VC200. Optionally,
the number can be increased up to 1000.
The applications of the variables can be determined without restriction, and independently of the
system.

[Supplement]

Common variables are stored as floating decimal point values. This means that if a decimal
fraction is set, the setting may differ from that intended.

User Parameter

The initial settings and setting ranges for each of the entries on this screen are as follows.

P PROGRAM LIMIT (WORK)

Sets the soft-limit (software-controlled travel end limit) in the positive direction. The user can set the
desired value for this parameter. The set value is displayed in the work coordinate system, and
becomes valid in the G22 mode.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

N PROGRAM LIMIT (WORK)

Sets the soft-limit (software-controlled travel end limit) in the negative direction. The user can set the
desired value for this parameter. The set value is displayed in the work coordinate system, and
becomes valid in the G22 mode.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

P PROGRAM LIMIT (MACHINE)

Sets the soft-limit (software-controlled travel end limit) in the positive direction. The user can set the
desired value for this parameter. The set value is displayed in the machine coordinate system, and
becomes valid in the G22 mode.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification
 6115-E P-226
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

N PROGRAM LIMIT (MACHINE)

Sets the soft-limit (software-controlled travel end limit) in the negative direction. The user can set the
desired value for this parameter. The set value is displayed in the machine coordinate system. Valid
in the G22 mode.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

G60 OVERRUN AMOUNT

Sets the distance an axis moves beyond the target point in the uni-directional positioning operation.
The direction of positioning is set for “POSITIONING DIRECTION” at the NC OPTIONAL
PARAMETER - UNI-DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING screen.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0 to 30.000 Selected unit system
specification

BACKLASH COMPENSATION
Sets the backlash compensation amount for the individual axes.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0 -1.000 to +1.000 Selected unit system

CLAMP IN POSITION
Sets the clamp in-position width. If “0” is set for this parameter, the clamp in-position check is not
executed.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0 0 to 1.000 Selected unit system

[Supplement]

The P (N) PROGRAM LIMIT (WORK) and the P (N) PROGRAM LIMIT (MACHINE) display the
position data of the same limit position in different coordinate systems (work coordinate system
and machine coordinate system). Therefore, if the travel limit data of either of coordinate systems
is changed, the data of the other coordinate system is changed accordingly. Similarly, if the travel
limit data is set in a program using G22, both of the parameter data are changed.

G/M Code Macro

Program names used for G code macro (G100 to G120) and M code macro (M201 to M210) are set
at this screen.

[Supplement]

An alarm occurs if a program name of OO000 to OO999 is set. OO000 to OO999 are used as a
program name for a maker subprogram and the users are not allowed to use them.
 6115-E P-227
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

System Parameters

The SYSTEM PARAMETER screen displays the following parameters.

For system parameters, values specific to the individual machines are set by the machine tool
manufacturer. Due to the nature of the parameters, it is not necessary to change the setting for
system parameters at the user. If it becomes necessary to change the setting for a system
parameter, consult the machine tool manufacturer and change the setting only under the
supervision of the machine tool manufacturer.

P TRAVEL LIMIT
Sets the positive direction travel end limit in the machine coordinate system.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

[Supplement]

When the rotary table is operated using the multi-turn function (ROTARY AXIS PARAMETER),
this parameter value is fixed to 9720.0000. When the multi-turn function is deactivated, the fixed
value returns to the previous value.

N TRAVEL LIMIT
Sets the negative direction travel end limit in the machine coordinate system.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

[Supplement]

When the rotary table is operated using the multi-turn function (ROTARY AXIS PARAMETER),
this parameter value is fixed to -9720.0000. When the multi-turn function is deactivated, the fixed
value returns to the previous value.
 6115-E P-228
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

Sets the range where ball screw pitch errors are compensated for. This setting is made in the
machine coordinate system in both the positive (P) and negative (N) directions to define the
boundary of the range.
Normally, the values are set to define the range that is equal to the axis travel range.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

[Supplement]

If a boundary value (P and/or N PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION) for defining the pitch error
compensation range is set inside the axis travel range (P and N TRAVEL LIMIT), the
compensation value valid at the boundary is used to compensate for axis movement commands
in the range from the boundary to the travel end.

TRAVEL LIMIT TRAVEL LIMIT

N P
Pitch error
compensation range

Boundary setting value (N) Boundary setting value (P)

Within this range, the pitch error Within this range, the pitch error
compensation value valid at the compensation value valid at the
boundary in the negative direction boundary in the positive direction
is used. is used.
ME32125R1101600130001

IN-POSITION WIDTH
Sets the value used for checking the in-position status of an axis for the execution of exact stop
control.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0.003 0 to 1.000 Selected unit system

ZERO OFFSET (MACHINE)

Sets the zero offset data to define the machine zero point of the individual axes.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0 to 99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

IN-POSITION (HOME POSITION)

Sets the in-position width used for checking the in-position status of the individual axes in positioning
at the home position.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0.02 0 to 1.000 Selected unit system
 6115-E P-229
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SWL HD POSITION (FRONT)

Sets the front position of the horizontal spindle in reference to the vertical spindle position of the
MCM-B spindlehead.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

X=400 mm, Y=-150 mm,
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
Z=-330 mm

SWL HD POSITION (LEFT)

Sets the left position of the horizontal spindle in reference to the vertical spindle position of the
MCM-B spindlehead.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

X=-150 mm, Y=-400 mm,
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
Z=-330 mm

SWL HD POSITION (REAR)

Sets the rear position of the horizontal spindle in reference to the vertical spindle position of the
MCM-B spindlehead.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

X=-400 mm, Y=150 mm,
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
Z=-330 mm

SWL HD POSITION (RIGHT)

Sets the right position of the horizontal spindle in reference to the vertical spindle position of the
MCM-B spindlehead.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

X=150 mm, Y=400 mm,
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
Z=-330 mm

BARRIER (Y, Z)
On horizontal machining centers, if both of the Y- and Z-axis enter a certain area at the same time, it
will cause interference. To prevent this, a barrier is set so that an alarm occurs to halt axis
movements if both of the Y- and Z-axis are going to exist in the barrier zone at the same time. The
BARRIER parameters define this barrier zone. The setting is valid only for the Y- and Z-axis.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0 -99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system

PIVOT DISTANCE
Sets the displacement between the center of a rotary axis and the machine zero of the linear axis.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0 -99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
 6115-E P-230
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

ENCODER OFFSET
Sets the amount for offsetting the zero-cross point of the position encoder.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

-999999.999 to
0 Selected unit system
+999999.999

P TRAVEL LIMIT 2
Sets the second travel limit in the positive direction in the machine coordinate system.
(This setting can be used when the second travel limit is valid.)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

N TRAVEL LIMIT 2
Sets the second travel limit in the negative direction in the machine coordinate system.
(This setting can be used when the second travel limit is valid.)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

INDUCTOSYN OFFSET
Sets the offset data of the Inductosyn to match the phase of the Inductosyn to the phase of the
absolute position encoder.
The setting is disregarded if the machine is not equipped wit the Inductosyn.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-81920 to 49152 —
specification and the axis

P INDUCTOSYN RANGE
Sets the effective range of the Inductosyn in the positive direction of a linear axis. The setting is
made in the machine coordinate system.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

-999999.999 to
0 Selected unit system
+999999.999
 6115-E P-231
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

N INDUCTOSYN RANGE
Sets the effective range of the Inductosyn in the negative direction of a linear axis. The setting is
made in the machine coordinate system.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

-999999.999 to
0 Selected unit system
+999999.999

[Supplement]

With the Inductosyn specification machines, axis movement is usually controlled with the
Inductosyn valid over the entire Inductosyn operating range. In this case, it is not necessary to set
the Inductosyn range and “0” should be set for both P INDUCTOSYN RANGE and N
INDUCTOSYN RANGE. If the range is set, however, axis movement can be controlled using the
Inductosyn within the set range and without the Inductosyn outside the set range.
 Set the data for INDUCTOSYN OFFSET and ZERO OFFSET (MACHINE) after making the
Inductosyn valid.
 When setting the data for INDUCTOSYN RANGE, determine the values so that the
Inductosyn range may be set more than 20 mm (0.79 in.) (varies according to the maximum
feedrate of an axis) inside the actual Inductosyn scale effective range.
 At areas in the vicinity of the Inductosyn range limits, control of axis movements is somewhat
discontinuous since valid / invalid status of the Inductosyn is switched. A home position should
not be set near the Inductosyn range limits.
 Set the normal cutting range within the Inductosyn range.
 The Inductosyn is always valid if data is set for INDUCTOSYN RANGE parameters in the
manner as indicated below.
[P INDUCTOSYN RANGE] ≤ [N INDUCTOSYN RANGE]
 Back up the Inductosyn range data after setting them.
<Positional Relationships>

N Machine operating range P

Inductosyn scale sensing range

: 20 mm (0.79 in.) or more

Inductosyn effective range

Inductosyn N limit Inductosyn P limit

Cutting range
ME32125R1101600130002
 6115-E P-232
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

PITCH COMP SPAN [1/1000 mm]

Sets an interval between points where pitch error compensation data are set.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0 to 65535 Selected unit system
specification and the axis

NUMBER OF PITCH POINTS

Sets the total number of points where pitch error compensation data are set for the individual axes.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0 to 384 —
specification and the axis

[Supplement]

If the product of the pitch error compensation span and the number of pitch points is smaller than
the pitch error compensation range defined by the P PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION and N
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION, the pitch error compensation data are not set in the range
from the point defined by the product of them to the point defined by the P PITCH ERROR
COMPENSATION, which could cause pitch error alarm. Therefore, the pitch error compensation
data must be set so that the following condition is satisfied.
(P PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION) – (N PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION) ≤ (PITCH COMP
SPAN) × (SET NUMBER OF PITCH POINTS)

N PITCH ERROR P PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION Machine operating range COMPENSATION

(PITCH COMP SPAN) × (SET NUMBER OF PITCH POINTS)

Pitch error compensation not valid

ME32125R1101600130003
 6115-E P-233
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Home Position

The HOME POSITION screen displays the following parameters.

HOME POSITION
When G30 is specified or if a home position return command is given externally, the specified axis
returns to the home position. The HOME POSITION parameters set the coordinate values of the
respective home positions.

 Home position can be set for the individual axes in the machine coordinate system.

 32 sets of home position (1 to 32) are provided.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification.

Home Position Movement Order

The HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER screen displays the following parameters.

HOME POSITION 1
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 1.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

[Supplement]

If “0” is set, the corresponding axis does not move. This also applies to the setting for parameters
HOME POSITION 2 to HOME POSITION 10.

HOME POSITION 2
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 2.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

HOME POSITION 3
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 3.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.
 6115-E P-234
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

HOME POSITION 4
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 4.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

HOME POSITION 5
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 5.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

HOME POSITION 6
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 6.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

HOME POSITION 7
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 7.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

HOME POSITION 8
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 8.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

HOME POSITION 9
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 9.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.
 6115-E P-235
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

HOME POSITION 10
Sets the order in which the axes move to home position 10.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the
0 to 3
machine specification.

Setting
0:No axis movement
1:The axis moving first
2:The axis moving second
3:The axis moving third

[Supplement]

When setting the order of axis movements for home position return, setting must be made in
order beginning with “1”. If the numbers are not sequential by skipping a number, the axis
assigned a number that follows a skipped number does not move.

Example: HOME POSITION 1 XYZ

103
In this case, the Z-axis does not move.
ME32125R1101600150001

The information above also applies to HOME POSITION 11 to HOME POSITION 32.

Spindle Parameter

SPINDLE ORIENT ZERO OFFSET

Sets the offset data for spindle orientation.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

0 0 to 359999 0.001 deg

SPINDLE INDEX POSITION CHECK RANGE

Sets the angular range where the spindle must remain after spindle orientation. If the range is
exceeded, an alarm occurs.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

15000 0 to 20000 0.001 deg
 6115-E P-236
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Machine Axis Data

P TRAVEL LIMIT
Sets the positive direction travel end limit in the machine coordinate system.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

N TRAVEL LIMIT
Sets the negative direction travel end limit in the machine coordinate system.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

IN-POSITION
Sets the value used for checking the in-position status of an axis.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0.000 to 10.000 Selected unit system
specification

CLAMP
Sets the value used for checking the positioning clamp width.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0.000 to 10.000 Selected unit system
specification

ZERO OFFSET
Sets the distance from the zero point of a position encoder to the zero point of control.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0.000 to 99999.999 Selected unit system
specification

ENCODER OFFSET
Sets the amount for offsetting the zero-cross point of the position encoder.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification.
 6115-E P-237
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

BACKLASH
Sets the backlash compensation amount.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification.

OVERRUN AMT.
Sets the distance an axis moves beyond the target point in the uni-directional positioning.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
0.000 to 99999.999 Selected unit system
specification.

OFFSET n
Sets universal data to be used for the individual axes.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specification.
 6115-E P-238
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Pitch Error Compensation

Ball screws have their own pitch-to-pitch errors. Pitch error compensation data are set to
compensate for such errors.

Continuous setting of pitch error compensation data

Select [F5] (SERIES SET) from the function menu to display the SERIES SET pop-up window
where you can set the number of data entries at COUNT DATA and compensation amount at
ADJUST. After entering the data for these items, select [F7] (OK) and the set compensation value is
repeatedly entered to the specified number of offset point numbers beginning with the presently
selected offset point number.

 The pitch error compensation data can be set for up to 384 points for one axis and, for all axes,
the setting is possible for a total of 2304 points.

 Before setting the pitch error compensation data, setting is required for the following
parameters at the PREPARE SET pop-up window that can be opened by selecting [F6]
(PREPARE SET) from the function menu.

(1) Set data at P PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION and N PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION.
This determines the range where pitch error compensation data are set.

(2) Set data at PITCH COMP SPAN.

This determines the interval between pitch error compensation data setting point

(3) Set data at PITCH POINT.

The pitch error compensation data can be set for up to 384 points in one axis. Set the number of
pitch error compensation data setting points for each axis.
Setting is made in the order of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th, and 6th axes.

(4) Turn off the power and turn it on again.

[Supplement]

For setting the pitch error compensation data, take the following points into consideration.
 For No. 1 on each axis, “0” should be set.
 Pitch variation between adjoining two points must be smaller than 16383 μm (655320 μin).
 If the value of “(number of points) × (pitch error compensation interval)” is very close to the
axis travel, it is recommended to set the data for more points.
 6115-E P-239
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-3-2. NC Optional Parameters

NC optional parameter consists of three types depending on the data length. They are NC optional
parameter (long word), NC optional parameter (word), and NC optional parameter (bit). To facilitate
setting and checking the parameters, the parameters provided for the same use or function are
arranged on the same screen disregarding of the type.
They are simply referred to as NC optional parameter.

 Input unit system

 Uni-directional positioning

 Fixed cycle

 Cutter radius compensation

 Circular interpolation

 Auto set at NC reset and power ON

 Geometry enlargement/reduction

 Axis command cancel

 Tape puncher interface

 READ/WRITE GET/PUT

 Synchronized tapping

 Operating related parameters

 Display related parameter

 Mirror image

 Area machining
 6115-E P-240
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Input Unit System

The INPUT UNIT SYSTEM screen displays the following parameters.

LENGTH UNIT SYSTEM

Sets the unit system of length by selecting from “mm” and “inch” (optional).

Initial Setting Value mm

REAL NUMBER
Sets whether or not the decimal point position, if a decimal point is entered with a numeric value, will
be “1 mm”, “1 inch”, “1 deg.”, or “1 sec”.
(PART PROGRAM UNIT)

Conforms to the
Initial Setting Value
settings below.

LENGTH
When the length unit is set, the other units are automatically set accordingly, for example, 1 deg and
1 sec are set by setting 1 mm as the length unit.
Sets the unit of length data - 0.01 mm or 0.001 mm.

Initial Setting Value 0.001 mm

ANGLE
Sets the unit of angle data - 0.001 deg. or 0.0001 deg.

Initial Setting Value 0.001 deg.

FEEDRATE
Sets the unit of feedrate data - 0.1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min) or 1 mm/min (0.1 inch/min).

1 mm/min
Initial Setting Value
(0.1 inch/min)

FEEDRATE
Sets the unit of feedrate data - 0.001 mm/rev (0.0001 inch/rev) or 0.01 mm/rev (0.001 inch/rev).

0.01 mm/rev
Initial Setting Value
(0.001 inch/rev)

DWELL TIME
Sets the unit of time data - 0.1 sec or 0.01 sec or 0.001 sec.

Initial Setting Value 0.1 sec

 6115-E P-241
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

ROUND. FIX. FUP CONVERT

Sets whether the result of operation (conversion into integer; ROUND, FIX, FUP) is set with a
decimal point or in integer when it is assigned to an address character.

Initial Setting Value INTEGER

Uni-directional Positioning

The UNI-DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING screen displays the following parameters.

G60 OVERRUN AMOUNT

Sets the distance an axis overruns the target point when positioning is executed in the uni-
directional positioning mode.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range Setting Unit

1.000 0 to 30.000 Selected unit system

POSITIONING DIRECTION
If positioning is executed, an axis overruns the target point by the set distance before it is positioned
to the target point. The direction in which the axis moves to be positioned to the target point may be
set for the individual axes. If “-” (negative direction) is set, for example, positioning being made in the
negative direction does not cause overrun but the axis is directly positioned to the target point.
When a positioning command that moves an axis in the “+” (positive) direction is executed in the
same setting, it causes the axis to overrun the target point and positioning is made in the negative
direction.

Initial Setting Value + (positive direction)

 6115-E P-242
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Fixed Cycle

The FIXED CYCLE screen displays the following parameters.

RETRACTION IN G73 CYCLE (HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE) OR G83 CYCLE (DEEP

HOLE) WITH I, J COMMAND
Sets the value of “d” in the illustration below for a G73 cycle.
In the G73 cycle, a cycle axis is fed into a workpiece by “Q” in the first cutting-in operation. After that
a cycle of axis retraction by “d” and succeeding cutting-in by “Q + d” is repeated.
Return point level

R
Q d

Q d

Q
Z
ME32125R1101600220001

The value set for this parameter also applies to “d2” in the illustration below for G83 cycle.
In the G83 cycle, cut-in depth and tool extraction depth are set to control cycle axis operation. In the
first cutting-in operation, the cycle axis is fed into a workpiece by the cut-in depth set for “I”. Next, the
cycle axis is retracted by “d2” and then fed into the workpiece by “I + d2”. This retraction and cut-in
cycle is repeated until the machined depth reaches the tool extraction depth set for “J”.

Return point level

Z point
I d2
J
d1

R point
ME32125R1101600220002

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

500 0 to 10000
 6115-E P-243
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

RETRACTION POSITIONING FROM LEVEL “R” TO WORK IN G83 CYCLE (DEEP

HOLE)
Sets the value of “d” in the illustration below for G83 cycle.
In the first cutting-in operation in the G83 cycle, the cycle axis is fed into a workpiece by the cut-in
depth set for “Q”. Next, the cycle axis is retracted to point R level in rapid feed and then fed into the
workpiece, at a rapid feedrate, to a point “d” above the level reached in the previous cutting
operation. After that the cycle axis is fed by “Q + d”. This retraction, rapid approach and cut-in cycle
is repeated.
R Return point level

Q d

Q d

Q d

Q
Z
ME32125R1101600220003

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

1000 0 to 10000

RETRACTION FOR G76/G87 (FINE BORING/BACK BORING) BEFORE OPERATION

Sets the value of “d” in the illustration below for G76 and G87 cycle.
In the G76/G87 cycle, a cycle axis is fed into a workpiece as much as to the point Z level, dwells at
this level for P seconds, and retracts upward by “d”. At this level, the cycle axis shifts by “Q” in the
direction opposite to the tool tip position.

Return point level

d
Z

Q
ME32125R1101600220004

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

500 0 to 1000

SINGLE BLOCK STOP AT POINT R LEVEL

Sets if single block stop at the point R level is valid for the execution of a fixed cycle.

Initial Setting Value DOES (valid)

 6115-E P-244
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

CYCLE AXIS
For the execution of a fixed cycle, the axis not included in the designated plane is defined as a cycle
axis.
The parameter sets whether or not the cycle axis is fixed at the Z-axis.

NOT FIX (not fixed at

Initial Setting Value
the Z-axis)

SHIFT DIRECTION AND AXIS IN G76, G87

Sets the direction and axis of shift for G76 and G87 cycle.

Initial Setting Value +X (P-X)

Z-AXIS RETURN OPERATION IN G73, G83

Changes the Z-axis return mode from G00 to G01 in the G73/G83 fixed cycle.

Initial Setting Value IN G00 MODE

FEEDRATE FOR Z-AXIS RETURN IN THE G01

Sets the feedrate when changing the rapid traverse to the cutting feed in the fixed cycle.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

20000 1 to 20000
 6115-E P-245
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Cutter Radius Compensation

The cutter radius compensation parameters are listed in 2 pages, 1/2 and 2/2. Use the PAGE keys
to change the display page.
The CUTTER R COMPENSATION screen displays the following parameters.

Page 1/2

COMPENSATION VECTOR CHECK

If a movement at a corner is extremely small, the second point of the corner is disregarded if the
following are satisfied. This parameter sets the limit value ΔV for this judgment.
ΔVX ≤ ΔV
ΔVY ≤ ΔV
ΔVx

ΔVy
Initial Setting Value Setting Range
50 0 to 5000

ERROR DATA RESULTING FROM CUTTER R COMP. CAL

ME32125R1101600240001
 Minute arc
The distance from the start point to the end of an arc is smaller than the set value in both the
vertical and horizontal directions.

 Quasi-full circle Δx
Δx
A circular arc that is almost a full circle. The distance of a Δy Δy
gap in the arc is smaller than the set value in both the
vertical and horizontal directions.
This parameter sets the distance ΔV used to determine
whether or not the defined circular arc is treated as a
minute arc or a quasi-full circle.

<In the case of a minute arc>

The end point is disregarded and the axes do not move along
an arc. Minute arc Quasi-full circle
<In the case of quasi-full circle> (ΔX ≤ ΔV, ΔY ≤ ΔV)
The end point is disregarded and the axes move along a full ME32125R1101600240002

circle.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

10 2 to 200
 6115-E P-246
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TOLERANCE FOR THE INTERFERENCE WITH Tool path (tool center)

CUTTER R COMP.
If the direction of actual tool movement does not agree with
the direction of programmed path, an interference error occurs Programmed path

although the tool does not actually interfere with the

workpiece. To avoid the occurrence of an interference error, t

tolerance is set for this parameter. If the distance of axis

reverse movement is within the set value, an error does not ME32125R1101600240003
take place even if the direction of tool movement is reversed
to the direction of the programmed path.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 0 to 99999999

Page 2/2

CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION CORNER OVERRIDE

Sets deceleration rate “r”, inside corner judgment angle θ, “Le”, and “Ls” as shown in the illustration
below.

N1 θ
Programmed path B
A

le N2
Tool path ls C

N1 X_Y _F1
N2 X_Y _F2
A: Override ON position
B: Target point in positioning by N1 block commands
C: Override OFF position
r : DECELERATING RATE
θ : CORNER'S INTERNAL IDENTIFICATION ANGLE
le : END POINT DECELERATING DISTANCE COMP
ls : STARTING POINT DECELERATING DISTANCE COMP
Feedrate

F2
F1 F2 ×
F1 ×
r/100 r/100

A B C Distance
le ls
ME32125R1101600250001

Initial setting value and setting range of the parameters above are indicated below.
 6115-E P-247
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

DECELERATING RATE r

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

100 1 to 100

CORNER’S INTERNAL IDENTIFICATION ANGLE

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

90 1 to 179

END POINT DECELERATING DISTANCE COMP le

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 0 to 99999.999

STARTING POINT DECELERATING DISTANCE COMP ls

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 0 to 99999.999

DECELERATING RATE FOR COMP. ARC’S INTERNAL OVERRIDE r

Programmed path

rp
re

Tool path

ME32125R1101600250002

In the cutter radius compensation mode, the feedrate is usually controlled so that the feedrate along
the tool path will be the specified feedrate. By setting a value for this parameter, it is possible to
override the feedrate so that the feedrate along the programmed path will be the specified feedrate
for cutting the inside of an arc.

 If rc/rp × 100 ≥ Parameter-set value

Actual feedrate = Specified feedrate × rc/rp

 If rc/rp × 100 < Parameter-set value

Actual feedrate = Specified feedrate × Parameter-set value / 100

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

100 1 to 100
 6115-E P-248
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Circular Interpolation

The CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION screen displays the following parameters.

ARC CHECK DATA (DIFFERENCE BETWEEN START AND END)

At the execution of a circular interpolation command, an alarm occurs if the difference between the
radius at the start point and that at the end point exceeds a certain value. This parameter sets the
value used for this judgment.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

20 2 to 200

CIRCULAR RADIUS R COMMAND ERROR CHECK AMOUNT

At the execution of a circular interpolation command, if the difference between the radius at the start
or end point and that specified by an R command is smaller than the set value, the center for the
start or end point is taken as the center of the arc to be generated. This parameter sets the value
used for this judgment.

Initial Setting Setting Range

0 0 to 1000

COMMAND VALUE FOR THE AXIS NOT SPECIFIED (SINGLE-AXIS)

If only one axis is specified in a circular interpolation command, either the actual position or a point
on the arc being defined is taken for the coordinate value of the axis which is not specified. This
parameter sets which of the point should be taken.

Initial Setting Value ACTUAL POSITION

 6115-E P-249
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Auto Set at NC Reset and Power ON

The parameters related with auto set function at NC reset /power ON are listed in 2 pages, 1/2 and
2/2. Use the PAGE keys to change the display page.
The AUTO SET AT NC RESET/POWER ON screen displays the following parameters.

Page 1/2

THE PROGRAM SELECTED BEFORE THE POWER OFF

Sets whether or not the part program selected before turning off the power is automatically selected
when the NC enters the automatic operation mode after the completion of its starting up processing
with the power turned on.

Initial Setting Value SELECT

Page 2/2

THE G CODE TO BE SET AUTOMATICALLY

(INTERPOLATION)
Chooses the G code automatically set for interpolation when the power is turned on from between
G00 and G01.

Initial Setting Value G00

(PLANE)
Chooses the G code automatically set for plane designation when the power is turned on from
among G17, G18 and G19.

Initial Setting Value G17

(TOOL-L OFFSET)
Chooses the G code automatically set for tool length offset when the power is turned on from
between G53 and G56.

Initial Setting Value G53

(ABSO/INCRE)
Chooses the G code automatically set for coordinate value command when the power is turned on
from between G90 (absolute command) and G91 (incremental command).

Initial Setting Value G90

(EVERY MINUTE FEED/rev FEED)

Chooses the G code automatically for feedrate unit when the power is turned on from between G94
(mm/min) and G95 (mm/rev).

Initial Setting Value G94

 6115-E P-250
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

(PROGRAMMABLE STROKE LIMIT)

Chooses the G code automatically set for programmable travel limit when the power is turned on
from between G22 (limit ON) and G23 (limit cancel).

Initial Setting Value G23

THE MANUAL SHIFT (ACTUAL/TOTAL)

Determines whether manual interrupted manual shift amount and pulse handle superimposed shift
amount (manual shift current/total) is set to 0 or as it is at NC reset.

Initial Setting Value TO ZERO

THE G62 MIRROR IMAGE FOR ALL AXIS

Determines whether or not the mirror image is cleared for all axes back to the normal state at NC
reset.

Initial Setting Value NOT CLEAR

Geometry Enlargement / Reduction (Optional)

The GEOMETRY ENLARGEMENT/REDUCTION screen displays the following parameters.

GEOMETRY ENLARGEMENT/REDUCTION X, Y, Z
Sets whether or not a geometry is enlarged/reduced on each axis.

Initial Setting Value NOT EXECUTE

Axis Command Cancel

The AXIS COMMAND CANCEL screen displays the following parameters.

AXIS COMMAND CANCEL X, Y, Z

Sets whether or not the [AXIS COM. CANCEL] switch is recognized. When the [AXIS COM.
CANCEL] switch is turned on, the commands of the axis for which the AXIS COMMAND CANCEL
parameter is set to “CANCEL” are canceled. If the axis command is canceled, neither calculation
nor movement takes place.

Initial Setting Value NOT CANCEL

 6115-E P-251
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Tape Puncher Interface

The tape puncher interface parameters are listed in 3 pages from 1/3 to 3/3. Use the PAGE keys to
change the display page.
The PUNCHER IF screens display the following parameters.

Page 1/3

A1. SETS TAPE CODE

Sets the code to be used for punching a program

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

ISO ISO/EIA

[Supplement]

The ISO code consists of ISO 7 bits and even parity. For details on ISO and EIA codes, refer to
SECTION 2 CODE TABLE in APPENDIX.

A2. ISO/EIA AUTOMATICALLY DURING READING

Sets whether or not tape code (ISO/EIA) is automatically recognized during tape reading.

Initial Setting Value DOES

A3. CARRIES OUT A TAPE TV CHECK

Selects whether or not tape TV check is executed.

Initial Setting Value DOES NOT

[Supplement]

The tape TV check is one of the error detection means. When TV check is selected, the NC
conducts following checks.
 For input/verify operation:
The NC checks if the number of characters in one line (including CR and LF) is an even
number, and generates an error if it detects an odd number.
 For outputting:
The NC inserts a space before feeding the line so that the number of characters in one line
(including CR and LF) becomes an even number.
The DEL, BS, CR, NUL and special codes are counted as a character regardless of the set
value at A6. SPECIAL CODE.

A4. SETS NEW LINE FOR TAPE PUNCH IN ISO

Selects the carrier return code for punching tape in the ISO code.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

CRLF CRLF/LF
 6115-E P-252
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

A5. SETS A TAPE DELIMITING CODE

Selects the code that is recognized as a tape delimiting code.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

ISO: %, EIA: ER/FEED
Feed hole
HOLE/SPACE

A6. SPECIAL CODE

Selects whether or not a special code is read and whether or not an alarm (error) is output when a
special code is read.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

ALARM/STORE/
ALARM
IGNORE

[Supplement]

The special codes, represented by ASCII codes, are the characters except for 20 to 5F
(hexadecimal), DEL (7F), BS (08), CR (0D), NUL (00), HT (09), and LF (0A). The codes DEL,
BS, CR and NUL are unconditionally ignored and not stored.

A7. PROGRAM OPERATION FILE NAME PUNCH

Selects whether or not a file name is output with a program.

Initial Setting Value DOES

A8. ZERO, TOOL, PARAMETER FILE NAME PUNCH

Selects whether or not a file name is output with a parameter file.

Initial Setting Value DOES NOT

A9. TAPE FEED

Selects whether or not tape feed is output and sets the code to be output as tape feed.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

FEED HOLE/SPACE
FEED HOLES
FEED/NON
 6115-E P-253
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

A10. TAPE FEED HOLES

When a file is output to tape, feed holes are first output and then a program. After output of a
program, feed holes are output again. This parameter sets the number of feed holes to be output.
This parameter is ineffective if NON is selected at A9. TAPE FEED.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

600 1 to 10000

[Supplement]

The parameters set at A1. SETS TAPE CODE and A3. CARRIES OUT A TAPE TV CHECK are
also used in the DNC-B special function. No that if you change these parameters in one operation
mode, the change will apply to the other operation mode.

Page 2/3

A11. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “=”

Sets the code that represents “=” in the EIA code.
This parameter is used to set the code to be output when the key that should be used as the “=”
symbol key is pressed. The data must be set taking an odd-parity scheme into consideration. Note
that the code set here is also used for DNC-B.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A12. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “*”

Sets the code that represents “*” in the EIA code.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A13. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “[”

Sets the code that represents “[” in the EIA code.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A14. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “]”

Sets the code that represents “]” in the EIA code.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A15. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “$”

Sets the code that represents “$” in the EIA code.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)
 6115-E P-254
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

A16. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “#”

Sets the code that represents “#” in the EIA code.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A17. SETS IRREGULAR TAPE CODE

Sets an irregular code.
When the NC receives the characters set here, it replaces the characters with the substitute codes
set at A18. SETS IRREGULAR REPLACE CODE. Such replacement, however, will not take place if
no check mark is set.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A18. SETS IRREGULAR REPLACE CODE

Sets a regular code. (ISO code)
When outputting, the NC replaces the characters set here with the irregular codes set at A17. SETS
IRREGULAR TAPE CODE. Such replacement, however, will not take place if no check mark is set.

All of bit 0 to bit 7

Initial Setting Value
(No check mark)

A19. INPUT PNO ONE-TIME AT FUNCTION PUNCH

Sets whether a parameter number is punched only once or continuously in parameter output
function.

Initial Setting Value ONE TIME

[Supplement]

The parameters set at A11. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “=”, A12. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “*”, A13.
SETS TAPE CODE EIA “[”, A14. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “]”, A15. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “$” and
A16. SETS TAPE CODE EIA “#” are also used in DNC-B special function.
Note that if you change these parameters in one operation mode, the change will apply to another
operation mode.

Page 3/3

DEVICE NAME OF PROGRAM OPERATION, ZERO, TOOL DATA, PARAMETER

Sets a device name.

Initial Setting Value CN1:

[Supplement]

The OSP’s RS232C connector number corresponds to the device name.

With the required parameter, select the device name that corresponds to the connector number to
which the cable is connected.
 6115-E P-255
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Connector Number Device Name Remarks

CH0 CN1: RS232C interface (standard)
CH1 CN2: RS232C interface extension 1 (optional)
CH2 CN3: RS232C interface extension 2 (optional)

* Though the same device name is selectable for another function, only the cable-
connected function is usable.

B1. BAUD RATE (BPS)

Baud Rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
ME32125R1101600350001

Sets the baud rate for outputting the data to a punch through the RS232C interface.
The selectable baud rates are shown in the table. If a value other than those indicated in this table is
set, the baud rate closest to the set value is automatically set.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

600 110 to 19200 (bps)

B2. RS232C CHARACTER

The character length (data length) handled by RS232C interface is fixed to 8 bits.

Display Only 8 bits

B3. RS232C PARITY BIT

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

NON NON/EVEN/ODD

B4. RS232C STOP BIT

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

2 2/1

B5. READY WAITING TIME (BUSY TIME)

An error occurs if the connected device does not get ready within the set period.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

10 1 to 9999 (sec)
 6115-E P-256
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

B6. FLOW CONTROL

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

DC CODE DC CODE/RS/CS

[Supplement]

DC CODE
 Input/verify: The mating device starts (re-starts) or stops data transfer on reception of DC1 or
DC3 code. It can respond to Xon/Xoff setting of a personal computer.
 Output: The external device must be controlled by RS/CS (hardware flow).
RS/CS
 Input/output and verification can be done by the RS/CS (hardware flow) control.

B7. SETS THE DELAY TIME UNTIL RS SWITCHES OFF

This is a delay timer to turn OFF the RS signal at the normal or abnormal end of data
communication initiated by RS232C or DATA IN/OUT command.
RS signal is not turned OFF when “0” is set.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 0 to 9999 (msec)

B8. DESIGNATES THE AMOUNT OF RS OFF TIME

Sets the duration for turning off the RS signal at the normal or abnormal end of data communication
initiated by RS232C or DATA IN/OUT command.
(The RS signal is turned on after the elapse of the time set for this parameter.)
If you set a value other than 0 at this parameter and set 0 at B9 parameter, the RS signal keeps ON
for the duration set at this parameter before going out.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 0 to 9999 (msec)

B9. DC2/DC4 AT PUNCH

Disables data transfer using DC2 or DC4 communication control code during OUTPUT operation
initiated by RS232C or DATA command.

Initial Setting Value DOES

[Supplement]

This parameter is effective when DC code is selected at B6. FLOW CONTROL.

When you see the file output from OSP using the editing function of an external device, you may
find a meaningless character at the top and end of the line. In this case, select DOES NOT at the
B9 parameter.
 6115-E P-257
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

B10. DC3 WHEN READ/VERIFY FINISHED

In communication under DC code control, DC3 is not sent after inputting null data at the end of data
input and verification initiated by RS232C or DATA IN/OUT command.

Initial Setting Value DOES

[Supplement]

This parameter is effective when DC code is selected at B6. FLOW CONTROL.

When DOES is selected at B10. DC3 WHEN READ/VERIFY FINISHED and data transfer is
interrupted for some reason such as reading error, the external device sometimes stores the
transferred data in its buffer. In that case, the NC reads the data stored in the external device
buffer when the next input or verification is attempted. As a result, excess lines are added to the
top of the normal data or an error occurs.
When DOES NOT is selected at B10 parameter and the data transfer is interrupted, the NC waits
until the external device buffer becomes empty (or data reception stops for the duration set at B5
READY WAITING TIME). It is desirable to set 2 seconds at the B5 parameter.

1) Do not select the Device name having no corresponding connector number, because such
Device name may be used by the NC control unit.
2) When using RS232C interface extension 1 or 2 (optional), ensure that a checkmark or “1” is
set at the following NC optional parameters (long word, word, bit):
CN1: NC optional parameter bit No. 13 bit 1
CN2: NC optional parameter bit No. 14 bit 1
CN3: NC optional parameter bit No. 21 bit 1
* Checkmarks are initially set at the above parameters.
If the above parameters are 0, the following error occurs when data transfer is attempted. (The
error number may vary depending on the hardware configuration.)
300 Device name FFFFFFFF ‘CN*’ (CN* is the specified device name.)
3) The parameters cannot be input or output through RS232C. The settings at “A8. ZERO,
TOOL, PARAMETER FILE NAME PUNCH” and at “A19.INPUT PNO ONE-TIME AT
FUNCTION PUNCH” are not used.

READ/WRITE GET/PUT

The PARAMETER screens display the following parameters.

DEVICE TO BE SET
Selects a device name of the objective external equipment.

Initial Setting Value CN0:

[Supplement]

The CH numbers of the RS232C connector in the OSP control unit correspond to the CN
numbers. Select the CN number that corresponds to the connector CH number to which a cable
is connected.
 6115-E P-258
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Connector CH No. Device name CN No. Remarks

CH0 CN0: RS232C interface (standard)
CH1 CN1: RS232C interface extension 1 (optional)
CH2 CN2: RS232C interface extension 2 (optional)

* It is possible to select the above CN numbers for the other function as long as they are connected with a
cable.

RS232C STOP BIT

Sets the stop bit length.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

2 2/1

RS232C PARITY BIT

Selects whether or not a parity bit is added.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

NONE NON/EVEN/ODD

BAUD RATE (BPS)

Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate. 110
If any value other than that in the table to the right is to be set, the closest 150
value in the table less than that value is set. 300
600
1200
Initial Setting Value Setting Range 2400
4800
600 110 to 19200 (bps) 9600
19200
FLOW CONTROL ME32125R1101600360001

Refer to the communication method described in SECTION 6, 6-4. Connection with External Device.

Initial Setting Value DC CODE

READY WAITING TIME

Sets the wait time until the RS232C channel 0 becomes active. If the channel remains inactive after
elapse of the set time, an alarm occurs.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

10 1 to 9999 (sec)

DELIMITING CODE
Selects how to judge a tape delimiting code.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

% %/NULL
 6115-E P-259
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

PROGRAM UNIT
The results of setting at “PART PROGRAM UNIT” of the NC Optional Parameter (INPUT UNIT
SYSTEM) are displayed.

Display Only 1 mm

RS232C CHARACTER
The character length (data length) handled by RS232C interface is fixed to 8 bits.
The transmission data conforms to 8-bit JIS and ISO (7-bit ISO + space parity).

Display Only 8bit

1) Do not select the CN number having no corresponding connector CH number, because such
CN number may be used by the NC control unit.
2) When using RS232C interface extension 1 or 2 (optional), ensure that a checkmark or “1” is
set at the following NC optional parameters (long word, word, bit):
CN1: NC optional parameter bit No. 13 bit 1
CN2: NC optional parameter bit No. 14 bit 1
CN3: NC optional parameter bit No. 21 bit 1
* Checkmarks are initially set at the above parameters.
3) The following figure shows a sample RS232C interface installed in the OSP control cabinet.
Ex. RS232C interface extension 1 is added

RS232C
CH0 CH1

ME32125R1101600360002
 6115-E P-260
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Synchronized Tapping (Optional)

The SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING screen displays the following parameters.

G84/G74 TAP MODE

Selects for the machine equipped with the synchronized tapping specification how the NC program
command (G74, G84) is executed. Selection is possible from normal float tap cycle and
synchronized tapping cycle.

Initial Setting Value FLOAT TAP

SPINDLE INDEX ANGLE AT RAPID FEEDRATE

Sets the position subtraction amount executed by E common in the synchronized tapping command.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 to 359999 (1/1000°)
5000
0 to 3599999 (1/10000°)

ZERO OFFSET (SYNC. TAP)

Sets the spindle orientation offset data used for an E command in synchronized tapping operation.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the 0 to 359999 (1/1000 deg.)
machine. 0 to 3599999 (1/10000 deg.)

IN-POSITION CHECK VALUE (SYNC. TAP)

Sets the in-position check value for the spindle (C-axis).

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

Depends on the 1 to 359999 (1/1000 deg.)
machine. 1 to 3599999 (1/10000 deg.)

SPINDLE RATED VALUE (SYNC. TAP)

Sets the continuous rating of the spindle motor.
(The value to be set varies depending on the motor capacity.)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 110 to 99999999 (W)

RETURN SPEED OVERRIDE (SYNC. TAP)

By setting a value for this parameter, the return feedrate in synchronized tapping is calculated as
“cutting feedrate × set value”.
(If “0” is set, it is regarded as “100%”.)

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 1 to 200 (%)
 6115-E P-261
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TORQUE LOW FOR SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING

 NUMBER OF TORQUE OVER TIME

An alarm occurs if the spindle torque exceeds the threshold value (monitor reference value)
continuously for “10 × n” (msec) while tapping torque is monitored. This parameter sets the
value for “n” (permissible number of low torque times).
Initial Setting Value Setting Range
0 to 32 (times)
0 Recommended value:
4 (times)

 TORQUE MONITOR START REVO. RATIO / TORQUE MONITOR DELAY TIME

When torque monitor is specified for synchronized tapping operation, monitor starts in the
following manner.

a. Ignores overload state until the actual spindle speed reaches A% of the specified spindle
speed.

b. After the arrival of A% of the specified spindle speed, the function stays inactive for “t” to
allow the spindle to rotate in the stabilized state.
The parameter sets “A” (%) and “t” (100 msec).
Start-up current T: The function disregards the
overload state since the spindle
T has not reached the stable state.
Spindle speed

t
t: Parameter-set period.
The function is immune to the
overload state.
Monitor reference value
Spindle rotating in the stabilized state

Time

Judges that the spindle is rotating at a fixed speed.

S command
Spindle speed

A% 100%

Time
ME32125R1101600370001
 6115-E P-262
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TORQUE MONITOR START REVO. RATIO

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

0 to 100
0 Recommended value:
90%

TORQUE MONITOR DELAY TIME

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

1 to 1000
0 Recommended value:
2 (0.1 sec)
 6115-E P-263
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Operation Related Parameters

The OPERATING RELATION PARAMETER screen displays the following parameters.

CYCLE START AT THE SETTING

It is possible to start the cycle operation after changing the mode from automatic operation to a
setting mode.

Initial Setting Value IMPOSSIBLE

STOP IN THE PARTICULAR CONTROL SINGLE BLOCK

In automatic operation, operation does not stop at a block containing control statement such as IF,
GOTO and CALL even if the single block function is on. This parameter allows the setting for
stopping automatic operation at a block containing a control statement.

Initial Setting Value DOES NOT

PROGRAM BUFFERING
In automatic operation with the single block function off, the block next to the presently executed
block and the following blocks are not read or calculated. The next block is read and calculated after
the completion of the present block. In the cutter radius compensation mode, however, the blocks
are read and calculated until a point of intersection is obtained (up to three blocks).

Initial Setting Value DOES

DRY RUN EFFECTIVE EVEN FOR G00

In the dry run mode operation, G00 commands are all executed at the dry run feedrate as with
cutting feedrate commands.
This parameter sets whether or not G00 mode commands are all executed in the G00 mode in the
dry run operation.

Initial Setting Value G00(RAPID FEED)

EVEN ONE AXIS IS AT THE LIMIT IN CUTTING FEED

This parameter sets the processing to be taken if one or more axis is at the travel limit in cutting feed
operation in automatic or MDI mode. Selection is possible from “to cause an alarm” and “to allow the
operation to be continued”.

Initial Setting Value RUNNING

COMMAND CAUSING OVERTRAVEL IN STROKE END

This parameter selects the processing to be taken if a command causing an axis to move beyond
the travel limit is executed. Selection is possible from “to cause an alarm” and “to allow the operation
to be continued”.

Initial Setting Value RUNNING

 6115-E P-264
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH AFTER NC START

Selects whether or not the program read pointer can be moved after starting the NC.

Initial Setting Value POSSIBLE

SCHEDULE P-SELECT WHILE FILE IS BEING ACCESSED

Selects the level of alarm that occurs if a program selection is attempted in background while a file is
being accessed.

Initial Setting Value ALARM D

RUNNING METHOD OF MAIN PROGRAM

Selects the program running method adopted when a program is selected without designation of
any option.

Initial Setting Value B-Mtd

Display Related Parameters

The parameters related with screen display are as follows:

THE SYSTEM SUBPROGRAM (SSB,LIB) IN PROGRAM DISPLAY

Selects whether or not the system subprogram (SSB,LIB) is displayed in the automatic operation
mode.

Initial Setting Value DISPLAY

ALL ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY IGNORE THE MANUAL SHIFT AMOUNT

Selects whether or not the shift amount caused by manual interruption or pulse handle overlap is
added to the numerical value of actual position display and graphic display.

Initial Setting Value NO

NUMBER OF NC AXES IN LOAD ON/OFF WINDOW

Selects the number of axes to be displayed when the load ON/OFF window is ON.

Initial Setting Value 3-AXIS (XYZ)

ALARM LEVEL RECORDED IN ALARM HISTORY

Selects the alarm level to be recorded in the alarm history of the machining management function.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

ALARM ABCD ALARM ABCD/ ALARM ABC/ ALARM AB/ ALARM A
 6115-E P-265
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Mirror Image

The MIRROR IMAGE screen displays the following parameters.

LOCAL/WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECT

Sets the coordinate system in which the mirror image function is turned on.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

LOCAL LOCAL/ WORK/ SLOPE

AT AN NC RESET, CLEARS THE G62 MIRROR IMAGES FOR ALL AXES.

Sets whether or not the mirror image function remains valid or canceled for all axes when the NC is
reset.

Initial Setting Value NOT CLEAR

Area Machining

The AREA MACHINING screen displays the following parameters.

OVERRIDE IN PMILR CORNER CUTTING

Pocket milling (spiral pattern) PMILR

F × r/100
ME32125R1101600410001

The tool path in PMILR operation is shown above. This parameter sets the override value for the
feedrate that is applied in moving to the next pocket milling tool path along 45° path.
Actual feedrate = Programmed feedrate × r/100
The parameter sets a value for “r”.

Initial Setting Value Setting Range

100 1 to 100 (%)
 6115-E P-266
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

NC Optional Parameter (Long Word, Word, Bit)

Some of NC optional parameters (long word, word, bit) are common to the setting for the individual
function parameter setting screens. Therefore, among the items described in the table, for those that
can be set using the individual function parameter setting screens, the explanation given for them
can be referenced.
Note that parameters marked with asterisk (*) require the power to be turned off once and then on
again to make the new setting valid.
For the optional parameter table, see [SECTION 1 APPENDIX] of APPENDIX.
 6115-E P-267
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

3-3-3. Machine User Parameter

Coolant

The machine user parameter for coolant consists of several pages. Use the PAGE keys to change
the screen page.
The COOLANT screen displays the following parameters.

[COOLANT] SW IS ACTIVE
Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the coolant switch specification.

[A.B NOZ. (AIR BLOW NOZZLE)] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the air blow (nozzle) switch specification.

[A.B ADAPT. (AIR BLOW NOZZLE)] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the air blow (adapter) switch specification.

[OIL MIST] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the oil mist switch specification.

[OIL HOLE] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the oil hole switch specification.

[SHOWER] SW IS ACTIVE
Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the shower switch specification.

[CHIP CON] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the chip conveyor switch specification.

[CHIP WASH] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the chip wash coolant switch specification.

[WATER GUN] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the water gun switch specification.

[SPINDLE THROUGH AIR BLOW] SW IS ACTIVE

Sets the availability (ON / OFF) of the through-spindle air blow switch specification.

CHIP WASH IS TURN ON WITH NC RUN

Selects whether or not chip wash coolant is turned on at the start of NC-axis feed.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE COOLANT

Selects whether or not “Coolant ON (M08)” is not turned off by the execution of “Coolant group OFF
(M09)”.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE OIL HOLE LOW PRESSURE

Selects whether or not “Low-pressure oil hole coolant ON (M50)” is not turned off by the execution of
“Coolant group OFF (M09)”.
 6115-E P-268
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE OIL HOLE HIGH PRESSURE

Selects whether or not “High-pressure oil hole coolant ON (M51)” is turned off by the execution of
“Coolant group OFF (M09)”.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE AIR BLOW (NOZZLE)

Selects whether or not “Chip air blow ON (nozzle type) (M12)” is turned off by the execution of
“Coolant group OFF (M09)”.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE AIR BLOW (ADAPTER)

Selects whether or not “Chip air blow ON (adapter type) (M59)” is turned off by the execution of
“Coolant group OFF (M09)”.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE OIL MIST

Selects whether or not “Oil mist ON (M07)” is turned off by the execution of “Coolant group OFF
(M09)”.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE WORK SHOWER

Selects whether or not “Work shower coolant ON (M120)” is turned off by the execution of “Coolant
group OFF (M09)”.

M00/M01 DOESN’T TURN OFF SPINDLE / COOLANT GROUP

Selects whether or not the execution of “Program stop (M00)” or “Optional stop (M01)” does not stop
the spindle nor turn off coolant group.

OIL MIST TIME

Sets the mist ON time for oil mist supply cycle.

CHIP CONVEYOR TURN ON WITH COOLANT

Sets whether or not the chip conveyor starts operating if any of coolant related outputs (coolant, oil-
hole, shower, chip wash, work wash gun) is turned on.

CHIP CONVEYOR TURN ON WITH NC RUN

Sets if the chip conveyor starts at the start of NC running.

THROUGH COOLANT IS MADE EFFECTIVE IN TEST MODE

Selects whether the low-pressure through-spindle coolant is valid or invalid with the door open in the
test mode.

LIFT UP DELAY TIMER

Sets the delay time taken after the coolant related outputs are turned OFF until the lift up conveyor
stops working in conjunction with coolant related outputs.

COOLANT LOW LEVEL ALARM C TO B

Sets the alarm level to B for the coolant-related alarms (standard coolant, thru-the-tool and through-
spindle coolant) activated by low coolant level.

CHIP WASH TURN ON WITH COOLANT

Sets the chip wash to start operating if any of coolant related outputs (coolant, thru-the-tool and
through-spindle coolant) is turned on.
 6115-E P-269
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

MIST COLLECTOR ALARM LEVEL IS MADE C TO D

Sets the alarm level to D for the alarm that starts operating if the mist collector is not working
properly.

COOLANT DOOR IL EFFECTIVE

Sets the machine not to discharge coolant while the operator door is open.
This parameter is invalid for the CE mark-compliant machine.

OIL HOLE DOOR IL EFFECTIVE

Sets the machine not to discharge thru-the-hole coolant (through-spindle coolant) while the operator
door is open.
This parameter is invalid for the CE mark-compliant machine.

SHOWER DOOR IL EFFECTIVE

Sets the machine not to discharge the shower coolant while the operator door is open.
This parameter is invalid for the CE mark-compliant machine.

OIL MIST DOOR IL EFFECTIVE

Sets the machine not to discharge the oil mist while the operator door is open.
This parameter is invalid for the CE mark-compliant machine.

CHIP CONVEYOR TURN ON WITH DRY COOLANT

Sets the chip conveyor to start operating if any of dry coolant related outputs (chip air blow, oil mist,
semidry, thru-spindle air blow) is turned on.

[SEMIDRY NOZZLE] SW IS ACTIVE

Selects which is effective between the semidry nozzle pushbutton and the specification code
setting.

[SEMIDRY THROUGH] SW IS ACTIVE

Selects which is effective between the semidry through pushbutton and the specification code
setting.

[MIST COLLECT] SW IS ACTIVE

Selects which is effective between the mist collector pushbutton and the specification code setting.

M07 IS SEMIDRY THROUGH COMMAND

Selects for which M07 is used, semidry thru-spindle command or oil mist command.

MISTCOLLECTOR OFF-TIMER
Sets the time taken after the operator door is open until the mist collector stops operating.

WITH NO RETURN TO THE MIST COLLECTOR

The mist collector stops when the operator door is opened, and it restarts when the operator door is
closed. This parameter is used to select whether this restart operation is prohibited or not.

SETUP STATION FLUSHING PUMP ON TIME AFTER M60

Sets the required time for performing the setup station flushing pump after executing the M60
command.
 6115-E P-270
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SETUP STATION FLUSHING PUMP ON AFTER M60 INVALID

Selects whether or not the setup station flushing pump is inhibited after executing the M60
command.

THROUGH SP COOLANT FLUX DETECTION START TIME

Sets the time for detecting the through-spindle coolant flux error after the through-spindle coolant
motor started operating.

THROUGH SP COOLANT FLUX UNUSUAL DETECTION TIME

Sets the time taken after the through-spindle coolant flux error is detected until the alarm activates.
(If the through-spindle coolant flux error is continuously detected for the duration set by this
parameter, the alarm activates.)

Power Save / Shutdown

The POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN screen displays the following parameters.

[POWER SAVE] IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects ON/OFF for the power save function.
This parameter depends on the machine model specification and not used on machines having
ECO suite.

[POWER SAVE] IS MADE INEFFECTIVE DURING M00/M01

Selects ON/OFF for the power save function while the NC stops due to the execution of M00 or
M01.
This parameter depends on the machine model specification and not used on machines having
ECO suite.

ALARM IS ADDED AS A REQUIREMENT FOR SHUTDOWN

Selects if occurrence of an alarm is included in the requirements for the executing power shutdown.

POWER SAVE TIME

Sets the length of time to start power save operation after the stop of machine operation.
This parameter depends on the machine model specification and not used on machines having
ECO suite.

POWER SHUTDOWN TIME

Sets the length of time to shut down the power after the stop of machine operation.

Timer

The TIMER screen shows the following parameters.

THE 2ND TIMER, COUNTING SPINDLE ROTATION PERIOD

Sets the function for the 2nd timer - counts the spindle rotating time.

THE 2ND TIMER, CUTTING NC OPERATION PERIOD

Sets the function for the 2nd timer - counts the NC running time.
 6115-E P-271
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

THE 2ND TIMER, ADD AUTO-MODE CONDITION

Sets the additional condition (automatic operation mode) for the 2nd timer.

THE 2ND TIMER, ADD AUTO-MODE/SINGLE-BLOCK OFF

Sets the additional conditions (automatic operation mode and single block OFF) for the 2nd timer.

THE 3RD TIMER, COUNTING SPINDLE ROTATION PERIOD

Sets the function for the 3rd timer - counts the spindle rotating time.

THE 3RD TIMER, CUTTING NC OPERATION PERIOD

Sets the function for the 3rd timer - counts the NC running time.

THE 3RD TIMER, ADD AUTO-MODE CONDITION

Sets the additional condition (automatic operation mode) for the 3rd timer.

THE 3RD TIMER, ADD AUTO-MODE/SINGLE-BLOCK OFF

Sets the additional conditions (automatic operation mode and single block OFF) for the 3rd timer.

THE 2ND TIMER, CUTTING

Selects whether the 2nd timer is set to “CUTTING”.

THE 3RD TIMER, CUTTING

Selects whether the 3rd timer is set to “CUTTING”.

Indicating Lamp

The machine user parameter for indicator consists of several pages.

Use the PAGE keys to change the screen page.
INDICATING LAMP screen displays the following parameters.

THE 3RD LAMP (NC RUNNING) IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects ON/OFF for the 3rd indicating lamp.

IT IS TURNED ON WITHOUT S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the single block OFF is excluded (made invalid) from the conditions for
turning on the 3rd indicating lamp.

IT IS TURNED ON WITHOUT AUTO/S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the automatic mode and single block OFF are excluded (made invalid) from
the conditions for turning on the 3rd indicating lamp.

IT IS TURNED OFF WHEN AN ALARM OCCURS

Selects if the 3rd indicating lamp is turned off at the occurrence of an alarm.

ALARM LAMP IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects ON/OFF for the alarm lamp.

IT IS TURNED ON WITHOUT S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the single block OFF is excluded (made invalid) from the conditions for
turning on the alarm lamp.
 6115-E P-272
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

IT IS TURNED ON WITHOUT AUTO/S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the automatic mode and single block OFF are excluded (made invalid) from
the conditions for turning on the alarm lamp.

OPERATION END LAMP IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects ON/OFF for the operation end lamp.

IT IS TURNED ON WITHOUT S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the single block OFF is excluded (made invalid) from the conditions for
turning on the operation end lamp.

IT IS TURNED ON WITHOUT AUTO/S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the automatic mode and single block OFF are excluded (made invalid) from
the conditions for turning on the operation end lamp.

ALARM/END LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED OFF WITH POWER SAVE

Selects whether or not the alarm and work end indicators remain illuminated even after the machine
is put in power save or ECO idle stop mode while they are lit.

WORK EXCHANGE LAMP IS MADE EFFECT

ALARM LAMP IS TURNED ON WITH ALARM D OCCURS

Sets whether or not the occurrence of alarm D is added to the conditions for turning on the alarm
lamp.

ALARM LAMP IS NOT TURNED ON WITH ALARM C OCCURS

Sets whether or not the occurrence of alarm C is excluded from the conditions for turning on the
alarm lamp.

ALARM LAMP IS NOT TURNED ON WITH ALARM B OCCURS

Sets whether or not the occurrence of alarm B is excluded from the conditions for turning on the
alarm lamp.

ALARM LAMP IS NOT TURNED ON WITH ALARM A OCCURS

Sets whether or not the occurrence of alarm A is excluded from the conditions for turning on the
alarm lamp.

ALARM LAMP; ALARM A INCLUDES EMERGENCY STOP

Selects whether or not the alarm lamp comes on when the EMERGENCY STOP is pressed.

Buzzer

The BUZZER screen displays the following parameters.

OPERATION END BUZZER IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects ON/OFF for the operation end buzzer.

BUZZER SOUNDS WITHOUT S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the single block OFF is excluded (made invalid) from the conditions for the
operation end buzzer to sound.
 6115-E P-273
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

BUZZER SOUNDS WITHOUT AUTO/S-BLK OFF CONDITION

Selects whether or not the automatic mode and single block OFF are excluded (made invalid) from
the conditions for the operation end buzzer to sound.

BUZZER IS NOT TURNED OFF BY END TIMER

Selects whether or not the buzzer does not stop after the time-up of the end timer.

BUZZER IS NOT TURNED ON WHEN ALARM OCCURS

Selects whether or not the buzzer does not sound at the occurrence of an alarm.

BUZZER IS NOT TURNED ON WHEN COMPLETING PROGRAM

Selects whether or not the buzzer does not sound at the completion of a program.

OPERATION END BUZZER TIMER

Sets the duration for which the operation end buzzer sounds.

Spindle

The SPINDLE screen displays the following parameters.

SPINDLE STOPS WHEN AN ALARM OF LEVEL B OCCURS

Selects whether or not the spindle stops at the occurrence of level B alarm.

THE MINIMUM OF [S] IS THE MINIMUM SPEED OF MOTOR

Sets whether or not designation of the minimum motor speed is allowed for the minimum S
command value.

[NO TOOL] INTERLOCK IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Sets whether not the no-tool interlock is made invalid.

SPINDLE OVERLOAD ALLOWANCE TIME

Sets the delay time for the spindle overload monitor function to start monitoring after the start of the
spindle. During this period, overload state is disregarded.

THE MAXIMUM SPINDLE OVERRIDE IS MADE 300%

Selects whether or not the maximum value for the spindle override is set to 300%.

ATC / Tool Change

The ATC/TOOL EXCHANGE screen displays the following parameters.

INDEXING MAGAZINE BY ADVANCES ONE STEP

Sets if the magazine index is carried out in one-step advance operation.

EXCHANGE ANGULAR ATTACHMENT TOOL WITH M06

Sets if angular attachment tool change cycle (M177) is executed by M06.
 6115-E P-274
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

[INTERLOCK RELEASE] BUTTON IS EFFECTIVELY ATC HP

Selects whether or not the [INTERLOCK RELEASE] button is valid for movements to the ATC home
position.

ANSWER TO M06 WITHOUT DOOR-CLOSE CONDITION

Sets if the door close condition is disregarded for returning the M06 answer signal.

TOOL UNCLAMP TIME

Sets the time for the tool to be unclamped after the pressing of the tool unclamp button.

ATC EXCHANGE RANGE (X MINUS SIDE)

Sets the negative direction X-axis position of the ATC enabled range.

ATC EXCHANGE RANGE (X PLUS SIDE)

Sets the positive direction X-axis position of the ATC enabled range.

ATC EXCHANGE RANGE (CROSSRAIL MINUS SLIDE)

Sets the negative direction WA-axis position of the ATC enabled range.

ATC EXCHANGE RANGE (CROSSRAIL PLUS SLIDE)

Sets the positive direction WA-axis position of the ATC enabled range.

TOOL EXCHANGE ARM SPEED

Sets the tool exchange arm speed. (Not available with some machine models.)

ATC PREPARATE RANGE (CROSSRAIL MINUS SIDE)

Sets the negative crossrail position where the ATC can be ready for ATC operation.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCV
and MCR series.

ATC PREPARATE RANGE (CROSSRAIL PLUS SIDE)

Sets the positive crossrail position where the ATC can be ready for ATC operation.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCV
and MCR series.

BLANK TOOL NO.

Sets the adaptor number mounted when the simplified 5-face attachment is used.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCV
series.

ATC EXCHANGE RANGE (Y AXIS MINUS SIDE)

Sets the negative Y-axis position where ATC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCV
and MCR series.

ATC EXCHANGE RANGE (Y AXIS PLUS SIDE)

Sets the positive Y-axis position where ATC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCV
and MCR series.
 6115-E P-275
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TOOL UNCLAMP CHECK TIMER

Sets the waiting time until the tool unclamp is confirmed.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TOOL EXCHANGE POSITION

Sets the manual exchange pot position in the MG reversed direction from the ATC exchange pot
position in the ATC sub operation panel type.

Magazine

The MAGAZINE screen displays the following parameters.

[TOOL EXIST] INTERLOCK IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Sets whether or not the interlock condition, tool existing in the magazine, is made invalid.

IT DOES NOT STEP ATC WHEN [MANUAL INT.] IS ON

Selects whether or not the magazine door interlock condition to stop the ATC is made invalid for
manual magazine operation.

IT DOES NOT STOP ATC WHEN [MANUAL INT.] IS ON

Selects whether or not both the ATC and AAC are stopped due to magazine door interlock.

MAGAZINE INTERVENTION MODE IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not manual magazine operation intervention is invalid when the magazine
operation is disabled due to magazine door interlock.

MG TOOL REMOVABLE REGARDLESS OF MG DOOR STATE

Selects whether or not the interlock that enables magazine tool removal footswitch only when the
magazine door is open is made invalid.

MG DOOR LOCK IS RELEASED ONLY WHEN MG MANUAL INT.

Selects whether or not the magazine door lock is released only during magazine manual interruption
(Applicable models: MX-H, MA-H series).

MAGAZINE OVERRIDE
Sets the override applied to the magazine axis. (This is not available depending on the machine
model.)

NUMBER OF THE TOOL OF A LARGE-DIAMETER TOOL

Sets the number of super large diameter tools.
 6115-E P-276
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

External M Code

The EXTERNAL M CODE screen displays the following parameters.

M181 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M181) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M182 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M182) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M183 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M183) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M184 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M184) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M185 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M185) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M186 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M186) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M187 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M187) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

M188 IS EXECUTED AFTER COMPLETION POSITIONING

Selects whether or not execution of external M command (M188) is made valid after the completion
of positioning.

External Operation Monitor

The EXTERNAL OPERATION MONITOR screen displays the following parameters.

ADD [AUTO MODE] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “automatic operation mode” is added to the conditions for the activation of the external
operation monitor.

ADD [RUN LAMP] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “RUN lamp ON” is added to the conditions for the activation of the external operation
monitor.
 6115-E P-277
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

ADD [SPINDLE IN ROTATING] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “spindle is rotating” is added to the conditions for the activation of the external operation
monitor.

ADD [AXIS MOVING] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “axis is moving” is added to the conditions for the activation of the external operation
monitor.

ADD [SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100%] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “spindle override setting at 100%” is added to the conditions for the activation of the
external operation monitor.

ADD [FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 100%] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “feedrate override setting at 100%” is added to the conditions for the activation of the
external operation monitor.

ADD [SINGLE BLOCK OFF] TO OUTPUT CONDITIONS

Selects if “single block function is OFF” is added to the conditions for the activation of the external
operation monitor.

Door Interlock

The DOOR INTERLOCK screen displays the following parameters.

SPINDLE ROTATION IS CONTINUED

Selects whether or not the spindle continues rotating when the operator’s door interlock is ON.

SPINDLE ALLOWABLE REVOLUTION

Sets the allowable maximum speed of the spindle, if rotated, while the operator’s door is open.

DOOR LOCK RELEASE TIMER

Sets the time in which the door lock release button is valid (lock pin released).

OPERATION DOOR IS NOT UNLOCKED AUTOMATICALLY

Selects whether or not the operator door is automatically unlocked with M02/M30 commands in
production mode of the CE mark-compliant machine.

Axis Lubricant

The AXIS LUBRICANT screen displays the following parameters.

AXIS LUBE CYCLE TIME (NO.1)

Sets the axis lubrication cycle time.
However, this parameter is effective only for the axis lubricator type 1.

AXIS LUBE PUMP TIME

Sets the time for which the axis lubrication pump motor is operating.
However, this parameter is effective only for the axis lubricator type 1.
 6115-E P-278
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

CROSS RAIL LUBE CYCLE TIME

Sets the crossrail lubrication cycle time.

CROSS RAIL LUBE PUMP TIME

Sets the time for which the crossrail lubrication pump motor is operating.

APC LUBE PUMP TIME

Sets the duration for which the APC lubrication pump motor operates.

NUMBER OF LUBRI. MOTOR ON AT POWER ON

Sets the number of times to turn on or turn off the lubrication motor when the machine is turned on.
However, this parameter is effective only for the axis lubricator type 2.

LUBRICATION MOTOR ON TIME

Sets the time for which the axis lubrication motor operates.
However, this parameter is effective only for the axis lubricator type 2.

LUBRICATION MOTOR OFF TIME

Sets the time taken after the axis lubrication motor stops operating until the lubrication motor starts
operating again.
If any of the following times reaches the value set by this parameter, the axis lubrication motor starts
operation: total axis feed time (X, Y, Z), ATC operation time, MG axis operation time, rotary table
operation time.
However, this parameter is effective only for the axis lubricator type 2.

LUBRICATION MOTOR MAXIMUM OFF TIME

Sets the maximum time taken after the axis lubrication motor stops operating until the lubrication
motor starts operating again.
However, this parameter is effective only for the axis lubricator type 2.

System Check Mode

The SYSTEM CHECK MODE screen displays the following parameters.

SYSTEM CHECK MODE

Sets the machine axis test number.

AUTOMATIC SETTING CROSS RAIL POSITIONING POINT

Selects whether or not crossrail positioning points are set automatically.

External Program Select

The EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT screen displays the following parameters.

CHECK PARITY (EVEN) IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not parity check (even parity) is valid for external program selection.

CHECK PARITY (ODD) IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not parity check (odd parity) is valid for external program selection.
 6115-E P-279
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Chuck, Work Sit, Tailstock

The machine user parameter for chuck, seating confirmation, and tailstock consists of several
pages. Use the PAGE keys to change the display page.
The CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK screen displays the following parameters.

CHUCK GRIPS THE INNER DIAMETER OF THE WORKPIECE

Sets the how the workpiece is clamped by the chuck (ID or OD).

EVEN IF CHUCK OPENS, CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the cutting feed disable interlock is made invalid even when the chuck is
open.

SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN CHUCK OPENS

Selects whether or not the spindle rotation disable interlock is made invalid when the chuck is open.

CHUCK CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

To be set for the machine which does not use a chuck close confirmation limit switch. The chuck is
regarded to have closed at time up of the preset timer.

CHUCK OPEN LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

To be set for the machine which does not use a chuck open confirmation limit switch. The chuck is
regarded to have opened at time up of the preset timer.

WORK CLAMP TIMER

Sets the workpiece clamp operation check timer.

WORK UNCLAMP TIMER

Sets the workpiece unclamp operation check timer.

WORK SEATED CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the length of time to check if the workpiece is correctly clamped. Correct workpiece clamp is
recognized when the workpiece correct clamp signal stays on continuously for the time set for this
parameter.

WORK SEATED AIR IS OFF BY CHUCK OPEN

Selects whether or not the air solenoid valve for supplying the correct workpiece clamp sensing air is
automatically turned off when the chuck is opened.

WORK SEATED AIR IS ON BY CHUCK OPEN

Selects whether or not the air solenoid valve for supplying the correct workpiece clamp sensing air is
automatically turned on when the chuck is opened.

CHUCK OPEN/CLOSE PB 1 BUTTON SPEC

Selects whether or not one button is used for opening and closing the chuck. Selection is possible
from one-button specification and the two-button specification (individual buttons for opening and
closing the chuck).

WATCHING WORK SIT WITH WORK PREPARATION FIN PB

Selects whether or not workpiece correct clamp monitor is turned on when the WORK
PREPARATION FIN button is pressed (Correct workpiece clamp detection specification, with APC).
 6115-E P-280
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

MC: STOP WATCHING WORK SIT

Selects whether or not the workpiece correct clamp monitor is turned off if the correct workpiece
clamp confirmation alarm lamp at the machine side is lit.
(Correct workpiece clamp detection specification, with APC)

WORK SEATED AIR IS OFF BY STOP WATCHING WORK SIT

Selects whether or not the air blow for sensing workpiece correct clamp is turned off when the
workpiece correct clamp monitor is off.

WORK SIT COND. IS NG, APC I/L IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the interlock to disable APC operation unless the workpiece correct clamp
signal is turned on.

TAILSTOCK IN-P CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the time the NC regards tailstock spindle advance operation has completed after the tailstock
spindle in-position signal was turned on.

EVEN IF TAILSTOCK IS NOT IN-P, FEED OK

Selects whether or not the interlock that disables cutting feed unless the tailstock spindle is in the in-
position state is released.

WHEN NOT IN-P SPINDLE ROTATING IS MADE INHIBIT

Selects whether or not spindle rotation is disabled unless the tailstock spindle is in the in-position
state.

TAILSTOCK ADVANCE LIMIT IS MADE IN-P MARK

Selects whether or not the advance end confirmation signal is used for the confirmation of the
tailstock spindle’s in-position state.

TAILSTOCK CLAMP/UNCLAMP DEVICE USED

Sets whether or not the tailstock spindle clamp device is used.

TAILSTOCK CLAMP CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the time the NC regards tailstock spindle clamp operation has completed after the tailstock
spindle clamp signal was turned on.

APC I/L OF WORK CLAMP IS INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to ban the APC operation when the workpiece has not been completely
clamped.

EVEN IF ALARM A OR POWER SAVE,CHUCK SOL IS KEPT

Selects whether or not the clamp/unclamp SOL for the jig (chuck) remains turned on while an alarm
A is being raised or the machine is put in power save or ECO idle stop mode.

WORK SEATED AIR IS ON DURING SYSTEM-LINK SW ON

Selects whether or not the work seated confirmation air is blown when the pallet is seated or the
robot/loader system link SW is ON.

WORK CLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the jig (chuck) clamp push button is made ineffective while the operator door
is open.
 6115-E P-281
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

WORK OF SET-UP SIDE IS UNCLAMP, AFTER M60

Selects whether or not the jig at the setup side is unclamped when the M60 command is executed.

CHUCK HIGH/LOW PRESSURE IS EFFECTED

Selects whether or not the chuck high/low pressure switch is made effective.

'CHUCK CLOSE' LOW PS IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the status of the chuck high pressure close confirmation limit switch
in order to confirm that the chuck was completely clamped with low pressure.

'CHUCK OPEN' LOW PS IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the status of the chuck high pressure open confirmation limit switch
in order to confirm that the chuck was completely clamped with low pressure.

LOW PRESSURE CLAMP TIMER

Set the time for detecting the status of the chuck clamp/unclamp confirmation limit switch and chuck
clamp/unclamp SOL in order to confirm that the chuck was completely clamped with low pressure.

THE OIL TEMP. SIGNAL IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the oil temperature check is executed for the hydraulic unit for the jig.

THE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the oil temperature is checked for the hydraulic unit for the jig.

THE OIL LEVEL SIGNAL IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the oil level is checked for the hydraulic unit for the jig.

THE OIL UNIT ON SIGNAL IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the oil unit signal is checked for the hydraulic unit for the jig.

'JIG 2 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the clamped status of the chuck 2 in order to confirm that the chuck
is completely clamped/unclamped.

'JIG 2 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the unclamped status of the chuck 2 in order to confirm that the
chuck is completely clamped/unclamped.

JIG 2 CLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status (clamped/unclamped) of the chuck 2 in order to confirm that
the chuck is completely clamped.

JIG 2 UNCLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status (clamped/unclamped) of the chuck 2 in order to confirm that
the chuck is completely unclamped.

EVEN IF JIG 2 OPENS, CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not cutting feed is made effective when the chuck 2 is unclamped.
 6115-E P-282
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG 2 OPENS

Selects whether or not spindle rotation is inhibited when the chuck 2 is unclamped.

JIG 1,WORK SEATED IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

On the conditions for monitoring work seated state by the jig 1, this parameter is used to select
whether or not the seated confirmation input from the jig 1 is invalid.

JIG 2,WORK SEATED IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

On the conditions for monitoring work seated state by the jig 2, this parameter is used to select
whether or not the seated confirmation input from the jig 2 is invalid.

CHUCK2 GRIPS THE INNER DIAMETER OF THE WORKPEACE

Selects whether or not the inner diameter of the chuck 2 is gripped.

EVEN IF ALARM A OR POWER SAVE,CHUCK2 SOL IS KEPT

Selects whether or not the clamp/unclamp SOL for the jig (chuck) 2 remains turned on while an
alarm A is being raised or the machine is put in power save or ECO idle stop mode.

'JIG 3 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the clamped status of the chuck 3 in order to confirm that the chuck
is completely clamped/unclamped.

'JIG 3 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the unclamped status of the chuck 3 in order to confirm that the
chuck is completely clamped/unclamped.

JIG 3 CLAMP TIMER

Sets the time to detect the status (clamped/unclamped) of the chuck 3 in order to confirm that the
chuck is completely clamped.

JIG 3 UNCLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status (clamped/unclamped) of the chuck 3 in order to confirm that
the chuck 3 is completely unclamped.

EVEN IF JIG 3 OPENS, CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not cutting feed is made effective when the chuck 3 is unclamped.

SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG 3 OPENS

Selects whether or not the spindle rotation disable interlock is made invalid when the chuck 3 is
unclamped.

CHUCK3 GRIPS THE INNER DIAMETER OF THE WORKPEACE

Selects whether or not the inner diameter of the chuck 3 is gripped.

EVEN IF ALARM A OR POWER SAVE,CHUCK3 SOL IS KEPT

Selects whether or not the clamp/unclamp SOL for the jig (chuck) 3 remains turned on while an
alarm A is being raised or the machine is put in power save or ECO idle stop mode.
 6115-E P-283
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

JIG1 UNCLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 1 unclamping command issued by the pushbutton is made
ineffective while the operator door is open.

JIG2 CLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE, WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 2 clamping command issued by the pushbutton is made ineffective
while the operator door is open.

JIG2 UNCLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE, WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 2 unclamping command issued by the pushbutton is made
ineffective while the operator door is open.

JIG3 CLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 3 clamping command issued by the push button is made
ineffective while the operator door is open.

JIG3 UNCLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 3 unclamping command issued by the pushbutton is made
ineffective while the operator door is open.

JIG4 CLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 4 clamping command issued by the push button is made
ineffective while the operator door is open.

JIG4 UNCLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN

Selects whether or not the chuck 4 unclamping command issued by the pushbutton is made
ineffective while the operator door is open.

'JIG4 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the clamped status of the chuck 4 in order to confirm that the chuck
is completely clamped/unclamped.

'JIG4 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the unclamped status of the chuck 4 in order to confirm that the
chuck is completely clamped/unclamped.

JIG4 CLAMP TIMER

Sets the time to detect the status (clamped/unclamped) of the chuck 4 in order to confirm that the
chuck 4 is completely clamped.

JIG4 UNCLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status (clamped/unclamped) of the chuck 4 in order to confirm that
the chuck 4 is completely unclamped.

EVEN IF JIG4 OPENS,CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not cutting feed is made effective when the chuck 4 is open.

SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG4 OPEN

Selects whether or not the spindle rotation disable interlock is made invalid when the chuck 4 is
unclamped.
 6115-E P-284
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

CHUCK4 GRIPS THE INNER DIAMETER OF THE WORKPIECE

Selects whether or not the inner diameter of the chuck 4 is gripped.

EVEN IF ALARM A OR POWER SAVE,JIG4 SOL IS KEPT

Selects whether or not the clamp/unclamp SOL for the jig (chuck) 4 remains turned on while an
alarm A is being raised or the machine is put in power save or ECO idle stop mode.

MIDDLE PRESSURE CLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status (clamped/unclamped) of the middle pressure chuck in order to
confirm that the chuck is clamped with middle pressure.

CHUCK2 HIGH/LOW PRESSURE IS EFFECTED

Selects whether or not the chuck 2 high/low pressure switching type is made effective.

'CHUCK2 CLOSE' LOW PS IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the status of the chuck 2 high pressure close confirmation limit
switch in order to confirm that the chuck 2 was completely closed with low pressure.

'CHUCK2 OPEN' LOW PS IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the status of the chuck 2 high pressure close confirmation limit
switch in order to confirm that the chuck 2 was completely clamped with low pressure.

CHUCK2 LOW PRESSURE CLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status of the chuck 2 clamped/unclamped confirmation limit switch
and chuck clamp/unclamp SOL in order to confirm that the chuck 2 was completely clamped with
low pressure.

CHUCK2 MIDDLE PRESSURE CLAMP TIMER

Sets the time for detecting the status of the chuck 2 clamped/unclamped confirmation limit switch
and chuck clamp/unclamp SOL in order to confirm that the chuck 2 was completely clamped with
middle pressure.

JIG AIR BLOW BUTTON ON/OFF TYPE

Sets the jig (chuck) air blow to one of the following systems: the system discharging air blow while
the pushbutton is pushed and the system that air blow is turned ON/OFF each time the push button
is pushed.

'JIG5 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the clamped status of the chuck 5 is performed in order to confirm
that the chuck was completely clamped/unclamped.

'JIG5 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not to detect the unclamped status of the chuck 5 is performed in order to
confirm that the chuck was completely clamped/unclamped.
 6115-E P-285
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

NC-axis Interlock (Optional)

The AXIS INTERLOCK screen displays the following parameters.

X-AXIS INTERLOCK CONDITION IS MADE EQUAL TO Y, Z-AXIS

Sets whether or not the Y/Z-axis interlock conditions are also applied as the X-axis interlock
conditions.

B-AXIS I/L IS EFFECTIVE FOR ATC CYCLE

Selects whether or not the interlock at the B-axis for the ATC cycle is made effective.

APC

The APC screen displays the following parameters.

DOES NOT JUDGE [APC DOOR OPEN LS IS OFF] ALARM-A

Selects whether or not alarm A, that occurs if the APC door open confirmation signal is turned off
during APC operation, is made invalid.

DOOR OPEN, WORK PREPARATION FIN PB IS INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the WORK PREPARATION FIN button is made invalid when the APC door at
the setup station side is open. (Model: MX-H, MA-H series)

LOCK DOOR BY WORK PREPARATION FIN

Selects whether or not the APC setup door is locked when W. LOAD FINISHED pushbutton is
pressed. (Applicable models: MX-H, MA-H series)

PALLET SET CONFIRMATIVE TIMER

Sets the length of time from the time the pallet seated confirmation signal is ON until the pallet is
regarded to be seated. (Applicable models: MX-H, MA-H series)

CARRIER OUT PALLET EXIST IN APC

Selects whether a pallet on the APC is for unloading or loading when the rotary type 2-pallet APC for
FMS is used.

APC EXCHANGE RANGE (Y-AXIS MINUS SIDE)

Sets the negative Y-axis position where APC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

APC EXCHANGE RANGE (Y-AXIS PLUS SIDE)

Sets the positive Y-axis position where APC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

APC EXCHANGE RANGE (Z-AXIS MINUS SIDE)

Sets the negative Z-axis position where APC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.
 6115-E P-286
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

APC EXCHANGE RANGE (Z-AXIS PLUS SIDE)

Sets the positive Z-axis position where APC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

APC EXCHANGE RANGE (CROSSRAIL MINUS SIDE)

Sets the negative crossrail position where APC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

APC EXCHANGE RANGE (CROSSRAIL PLUS SIDE)

Sets the positive crossrail position where APC operation is possible.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

INCHING IS EFFECTIVE WHEN SET-UP ST DOOR CLOSE

Selects whether or not the inching operation for the setup ST door executed by pushing the
pushbutton is made effective.

WORK PREPARATION UNFINISHED ALARM IS INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the alarm activates if the M60 command is issued while the workpiece is not
prepared.

Additional Axis

The ADDITIONAL AXIS screen displays the following parameters.

A-AXIS:M COMMAND (CLAMP, UNCLAMP) IS MADE ACTIVE

Selects whether or not M commands are used for clamping / unclamping the A-axis instead of
automatic clamp / unclamp. (This setting does not apply to the index table specification.)

B-AXIS:M COMMAND (CLAMP, UNCLAMP) IS MADE ACTIVE

Selects whether or not M commands are used for clamping / unclamping the B-axis instead of
automatic clamp / unclamp. (This setting does not apply to the index table specification.)

C-AXIS:M COMMAND (CLAMP, UNCLAMP) IS MADE ACTIVE

Selects whether or not M commands are used for clamping / unclamping the C-axis instead of
automatic clamp / unclamp. (This setting does not apply to the index table specification.)

NC TABLE IS MADE UNCLAMP AT OTHER START POSITION

Selects whether or not the B-axis NC rotary table is unclamped during APC operation.
(Model: MX-H, MA-H series)
 6115-E P-287
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Cross Rail

The CROSS RAIL screen displays the following parameters.

CROSS AC VERTICAL TRAVEL STOP TIMER

Used for uni-directional positioning of the crossrail.
The setting for the parameter is valid for the crossrail AC motor vertical positioning specification.

CROSS AC VERTICAL TRAVEL UP TIMER

Used for uni-directional positioning of the crossrail.
The setting for this parameter is valid for the crossrail AC motor vertical positioning specification.

VERTICAL TRAVEL RANGE (Y-AXIS) LOWER

Sets the Y-axis position in the negative direction to define the range where crossrail operation is
enabled.

VERTICAL TRAVEL RANGE (Y-AXIS) UPPER

Sets the Y-axis position in the positive direction to define the range where crossrail operation is
enabled.

CROSS TRAIL COVER MOVEMENT INEFFECTIVE

Disables the operation of the crossrail following cover.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCV
and MCR series.

Robot and Loader I/F

The ROBOT LOADER I/F screen displays the following parameters.

ROBOT LOADER I/F IS MADE TYPE-B

Selects the type B interface for the robot/loader interface type D specification. If “OFF” is set, type C
interface is selected.

CYCLE START STANDBY POS. I/L IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the interlock that disables cycle start of the machine if the robot standby
position signal is OFF is made invalid.

AXIS MOVE STANDBY POS. I/L IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the interlock that disables axis movements of the machine if the robot
standby position signal is OFF is made invalid.

DOOR MOVE STANDBY POS. I/L IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the interlock that disables door operation of the machine if the robot standby
position signal is OFF is made invalid.

OPERATION END LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT ON BY M02/M30

Selects whether or not the operation end lamp does not light at the execution of M02 or M30 at the
machine.
 6115-E P-288
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

AUTOMATIC POWER SHUTDOWN SWITCH IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the “AUTO POWER OFF switch ON” is included in the conditions for
executing the power shutoff command output from the robot.

NC OPERATION INTERLOCK IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the interlock that disables NC operation such as program selection is made
invalid for system link operation.

ROBOT ALARM IS MADE ALARM-C

Sets the alarm level for robot related alarms. Setting “ON” sets alarm level C and setting “OFF”
alarm level A.

AUTOMATIC POWER SHUTDOWN MC ALONE

Set this parameter if the automatic power shut-down command is not output to the robot.

CYCLE STOP REQUEST SIGNAL IS B-CONTACT

The output signal of the cycle stop request is set to B-contact (Normally Closed).

CYCLE START BUTTON I/L IS MADE INEFFECTIVE

When the system link mode is ON, the interlock to disable the NC start button is deactivated.

AUTOMATIC POWER SHUTOFF WAITING TIMER

Sets the stand-by timer before the power is automatically shut down.

INDICATION OF WORK CONDITION IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the workpiece status indication is made effective in the robot/loader I/F type
C.

Special Specification

The SPECIAL SPECIFICATION screen displays the following parameters.

PARAMETER BIT (n)

Parameter bit for user’s special specification.

PARAMETER WORD (n)

Parameter word for user’s special specification.

PARAMETER LONG WORD (n)

Parameter long word for user’s special specification.

Attachment

AT-INDEX ERROR ALARM RESET

Releases the alarm 2748 Attachment index error.

AT MOVABLE RANGE (Y-AXIS: P)

Sets the positive Y-axis position where the attachment can swivel.
 6115-E P-289
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

AT MOVABLE RANGE (Y-AXIS: N)

Sets the negative Y-axis position where the attachment can swivel.

3-3-4. Machine System Parameter

For system parameters, values specific to the individual machines are set by the machine tool
manufacturer. Due to the nature of the parameters, it is not necessary to change the setting for
system parameters at the user. If it becomes necessary to change the setting for a system
parameter, consult the machine tool manufacturer and change the setting only under the
supervision of the machine tool manufacturer.

Spindle

The SPINDLE screen displays the following parameters.

SPINDLE OSCILATE REVOLUTION

Sets the spindle oscillation speed applied for changing the spindle gears.

SPINDLE OSCILATE FREQUENCY

Sets the delay time for starting motor oscillation after outputting the spindle gear change solenoid
signal.

SPINDLE OSCILATE PERIOD

Sets the time for which the motor rotates to oscillate the spindle.

TORQUE LIMITER
Sets a limit value for limiting spindle torque.
(Set value is converted in the rate of “32767 = 100%”.)

AT-SP POSITION
Sets the direction of the attachment.

SPINDLE MIST LUBRICATION DROPS

Sets the number of oil drops per minute delivered by the spindle oil mist lubricator.

SPINDLE ORIENT POSITION

Sets the offset amount for spindle orientation.

2ND SPINDLE MIST LUBRICATION DROPS

Sets the number of drops supplied to the 2nd spindle by the oil mist lubrication unit for one minute.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

OIL AIR LUBRICATION OUTPUT PERIOD

Sets the oil air lubrication output period when the spindle is not operating.
 6115-E P-290
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

OIL AIR LUBRICATION REGULATE MODE

Selects the lubrication adjustment mode when the oil air lubrication alarm level is changed form A to
C.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

ATC

The ATC screen displays the following parameters.

PROGRAM ORIENTATION OFFSET(M19)

Sets the spindle indexing position when the M19/M118/M119 commands, RS command or the
spindle indexing command issued by the operation panel is issued.

PROGRAM ORIENTATION OFFSET IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the spindle indexing position can be changed when the M19/M118/M119
commands, RS command or the spindle indexing command issued by the operation panel is issued.

OIL AIR LUB. OUTPUT TIME AFTER SPINDLE STOP

Sets the discharging time for the oil air lubrication while the spindle stops operating.
If this parameter is set to 0, oil air lubrication is discharged while the spindle stops operating.

ATC SEQUENCE NO.

Sets the ATC operation sequence number.

ATC ARM A/B MODE

Selects the tool change arm mode (A or B)
1: A mode
2: B mode

ATC ARM TORQUE LIMITER IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Selects whether or not the values set on the ATC ARM TORQUE LIMITER screen are disregarded.

BLANK CAP (1/0)

Selects whether the spindle side cap is present or not for the simplified 5-pallet ATC
 6115-E P-291
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

APC

The APC screen displays the following parameters.

APC SEQUENCE NO.

Sets the APC operation sequence number.

PALLET A/B MODE

Selects the pallet mode (A, B).
1: A mode
2: B mode

APC AIR BLOW OUTPUT TIME

Sets the duration for which the APC cleaning air blow is ON. (Applicable model: VH-40)

PALLET CLAMP OUTPUT TIME

Sets the duration from the time the 4-pallet APC starts lowering the arm until the pallet pressure-
reduced clamp solenoid is turned ON. (Applicable model: VH-40)

APC ARM DOWN SPEED-2 TIME

Sets the duration from the time the 4-pallet APC starts lowering the arm until the arm lowering speed
2 solenoid is turned ON. (Applicable model: VH-40)

APC ARM DOWN SPEED-3 TIME

Sets the duration from the time the 4-pallet APC starts lowering the arm until the arm lowering speed
3 solenoid is turned ON. (Applicable model: VH-40)

PALLET AIR BLOW TIMER (UP)

Sets the timer for the air blow to be turned on when the APC fork is raised.

PALLET AIR BLOW TIMER (DOWN)

Sets the timer for the air blow to be turned on when the APC fork is lowered.

APC TURNING SPPED OVERRIDE VALUE

Sets the APC turning speed override value.
100% is set when 0 is set in AUTO/MDI mode. 50% is set if a value above 51 is set in MANUAL
mode.

TF-A ADVANCE POSITION

Sets the target position to which the TF-A advances (machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A RETREAT POSITION

Sets the target position to which the TF-A retracts (setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.
 6115-E P-292
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TF-A ADVANCE TORQUE WATCH POSITION

Sets the position where the NC starts monitoring of TF-A advance torque (machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A RETREAT TORQUE WATCH POSITION

Sets the position where the NC starts monitoring of TF-A retract torque (setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A TORQUE WATCH TIMER

Sets the time for which the NC ignores the torque generated when the TF-A axis starts movement.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A ADVANCE TORQUE WATCH OVERRIDE

Sets the feedrate override in the torque monitoring range applied when TF-A advances (machine
side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A RETREAT TORQUE WATCH OVERRIDE

Sets the feedrate override in the torque monitoring range applied when the TF-A retracts (setup
side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A ADVANCE TORQUE WATCH DATA

Sets the torque monitoring value with which the NC judges that the TF-A has stopped advancing
(machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A RETREAT TORQUE WATCH DATA

Sets the torque monitoring value with which the NC judges that the TF-A has stopped retracting
(setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A ADVANCE TORQUE LIMIT DATA

Sets the torque limited when the TF-A advances in the torque monitoring range (machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-A RETREAT TORQUE LIMIT DATA

Sets the torque limited when the TF-A retracts in the torque monitoring range (setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.
 6115-E P-293
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TF-B ADVANCE POSITION

Sets the target position to which the TF-B advances (machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B RETREAT POSITION

Sets the target position to which the TF-B retracts (setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B ADVANCE TORQUE WATCH POSITION

Sets the position where the NC starts monitoring of TF-B advance torque (machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B RETREAT TORQUE WATCH POSITION

Sets the position where the NC starts monitoring of TF-B retract torque (setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B TORQUE WATCH TIMER

Sets the time for which the NC ignores the torque generated when the TF-B axis starts movement.
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B ADVANCE TORQUE WATCH OVERRIDE

Sets the feedrate override in the torque monitoring range applied when TF-B advances (machine
side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B RETREAT TORQUE WATCH OVERRIDE

Sets the feedrate override in the torque monitoring range applied when the TF-B retracts (setup
side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B ADVANCE TORQUE WATCH DATA

Sets the torque monitoring value with which the NC judges that the TF-B has stopped advancing
(machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B RETREAT TORQUE WATCH DATA

Sets the torque monitoring value with which the NC judges that the TF-B has stopped retracting
(setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.
 6115-E P-294
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

TF-B ADVANCE TORQUE LIMIT DATA

Sets the torque limited when the TF-B advances in the torque monitoring range (machine side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

TF-B RETREAT TORQUE LIMIT DATA

Sets the torque limited when the TF-B retracts in the torque monitoring range (setup side).
This parameter is available depending on the machine specifications, and mainly applied to MCR
series.

PALLET STATION CONTROL COUNTER

Shows the sequence number for advancing/retracting the pallet.
The sequence number can be set in adjustment mode.

APC FORK UP TIMER

Sets the required time after issue of the APC fork lift-up command until the fork lift-up output is
performed.

APC FORK ADVANCE TIMER (INPUT LOGIC)

Sets the required time after detection of the APC fork advance confirmation signal until the fork lift-
up command is executed.

APC FORK RETRACT TIMER (INPUT LOGIC)

Sets the required time after detection of the APC fork retract confirmation signal until the fork lift-
down command is executed.

APC FORK ADVANCE OUTPUT TIMER

Sets the time for which the APC fork advance SOL is turned on.

APC FORK RETRACT OUTPUT TIMER

Sets the time for which the APC fork retract SOL is turned on.

PALLET ESCAPE MOVEMENT COUNTER

Shows the APC retract number.
The operation number can be set in adjustment mode.

CHECK TIME WITH A PALETTE

Sets the time for checking the presence of the A pallet.

CHECK TIME WITH B PALETTE

Sets the time for checking the presence of the B pallet.

L CYLINDER RETREAT OUTPUT TIME

Sets the time for performing the L cylinder retract output.

S CYLINDER RETREAT OUTPUT TIME

Sets the time for performing the S cylinder retract output.
 6115-E P-295
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

AAC

The AAC screen displays the following parameters.

AAC SEQUENCE NO.

Sets the AAC operation sequence number.

AAC CROSS POSITION

Sets the crossrail position when carrying out the AAC operation cycle.

AAC CROSS UP-POSITIONING

Sets the crossrail retraction amount when carrying out the AAC operation cycle.

AT-C AXIS 0 ANGLE INTERLOCK INEFFECTIVE

Selects whether the interlock for confirming 0° position is effective or not in attachment locking
process in AAC operation cycle.

Home Position

The machine user parameter for home position consists of several pages.
Use the PAGE keys to change the screen page.
The HOME POSITION screen displays the following parameters.

AUTOMATIC OVERRIDE IS MADE EFFECTIVE: HPn

Selects whether or not automatic overriding is valid to the feedrate for positioning to the home
position (HPn).

THE VALUE AUTOMATICAL OVERRIDE

Sets the override value applied in positioning to a home position.

MCS

The MCS screen displays the following parameters.

MCS CHARGING TIME

Sets the time to wait until the MCS (servo controller) gets ready.

Power Sequence

The POWER SEQUENCE screen displays the following parameters.

COMPULSORY POWER SHUTDOWN DELAY TIMER

Sets the delay timer to forcibly shut down the power even if the power shutdown conditions are not
satisfied.

OPERATION POWER SHUTDOWN ALARM CHECK TIMER

Sets the time for waiting until the power is actually shut down after the start of power shut down
sequence. If the power is not shut down even after the elapse of the time set for this parameter,
alarm message “4709 Alarm D Managing operating power shutdown” is displayed.
 6115-E P-296
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Axis Exchange

The AXIS EXCHANGE screen displays the following parameters.

ALARM CHECK TIMER FOR LS EXCHANGE

Sets the time for waiting for the axis change complete signal (sensor signal).

ATC Arm Parameter

The ATC ARM PARAMETER screen displays the following parameters.

ATC ARM PARAMETER

Specifies the parameter that controls the tool change arm operation steps.

ATC Arm Torque Limiter

The ATC ARM TORQUE LIMITER screen displays the following parameters.

DEGREE, LIMITER
The maximum output torque of the tool change arm motor can be set by cam angles as the torque
limit. The maximum motor torque (LIMITER) is set taking 300% of rated motor output as 100 (%).

PLC Axis Position (Optional)

POSITIONING n
Sets the position of positioning point No. n for the machine axes.

Door

The DOOR screen displays the following parameters.

DOOR OPEN/CLOSE WATCHING TIMER

Sets the time for monitoring the turning on of the door open/close confirmation signal after the
execution of the door open/close command.

Attachment

ATTACHMENT COUNTER
Shows the direction of attachment.

SPINDLE OFFSET
Sets the offset amount when the spindle is indexed.

SPINDLE OFFSET (SWIVEL HEAD)

Sets the spindle index offset amount when the swivel head or attachment is indexed.

SPINDLE OFFSET (AT-B)

Sets the spindle index offset amount when the B-axis of B/C-axis attachment is indexed.
 6115-E P-297
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SPINDLE OFFSET (AT2-B)

If the machine is equipped with two B/C-axis attachments, this parameter sets the spindle index
offset amount when the B-axis of the second B/C-axis attachment is indexed.

SPINDLE OFFSET (AT-C)

Sets the spindle index offset amount when the C-axis of B/C-axis attachment is indexed.

SPINDLE OFFSET (AT2-C)

If the machine is equipped with two B/C-axis attachments, this parameter sets the spindle index
offset amount when the C-axis of the second B/C-axis attachment is indexed.

ATTACHMENT CARRIER STANDBY POSITION

Sets the AAC carrier waiting position.

AT-B (1DEG) INDEX IN-P

Sets the B-axis in-position width of B-axis 1° index attachment.

AT-C (1DEG) INDEX IN-P

Sets the C-axis in-position width of C-axis 1° index attachment.

ATTACHMENT BACKLASH (CW)

Sets the backlash amount of C-axis 5°/15° index attachment when it rotates in CW direction.

ATTACHMENT BACKLASH (CCW)

Sets the backlash amount of C-axis 5°/15° index attachment when it rotates in CCW direction.

AT-B BACKWARD VALUE (RETRY)

Sets the motor return amount when positioning of B-axis of B/C-axis attachment is completed.

ATTACHMENT BACKLASH (AT-B)

Sets the backlash amount of B-axis 5° index attachment.

ATTACHMENT INDEX COUNTER

Internal counter for controlling attachment index angels (5°)

ATTACHMENT INDEX COUNTER (AT-B)

Internal counter for controlling B-axis attachment index angles

ATTACHMENT INDEX COUNTER (AT-C)

Internal counter for controlling C-axis 1° attachment index angles

ATTACHMENT MIST LUBE

Sets the number of lube drops supplied for 1 minute by the attachment oil mist lubrication unit.

BLANK TOOL NO.

Sets the adaptor number mounted when the swivel head is used.

ATTACHMENT TORQUE LIMIT (OFFSET)

Sets the offset value of attachment torque limit.
 6115-E P-298
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

SPINDLE 2 OFFSET
Sets the offset amount when built-in attachment spindle is indexed.

2ND SPINDLE ATTACHMENT MIST LUBE

Sets the number of oil drops for 1 minute supplied by the attachment oil mist lubrication unit.

SPINDLE 2 OFFSET (2)

Sets the offset amount when the 2nd built-in attachment spindle is indexed.

NC Axis

The NC AXIS screen displays the following parameters.

NC 4TH AXIS CLAMP DELAY TIMER

Sets the time required after issue of the 4th NC axis clamp command until clamping is completed.

NC 5TH AXIS CLAMP DELAY TIMER

Sets the time required after issue of the 5th NC axis unclamp command until clamping is completed.

NC 4TH AXIS CLAMP CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the time taken after the 4th NC axis clamp confirmation is turned on until the servo is reset.

NC 4TH AXIS UNCLAMP CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the required time after confirmation of the unclamp of 4th NC axis until axial movement is
enabled.

NC 5TH AXIS CLAMP CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the required time after confirmation of the clamp of 5th NC axis until axial movement is
enabled.

NC 5TH AXIS UNCLAMP CONFIRMATION TIMER

Sets the required time after confirmation of the unclamp of 5th NC axis until axial movement is
enabled.

NC 4TH AXIS TORQUE LIMIT

Sets the torque limit for 4th NC axis.

NC 5TH AXIS TORQUE LIMIT

Sets the torque limit for 5th NC axis.

NC 4TH AXIS UNCLAMP, FALL PREVENTION

Selects whether or not the servo is turned on when the clamp SOL for 4th NC axis is turned off.

NC 5TH AXIS UNCLAMP, FALL PREVENTION

Selects whether or not the servo is turned on when the clamp SOL for 5th NC axis is turned off.

NEXT BLOCK, NC 4TH AXIS CLAMP DELAY TIMER

Sets the time taken after the 4th NC axis unclamp output is turned off until the next block is read in
the machining program.
 6115-E P-299
SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING

Coolant

The COOLANT screen displays the following parameters.

S-AIR BLOW IS ACTIVE WITHOUT SP IS ZERO

Disables the interlock function that bans spindle rotation during spindle air blow output.

SEMIDRY UNIT:BOTH THROUGH-SP AND NOZZLE

There are two coolant systems: semidry thru-spindle coolant and external nozzle coolant. This
parameter is used to select whether or not both systems can be operated at the same time.
 6115-E P-300
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

This NC has the parameter I/O function for inputting or outputting various set data.
The data input/output function of this NC unit is used to transfer the tool data and various parameter data set
in the NC unit to the internal memory or USB flash drive, or used to enter the previously saved parameters in
the NC unit. Using the data input/output function allows the user to restore the various data that have been
used in past operations and set in the NC unit to the original data.
For the data input and output done on the TOOL DATA screen, refer to 2-2-8. TOOL DATA IN/OUT SECTION
2 TOOL DATA in DATA OPERATION.

4-1. Parameter Input/Output Operations

There are the following three parameter input/output operations.

 Input:
Reads the data from the internal memory or USB flash drive and sets the data in the NC.

 Output:
Outputs the data set in the NC to the internal memory or USB flash drive in a file format.

 Verify:
Verifies (collates and compares) the data file in the internal memory or USB flash drive with the
data set in the NC.

The parameter input/output operation can be carried out in two modes (tool data setting mode, and
parameter setting mode). This operation can be done in all the operation modes (automatic, MDI,
manual).
Common operating procedure of the parameter input/output operation is as follows:

(1) Select [F7] (DATA IN/OUT) from the function menu displayed in each setting mode.
The PARAMETER INPUT/OUTPUT pop-up function menu is displayed.

ME32125R1101700020001

Fig.4-1 PARAMETER INPUT/OUTPUT Pop-up Function Menu

(2) Select [F1] (INPUT), [F2] (OUTPUT), or [F3] (VERIFY).

Each processing window (INPUT pop-up window, OUTPUT pop-up window, VERIFY pop-up
window) will be displayed.
 6115-E P-301
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4-1-1. INPUT
The procedure for inputting various setting data is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (INPUT) from the PARAMETER INPUT/OUTPUT pop-up function menu.
The INPUT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101700030001

Fig.4-2 INPUT Pop-up Window

2 Select a device from which data is input.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu. The device
changes each time [F2] is pressed.
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select a desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).

 When OTHERS is selected at DEVICE:

Enter any device name into the device name input area to the right of the device selection
area.
The device name input area can only be entered when OTHERS is selected.

3 Specify the file name to be read.

A.TOP is specified by default when the INPUT pop-up window is displayed.
 6115-E P-302
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4 Check the file name whose data is to be input.

Check the input file name and input check message displayed when inputting under the
parameter input/output function.
Pressing F7 will start input.
Pressing F8 will end input.

ME32125R1101700030002

Fig.4-3 Input check message

5 Select [F7] (YES).

The data selected in the INPUT pop-up window is read.
The INPUT PROGRESS pop-up window is displayed to indicate the progress of reading. If
there are any comments in the input file and so forth, this pop-up window displays its
description. When the message “CONTINUE?” is displayed, select [F6] (YES) to continue input
operation. To interrupt or terminate the input processing, select [F8] (CANCEL).
 6115-E P-303
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4-1-2. OUTPUT
The procedure for outputting various setting data is as follows:

Procedure :

1 Select [F2] (OUTPUT) from the DATA IN/OUT operation pop-up function menu.
The OUTPUT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101700040001

Fig.4-4 OUTPUT Pop-up Window

2 Select the device that has a file to be output.

To select the device, press [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-up function menu. The displayed device
changes each time you press the function key.
Or, you can select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, and then
select a desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).

 When OTHERS is selected at DEVICE:

Enter any device name into the device name input area to the right of the device selection
area. The device name input area becomes valid only when OTHERS is selected.

3 Specify the file name to be output.

A.TOP is specified by default when the OUTPUT pop-up window is displayed.

4 When any comment is put in a file to be output, enter the comment into the comment input
area.
It is possible to enter up to 80 characters in the comment.
 6115-E P-304
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

5 Specify a output file format.

Each time you press the check box [F1], presence and absence of check mark are changed
over. When a check mark is put, the data is output in the CSV format.

6 There is no need to select the tape code.

7 Select [F7] (OK).

The OUTPUT pop-up window is displayed to specify output data.

ME32125R1101700040002

Fig.4-5 OUTPUT Pop-up Window (output data specified)

If a file with the same file name specified by the item 3) already exists in the device at the
output destination, the message “FILE EXIST. OVERWRITE OK?” is displayed. When [F6]
(YES) is selected, the OUTPUT pop-up window (output data specified) is displayed.
Select [F7] (NO) to return to the input operation in the OUTPUT pop-up window.

8 Specify the P number of the data to be output.

Specify the P number of the data to be output by referring to the list of the P NO. (to the left of
the window).
To output individual P number, specify the P number only to the input area to the left.
To output more than one P number, input the start No. in the left input area and the end No. in
the right input area.
 6115-E P-305
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

9 Select whether or not Q number is specified.

Move the cursor to the input area “APPOINT A Q NO.” and select whether or not Q number is
specified.
To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu. Presence and
absence of the check park alternate each time you press [F2].

 When no Q number is specified:

Data of the parameter specified by the P number are all output. In this case proceed with
the step 10).

 When Q number is specified:

Specify what number of the parameter of the data specified as the beginning number of P
is output. To output individual Q number, specify the Q number only to the input area to the
left.
To output more than one Q number, input the start No. in the left input area and the end
No. in the right input area. After specifying a Q number, proceed with the step 10).

[Supplement]

A relationship between the output data and P number (large classification) and Q number
(medium classification) is as follows:
Usually the Q number is a subscripted number for the array.
For the special Q number, refer to “4-1-4. Correspondence between Q Numbers and
Parameters” in this section.
 6115-E P-306
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

Range of
Large group Medium group No.P Remarks
No.Q
Tool length offset Max. Q number is 999
200 1 to 999
value The data begins with R.
Tool data
Tool diameter Max. Q number is 999
210 1 to 999
offset value The data begins with R.
Max. Q number conforms to the
Zero-point offset spec. code (20,50,100,200).
100 1 to 200
value The data begins with the address
character of an axis.
The maximum Q number
conforms to the specification
Common variable 300 1 to 1000
code. (200, 1000)
The data begins with R.
Max. Q number conforms to the
number of total points.
System parameter 400 1 to 104 O.P.W.No.33
The data begins with the address
character of an axis.
The data begins with the address
User parameter 410 1 to 32
character of an axis.
Thread pitch offset
600 1 to 2304 The data begins with R.
amount
Optional parameter
700 1 to 200 The data begins with R.
(long word)
Parameter
Optional parameter
710 1 to 200 The data begins with R.
(word)
Optional parameter
720 1 to 120 The data begins with R.
(bit)
Outputs only when DNC-B is
Communication
900 1 to 14 selected.
parameter byte
The data begins with R.
Outputs only when NC operation
NC operation hour
910 1 to 5 monitor is selected.
meter counter
The data begins with R.
Outputs only when NC operation
NC operation hour
911 1 to 5 monitor is selected.
setting
The data begins with R.
Outputs only when NC operation
NC work counter
920 1 to 5 monitor is selected.
count
The data begins with R.
Outputs only when NC operation
NC work counter
921 1 to 5 monitor is selected.
setting
The data begins with R.
 6115-E P-307
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

10 Specify whether to perform punching continuously.

The check mark appears and disappears alternately each time you press [F2] (NEXT) in the
pop-up function menu.
When the check mark is selected, this window appears again after normal termination of output
operation for the convenience of continuous output.
At this time, the NC recognizes the successively output data as a single file without sending the
END code.

11 Select [F7] (OK).

The data being set in the OUTPUT pop-up window is punched. During data output, the
OUTPUT PROGRESS pop-up window is displayed. Select [F8] (CANCEL) to interrupt and
terminate the output operation.

[Supplement]

If the data are special values, the NC outputs the following codes:
R Normal data
R/0 EMPTY
R/1+ Overflow
R/2- Overflow
R/3+ Underflow
R/4- Underflow
 6115-E P-308
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4-1-3. VERIFY
The verifying operation procedure of various setting data is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Select [F3] (VERIFY) from the DATA IN/OUT operation pop-up function menu.
The VERIFY pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101700050001

Fig.4-6 VERIFY Pop-up Window

2 Select the device that has a verify destination file.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu. The device
changes each time you select [F2].
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select a desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).

 When OTHERS is selected at DEVICE:

Enter any device name into the device name input area to the right of the device selection
area.
The device name input area can only be used when OTHERS is selected.

3 Specify the verify destination file name.

A.TOP is specified by default when the VERIFY pop-up window is displayed.
 6115-E P-309
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4 Specify the allowable range for the verifying operation.

Positive integer can only be specified as allowable range. The number of up to 8 digits can be
entered. The initial value is “0”.
The values specified in the allowable range are given different units depending on the
parameter as shown in the Table below.

Linear axis, tool length offset, tool diameter offset 0.001 mm

mm Rotary axis 0.0001 degree
Data Others 1
setting
unit Linear axis, tool length offset, tool diameter offset 0.0001 inch
Inch Rotary axis 0.0001 degree
Others 1

[Supplement]

For the data such as system parameters or axis data set at the user parameters, the object
for verification is the displayed minimum number (below decimal point) to which the
allowable range is applied.
The NC optional parameter word and long word for parameter setting are compared as it is
because of no decimal point.
The parameters subject to comparison including measurement error are listed below.

Unit of allowable range

P No. Medium classification
mm inch
Linear axis: 0.001 mm Linear axis: 0.0001 inch
100 Zero-point offset value Rotary axis: 0.0001 Rotary axis: 0.0001
degree degree
200 Tool length offset value 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch
210 Cutter radius compensation value 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch
Linear axis: 0.001 mm Linear axis: 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis: 0.0001 Rotary axis: 0.0001
400 System parameter
degree degree
Others:1 Others: 1
Linear axis: 0.001 mm Linear axis: 0.0001 inch
410 User parameter Rotary axis: 0.0001 Rotary axis: 0.0001
degree degree
Thread pitch error compensation
600 1 1
value
700 Optional parameter (long word) 1 1
710 Optional parameter (word) 1 1
 6115-E P-310
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

5 Select [F7] (OK).

Data set in the VERIFY pop-up window is input. (This is not reflected on existing parameters.)
The PROGRESS OF VERIFY pop-up window is displayed to indicate the progress of
verification. If there are any comments and so forth in the input file, this pop-up window
displays its description. When the message “CONTINUE?” is displayed, select [F6] (YES) to
continue reading.
To interrupt or complete the verifying processing, select [F8] (CANCEL).
If entire data cannot be contained within the allowable range, large/medium classification of the
mismatch data, mismatched input values, and current parameter values are displayed.
Select [F6] (YES) to continue verifying operation, and select [F7] (NO) to interrupt and
terminate the verifying processing.
When the verifying operation is completed up to the final line, the message “ALL AGREED” is
displayed in the PROGRESS OF VERIFY pop-up window.

6 Select [F8] (OK).

The PROGRESS OF VERIFY pop-up window is closed to complete verification.
 6115-E P-311
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4-1-4. Correspondence between Q Numbers and Parameters

Parameter names that correspond to Q numbers are as follows:

System Parameters (P400)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1. Positive travel limit
2. Negative travel limit
3. Screw pitch compensation in positive direction
4. Screw pitch compensation in negative direction
5. In-position
6. Not used
7. Zero point (machine)
8. In-position (H)
9. Spindlehead position (front)
10. Spindlehead position (left)
11. Spindlehead position (rear)
12. Spindlehead position (right)
13. Not used
14. Misalignment compensation
15. Positive inductosyn range
16. Negative inductosyn range
17. Not used
18. Not used
19. B-axis reference position
20. Barrier (X, Z)
21. Inductosyn offset
22. Encoder offset
23. Positive travel limit 2
24. Negative travel limit 2
25. Screw pitch compensation interval
26. Number of screw pitch points
27 to 40 Not used
41 to 72 Home positions (1) to (32)
73 to 104 Home position shifting order (1) to (32)
 6115-E P-312
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

User Parameters (P410)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1. Positive programmable limit (work)
2. Negative programmable limit (work)
3. Positive programmable limit (machine)
4. Negative programmable limit (machine)
5. G60 travel range
6. Backlash
7. Clamp in-position width

Screw Pitch Compensation (600)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1 to Data in the screw pitch compensation area is sequential output.
(The data is represented as Q*R* in the address order without being
separated for each axis.)

DNC-B Communication Parameter Byte (900)

The following parameter values are represented with 8 bits.

[Q number] [Description of parameters]
1. Communication device
0: CH_A 1: CH_B
2. Communication speed (BPS)
0: 2400 BPS 1: 4800 BPS 2: 9600 BPS 3: 19200 BPS 4: 38400 BPS
5: 89300 BPS 6: 110 BPS 7: 150 BPS 8: 300 BPS 9: 600 BPS
10: 1200 BPS
3. RS232C stop bit
0: 1-stop bit 1: 2-stop bits
4. RS232C parity
0: EVEN 1: ODD 2: NON
5. Transmission code
0: ISO 1: ASCII
6. End code
0: ETX 1: CR
7. Protocol A/B
0: Protocol A 1: Protocol B
8. NC program transfer method
0: Without designation of file name 1: With designation of file name
9. End DC3 code
0: DC3 code is sent 1: DC3 code is not sent
10. SYN/NAK
0: SYN/NAK is used 1: SYN/NAK is not used
11. M02 reset output
0: M02 reset is output 1: M02 reset is not output
 6115-E P-313
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

Counting NC Operation Time (P910)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1. Power ON time (count)
2. NC start time (count)
3. Spindle rotating time (count)
4. Cutting time (count)
5. External input time (count)

Setting NC Operation Time (P911)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1. Power ON time (set)
2. NC start time (set)
3. Spindle rotating time (set)
4. Cutting time (set)
5. External input time (set)

Counting by NC Work Counter (P920)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1 to 5 NC work counter (count)

Setting NC Work Counter (P921)

[Q number] [Description of parameters]

1 to 5 NC work counter (setting)

4-1-5. Data Format

FD, MD Device

L L
F F
ME32125R1101700150001

The FD or MD device stores the program by eliminating file name starting with $ and tape delimiter
(end code). Only the parameters indicated with P, Q, R, X, Y, Z are stored.
 6115-E P-314
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

4-1-6. Supplementary Explanation of Parameter Input/Output Function

The parameter input/output function allows you to use CSV format for comma-separation as an
output format as described in the examples below:

Parameter Output Using OSP Function and Input Using Table Calculation Software

Procedure :

1 Press DATA IN/OUT in parameter setting, zero setting, or tool data setting mode.
Then, press [F2] (OUTPUT) to open the OUTPUT pop-up window.

2 Put a checkmark in the CSV FORM checkbox in OUTPUT pop-up window.

There is no need to select the tape code.

3 Run the table calculation software on your personal computer.

4 It is advisable to set the attribute of characters to the cells that you want to use.

Note
See the precautions at “Editing with Table ... Data by OSP” described below.

5 Operate your PC according to the software operating procedure so that the table calculation
software inputs the data.

Editing with Table Calculation Software and Inputting or Verifying Edited Data by
OSP

[Supplement]

 When editing the data using the table calculation software, enter 8-bit alphanumeric
characters while paying attention to the unit system for setting data.
 When inputting data into OSP, select the correct unit system for setting data.
 After input, check that the data is correctly set in the OSP by displaying the parameter data
screens (Some parameters may not be input correctly in case where the unit system used for
input differs from that for output.)

* The unit system for setting data is set on the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (INPUT UNIT
SYSTEM) screen selected from the display change menu in the parameter setting mode.
 6115-E P-315
SECTION 4 PARAMETER I/O FUNCTION

When writing data using the table calculation software, proceed as follows:

Procedure :

1 Write data using the Save or Save As button of the table calculation software.

2 When saving a file, select CSV or Comma Delimited as a file type. The file name must be OSP-
formatted (see below).
File name in OSP format:
(An alphabet) + (Max 15 alphanumeric characters with “-” usable) + “.” + (An alphabet) + (1 or
2 alphanumeric characters)

[Supplement]

1) Suppose you use the table calculation software to input and edit the data which has been
output in 1-mm unit set in OSP and you operate the OSP to input the edited data by setting the
Real number command = Y and 1/1000 mm as the unit system. The following problem may
occur:
[Probable problem]
If the table calculation software inputs and writes data when an attribute of the cell is not
Characters, some software may automatically convert the data into wrong data; for example
100.000 is converted into 100.
When Real number command = Y and the unit system 1/1000 mm are selected for OSP, the
OSP inputs 100.000 correctly as 100.000 mm but it inputs 100 as 0.100 mm. Wrong data is
thus set in the OSP.
2) The OSP does not check the number of digits below decimal point. For example, when the
inch unit system (1-inch command) is selected for OSP, the OSP generates no error even if it
inputs a value having 3 decimal numbers. Meanwhile, when the metric system (1-mm
command) is selected, the OSP generates no error even if it inputs a value having 4 decimal
numbers.
Ensure the correct unit system is selected, including the unit systems of 1/1000 mm or 1/
10000 inch, before inputting or writing data.
3) You do not need to specify whether the file type is CVS or not when inputting or verifying data
using the OSP parameter input/output function. The OSP read data by ignoring commas as a
delimiter of words. Operate the OSP in the same way as you handle non-CVS file. However,
you must specify the extension code unless it is TOP. For example, specify A. CSV if so.
 6115-E P-316
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-1. Basic Screen in the Program Operation Mode

There are two screens in the program operation mode: the DIRECTORY screen on which program
file operations are performed, and the PROGRAM EDITING screen on which program sources are
edited, created, and displayed.
When the optional Advanced IGF-M is provided, the IGF DATA sheet and the NC PROGRAM sheet
are displayed on the right top of the screen. This section describes the case without the optional
Advanced IGF-M or the case when the NC PROGRAM sheet is selected. For the detail of the IGF
DATA sheet, refer to OSP-300M ADVANCED ONE TOUCH IGF-M OPERATION REFERENCE
MANUAL in a separate volume.

5-1-1. DIRECTORY Screen

The DIRECTORY screen is displayed in two forms: the single directory screen that displays detailed
directory information, and the double directory screen that displays two sets of directory information.
To display the DIRECTORY screen, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Press the (EDIT AUX) mode selection key.

The indicating lamp at the upper of the key lights and the program
operation mode is established.
The DIRECTORY screen is displayed. ME32125R1101800020001

ME32125R1101800020002

Fig.5-1 DIRECTORY Screen

 6115-E P-317
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Details on the information displayed on the screen are given below.

DIRECTORY
Indicates the active mode.
(title bar)
Indicates the device in which the search is to be carried out
MD1: *.*
(“MD1” in the case of the screen above).
(Specified device)
Indicates the search condition for files displayed in the data table
(Search condition)
(“*.*” in the case of the screen above).
Indicates the file names in the designated device, and their size,
Data table
date of creation, and protection status.
Indicates the format of the device whose directory information is
NTFS
displayed. There are three possibilities: OSP, NTFS, and
(device format)
UNKNOWN.
FREE Indicates the size of the unused memory area of the device.

 The data table can be scrolled either with the page keys or with the up/down cursor keys.

 If the file name of a directory is displayed in the data table, the file information in the directory
can be displayed by moving the cursor to this directory and pressing the (WRITE) key.

Function Menu
The following function menu is displayed on the DIRECTORY screen.

ME32125R1101800020003

Fig.5-2 DIRECTORY Screen Function Menu

5-1-2. PROGRAM EDITING Screen

The PROGRAM EDITING screen is displayed on selecting [F2] (EDIT) or [F3] (NEW FILE) from the
function menu. Note that when NEW FILE is selected, a pop-up function menu is displayed, and it is
necessary to select [F1] (I-MAP) from this function menu and then input a new file name.
The PROGRAM EDITING screen is displayed in two forms: the single file editing screen, which
displays one program source, and the double file editing screen, which displays two program
sources.
The double file editing screen is displayed in the following way: select [F7] (ANOTHER FILE) from
the function menu while the single file editing screen is displayed, select any file from the ANOTHER
FILE pop-up window, then select [F2] (EDIT) or [F3] (NEW FILE) from the pop-up function menu.
Which of the two files displayed in the double file editing screen is subject to editing operations is
selected with [F7] (L/R CHANGE) in the function menu.
 6115-E P-318
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Single/double File Editing Screens

ME32125R1101800040001

Fig.5-3 Single/Double File Editing Screens

EDIT/LIST (title bar) Indicates the active mode.

INSERT/OVERWRITE (title bar) Indicates the input mode.
Indicates the line number (in absolute terms) of the
LINE (title bar)
cursor position.
(Program source display area(s)) Displays the program source being edited.
MD1: A.MIN
Indicates the device name and file name.
(device name: file name)

 The program source data can be scrolled by using the page keys or with the up/down cursor
keys.
 6115-E P-319
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Function Menu

The contents of the function menus displayed on the PROGRAM EDITING screen are identical for
the single file editing screen and the double file editing screen.

ME32125R1101800050001

Fig.5-4 Function Menu

The items in this function menu are described in the table below.

COPY Saves the part of a program from one designated line to another designated
line in the cut buffer.
DELETE Deletes the part of a program from one designated line to another
designated line and saves it in the cut buffer.
PASTE Inserts the part of a program saved in the cut buffer by the COPY or
DELETE operation at the line where the cursor is located.
1 LINE INSERT Inserts one blank line at the current cursor location.
1-CHAR Deletes the cursor-located character.
DELETE
OVERWR/ Switches the input mode between “overwrite” and “insert”.
INSERT
ANOTHER Displays the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window, which allows selection of
FILE other files.
QUIT/STOP Terminates the editing or display process or suspends file editing.
FIND / Selected to search for and change (replace) a specified character string.
REPLACE
JUMP Selected to move the cursor to a specified line number.
SEQ. NO. Adds the specified sequence No.
ARRANGE
ADD Inserts another, specified program at the line where the cursor is currently
located.
SAVE Saves a program file.
SELECT&QUIT Terminates the editing or display process and selects the just edited
program file.
 6115-E P-320
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2. Program File Operations

This section describes the operations that relate to program files.
Program file operations can be classified into the following eight basic types:

 Changing the directory display

 Creating a new file

 Displaying a file (program source)

 Copying a file

 Renaming a file

 Deleting a file

 Protecting/unprotecting a file

 File operations

Files can be stored in the following devices:

 MD1 (Hard disk built in the NC unit.)

 US0 (Memory connected to the USB port)

 US1 (Memory connected to the USB port)

 6115-E P-321
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-1. Changing the Directory Display

Select [F1] (DIR DISPLAY) from the function menu on the DIRECTORY screen. The following pop-
up function menu appears.

ME32125R1101800070001

The above pop-up function menu permits the following operations:

Changing devices
MD1 [F1]
US0 [F2]
US1 [F3]
These function keys are used to change the device whose
TC [F4]
directory is displayed on the DIRECTORY screen.
ANOTHER DISPLAY [F6]
MD1 & US0 [F2]
MD1 & US1 [F3]
MD1 & TC [F4]
Changing displayed file Changes the pattern of file names displayed on the
[F6]
FILE NAME DIRECTORY screen.
Sorting files Changes the order of files displayed on the DIRECTORY
[F7]
SORT screen.
REFRESH [F7] Updates the contents displayed in the directory screen.

Select [F8] (CLOSE) to return to the previous DIRECTORY screen function menu.
 6115-E P-322
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Changing the Device

(1) Changing device to MD1

Select [F1] (MD1) from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu to change the device of which
directory is to be displayed to MD1 and close the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu.

(2) Changing device to US0

Select [F2] (US0) from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu to change the directory of which
directory is to be displayed to US0 and close the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu.

(3) Changing device to US1

Select [F3] (US1) from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu to change the directory device
to be displayed to US1 and close the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu.

(4) Changing device to TC

Select [F4] (TC) from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu to change the directory of which
directory is to be displayed to TC and close the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu.
TC means the host computer of DNC-T, PC/EWS.

(5) Changing device to other one

Select [F6] (ANOTHER DEVICE) from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu to display the
ANOTHER DISPLAY pop-up window. Enter a required device name and select [F7] (OK). The
directory of the entered device appears. If you enter two device names, their directories are
displayed on the double-directory screen.
When a directory name is entered in succession to the device name, the screen shows the
index in the specified directory.

(6) Changing device to MD1 and US0

Press the Extend key from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu and then select [F2] (MD1
& US0) to change the directory device to be displayed to MD1 and US0. Then close the DIR
DISPLAY pop-up function menu. At this time the double-directory screen is used.

(7) Changing device to MD1 and US1

Press the Extend key from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu and then select [F3] (MD1
& US1) to change the directory device to be displayed to MD1 and US1. Then close the DIR
DISPLAY pop-up function menu. At this time the double-directory screen is used.

(8) Changing device to MD1 and TC

Press the Extend key from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu and then select [F4] (MD1
& TC) to change the directory device to be displayed to MD1 and TC. Then close the DIR
DISPLAY pop-up function menu. At this time the double-directory screen is used.

(9) Changing device to a partition in the USB storage device

Connect a USB storage device. Enter a USB device name from the Device Change pop-up
window, and then display the USB storage device index.
When there are several partitions in the USB storage device, press F6 (NEXT PART) in the
Device Change pop-up window to select the next partition. At this time, the partition No. being
selected is displayed at the bottom of the Another Display window.
 6115-E P-323
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Changing the Displayed Files

Press the Extend key from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu and select [F6] (FILE NAME) to
display the pop-up window for file name pattern.

ME32125R1101800090001

Fig.5-5 FILE NAME PATTERN CHANGE Pop-up Function Menu

When the required file type is selected from the pop-up function menu, the pop-up function menu
closes and a directory containing only files of the selected type is displayed.
 6115-E P-324
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Sorting Files

Press the Extend key from the DIR DISPLAY pop-up function menu and select [F7] (SORT) to
display the pop-up window for file sorting.

ME32125R1101800100001

Fig.5-6 File Sorting Pop-up Function Menu

Procedure :

1 When [F1] (FILE NAME) is selected, the data table items are listed in alphabetical order of file
name and the pop-up function menu closes.

2 When [F2] (SIZE) is selected, the data table items are listed in order of file size and the pop-up
function menu closes.

3 When [F3] (DATE (UP)) is selected, the data table items are listed in chronological older and
the pop-up function menu closes.

4 When [F4] (DATE (DOWN)) is selected, the data table items are listed in reverse chronological
order and the pop-up function menu closes.

5 When [F5] (EXT.) is selected, the data table items are listed in alphabetical order of file name
extension (files having the same extension code are listed in alphabetical order of their name)
and the pop-up function menu closes.

The same device name and file name pattern as were previously valid remain in effect on this
screen.
 6115-E P-325
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Specifying a File Name

When a new program is created or the file operation is carried out, a file name may directly be
entered to specify a file.
When the file is entered, an extension name can be omitted.
However, the files of which extension name are omitted are identified as the following file name
respectively.

When producing a new program

If a file name is entered with an extension name omitted in the file name input box in the NEW FILE
pop-up window when the search condition of DIRECTORY screen is “*.*”, MIN is automatically
appended as an extension name. Besides, if “.” (period) is only entered as an extension name, it
becomes a file name without extension name. To specify a directory, enter “\” (back slash) following
the directory name.
A relationship between entered character string and specified file name is as follows:

Input character string

Specified file name
(example)
ABCDE.MIN ABCDE.MIN
ABCDE.SUB ABCDE.SUB
ABCDE.SDF ABCDE.SDF
ABCDE ABCDE.MIN
ABCDE. ABCDE
ABC\A.MIN ABC\A.MIN
ABC\A ABC\A.MIN
ABC\A. ABC\A
 6115-E P-326
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

When operating a file

When a file name with an extension name omitted is entered in the file name input box in each pop-
up window such as file copy or file name change, an extension name is appended to the cursor-
located file on the DIRECTORY screen. If the cursor is on the directory name in the DIRECTORY
screen, an extension name is not appended. Besides, if “.” (period) only is entered as an extension
name, it becomes a file name without an extension name. If only a directory is entered, a file name
at the cursor in the DIRECTORY screen is appended.
A relationship between input character string and specified file name is as follows:

Input character string

Specified file name
(example)
When the cursor is on the XYZ.SUB
ABCDE.MIN ABCDE.MIN
ABCDE ABCDE.SUB
ABCDE. ABCDE
ABC\A ABC\A.SUB
ABC\A. ABC\A
ABC\ ABC\XYZ.SUB
When the cursor is on the DDD (directory)
ABCDE.MIN ABCDE.MIN
ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE. ABCDE

[Supplement]

In the case of file operations that need designation of two files, such as file copy or file verify, an
extension name of destination file is also changed concurrently when an extension name of
original file is changed.
 6115-E P-327
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-2. Creating a New File or Directory

To create a new file or directory, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F3] (NEW FILE).

The NEW FILE pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800120001

Fig.5-7 NEW FILE Pop-up Window

When creating an NC program, select [F1] (I-MAP).

When creating a directory, select [F3] (DIR.).

ME32125R1101800120002

2 When creating a new NC program, enter a new file name, and select [F7] (OK).
The single file editing screen is displayed
The cursor is located in a blank program source display area.
It is now possible to input a program.
When creating a NC directory, enter a new directory name, and select [F7] (OK).

[Supplement]

1) If [F7] (OK) is selected without inputting a file name, the message “9057 Invalid file name
or path name” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to file name input.
2) If the file that has been input already exists, the message “FILE EXIST. OVER WRITE
OK?” is displayed.
To edit the file name, select [F6] (YES).
To return to file name input, select [F7] (NO).
3) If an extension name is omitted in file name input, MIN is automatically added.
 6115-E P-328
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-3. Displaying a Program Source

To display the program source for any desired file, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select the desired file on the DIRECTORY screen.

2 Select [F4] (LIST) from the function menu.

The program source of the selected file is displayed in the program source display area.

ME32125R1101800130001

Fig.5-8 Program Source Display

 6115-E P-329
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-4. Copying a File or Directory

The file copy operation copies any desired file to another device.
To copy a file, follow the procedure below.
The directory can be copied in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select the file to be copied on the DIRECTORY screen.

2 Select [F5] (COPY) from the function menu.

The COPY pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800140001

Fig.5-9 COPY Pop-up Function Menu

3 To copy a file under a different file name, input this file name. If no file name is input, it will be
copied under the same file name.
When specifying a copy destination directory, enter the directory name and a file name.
Example:
To copy a file under file name ABC.MIN in directory A1.DIR under the root directory, input
“\A1.DIR\ABC.MIN”.
The first backslash (\), which indicates the root directory, can be omitted.

4 Select the copy destination device (MD1, US0, US1 or TC) from the pop-up function menu.
The file selected in 1) is copied to the specified device and the COPY pop-up window closes.
If the copy destination is other than MD1, US0, US1 or TC input it by selecting [F4] (ANOTHER
COPY), then select [F8] (OK).
When [F7] (ALL FILE) is selected, the pop-up window with the file name being *.* appears,
allowing batch copy of all the files in the specified device to the other device.
To cancel copying, select [F8] (CANCEL) from the pop-up function menu.
 6115-E P-330
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

[Supplement]

1) If a file with the same file name already exists at the copy destination, the message “FILE
EXIST. OVERWRITE OK?” is displayed. To overwrite the existing file, select [F6] (YES) from
the function menu; to copy the file under a different name, select [F8] (FILE NAME CHANGE),
input another file name and select [F8] (OK). Select [F7] (NO) to stop copy processing and
return to the DIRECTORY screen.
2) To copy multiple files collectively, use the procedure described in “File/Directory Copy
Operation” in 5-2-8..
3) When overwriting of an existing file is specified, if the file at the copy destination is write
protected, the message “9021 File protect” is displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from
the pop-up function menu to stop copy processing and return to the COPY pop-up window.
4) If a directory is specified as the copy source in step 3) above, the files under that directory are
copied.
 6115-E P-331
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-5. Renaming a File or Directory

The file rename operation assigns a different file name to any specified file.
To rename a file, follow the procedure below.
The directory can be renamed in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select the file whose name is to be changed on the DIRECTORY screen.

2 Select [F6] (RENAME) from the function menu.

The RENAME pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800150001

Fig.5-10 RENAME Pop-up Window

3 Input the file name after the change.

When the RENAME pop-up window is displayed, the present file name is displayed.

4 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

The file name is changed and the DIRECTORY screen is redisplayed.

[Supplement]

1) If the file selected in step 1) is write protected, the error message “9021 File protect” is
displayed on selecting [F7] (OK). If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up
function menu to stop the processing and return to the DIRECTORY screen.
2) If the name after the change already exists, the error message “9044 Can not rename.
File exist.” is displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu
to stop rename processing and return to the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-332
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-6. Deleting a File or Directory

The file delete operation deletes any desired file.
To delete a file, follow the procedure below.
The directory can be deleted in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select the file to be deleted on the DIRECTORY screen.

2 Select [F7] (DELETE) from the function menu.

A pop-up window asking for confirmation that the file is to be deleted is displayed.

ME32125R1101800160001

Fig.5-11 Delete Confirmation Pop-up Window

3 Select [F6] (YES) from the pop-up function menu to delete the selected file and return to the
DIRECTORY screen.
Select [F7] (NO) to return to the DIRECTORY screen without deleting the file.
When [F5] (ALL FILE) is selected, the pop-up window with the file name being *.* appears,
allowing batch deletion of all the files in the specified device.

[Supplement]

1) If the file selected in step 1) is write protected, the message “9021 File protect” is
displayed on selecting [F7] (DELETE). If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up
function menu to stop delete processing and return to the DIRECTORY screen.
2) If a directory is specified as the file to be deleted in step 1) above, the error message
“9054 Directory” is displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function
menu to stop delete processing and return to the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-333
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-7. Protecting a File or Directory

The file protect operation protects, or cancels the protection of a file from rewriting, modification, or
deletion.
To protect a file, follow the procedure below.
The directory can be protected in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select any desired file from the DIRECTORY screen.

2 Select [F8] (PROTECT/UNPROT.) from the function menu.

A pop-up window asking for confirmation that the file is to be protected is displayed.

ME32125R1101800170001

Fig.5-12 Protect Confirmation Pop-up Window

3 Select [F6] (PROTECT) from the pop-up function menu to protect the selected file and return to
the DIRECTORY screen. When the selected file is already protected, the same operation is
carried out.
Select [F7] (UNPROTECT) to return to the DIRECTORY screen with canceling the protection
of the selected file.
When a file is protected, a key symbol is displayed in the PROT (protect) column of the
DIRECTORY screen.
When [F5] (ALL FILE) is selected, the pop-up window with the file name being *.* appears,
allowing batch protection or unprotection of all the files in the specified device.
When file protection/protection cancellation is canceled, select [F8] (CANCEL).

[Supplement]

Note that when the FD0 is initialized, programs with file protection in the floppy disc are also
deleted.
 6115-E P-334
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-2-8. File/Directory Operations

There are the following file operations:

 File/directory copy

 File/directory rename

 File/directory delete

 File/directory protect/unprotect

 File/directory verify

The difference between the file/directory copy, file/directory rename, file/directory protect, and file/
directory delete operations and the corresponding operations described in “5-2-4. Copying a File or
Directory”, “5-2-5. Renaming a File or Directory”, “5-2-6. Deleting a File or Directory”, and “5-2-7.
Protecting a File or Directory” above is that the operations described here can be executed with
respect to the files that are not displayed on the DIRECTORY screen.
Various operations of directories can be done in the same procedure as the various file operations.
Select [F1] (FILE OPERATE) from the function menu on the DIRECTORY screen: the pop-up
function menu for file operations is displayed.

ME32125R1101800180001

Fig.5-13 File Operation Pop-up Function Menu

If FILE OPERATE is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8] to change the function
menu.
 6115-E P-335
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

File/Directory Copy Operation

To execute the “file copy” file operation, follow the procedure below.
The directory can be copied in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (COPY) from the file operation pop-up function menu.
The COPY pop-up window for file input/output processing is displayed.

ME32125R1101800190001

Fig.5-14 COPY Pop-up Window

2 Select the copy source device.

To select the copy source device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu:
repeatedly selecting this item displays the registered devices in order.
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select the desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
A copy source device name can only be input if OTHERS has been selected at DEVICE.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the COPY pop-up window is displayed is the
device selected on the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-336
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Input the copy source file name

After completing the operation in step 2), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor
between the input areas. When the cursor is moved to the file name input area, the pop-up
function menu display changes as follows.

ME32125R1101800190002

To select a file name from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
The INDEX SELECT pop-up window is displayed: select the desired file using the up/down
cursor keys, then select [F7] (OK) from the newly displayed pop-up function menu.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed. When you locate the cursor on the directory and press [F7] (OK), the
directory name is automatically entered and the file name is entered successively.
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) or [F3] (SORT) from the function menu of the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window, it is possible to change the pattern and arrangement of file names displayed in
the INDEX SELECT pop-up window. These operations are the same as those described
previously for changing the directory display. For details, refer to “Changing the Displayed
Files”, or “Sorting Files” in 5-2-1..

4 Select the copy destination device.

After completing the operation in step 3), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor to
the selection area for the copy destination device. The method for selection is the same as
described in step 2) above.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the COPY pop-up window is displayed is the
device selected on the DIRECTORY screen.

5 Input the copy destination file name.

The input procedure is the same as described in step 3).

6 Set ON/OFF for the execution of confirmation.

After completing the operation in step 5), press the up/down cursor keys to locate the cursor in
the CONFIRMATION check box.
The check mark in the box is alternately set and cleared by selecting the [F1] (check mark
item) from the pop-up function menu.
When the CONFIRMATION check box is checked, the message “COPY OK?” is displayed
immediately before copying a file.

7 Select [F7] (OK).

Copy processing is performed according to the settings made in the COPY pop-up window.
If the CONFIRMATION check box was checked in step 6), the confirmation message is
displayed immediately before copying a file.
 6115-E P-337
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

[Supplement]

1) If no file name is input in step 3), the message “9057 Invalid file name or path name” is
displayed on selecting [F7] (OK). If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up
function menu: the NC returns to the state waiting for input of a file name.
2) If no file name is input in step 5), the file is copied by making the copy destination file
name the same as the copy source file name on selecting [F7] (OK).
3) If a file with the same file name already exists at the copy destination, the message “FILE
EXIST. OVERWRITE OK?” is displayed. To overwrite the existing file, select [F6] (YES)
from the function menu. Select [F7] (NO) to stop copy processing for this file and proceed
to copying of the next file.
4) If YES is selected to overwrite the existing file in 3. above but the file is write protected,
the message “9021 File protect” is displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the
pop-up function menu to stop copy processing for this file and proceed to copying of the
next file.
5) If a directory is specified as the copy source in step 3) above, the files under that
directory are copied. If a directory is specified as the copy destination in step 5) above,
the copy source file is copied under this directory.
6) If the copy source file cannot be found, the message “FILE NOT FOUND” is displayed. If
this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu to return to the COPY pop-
up window.
7) When copying multiple files collectively, the wild cards “*” and “?” can be used for
specifying a copy source file. In this case, make the copy destination file name entry
blank by pressing the Backspace key and then the (WRITE) key.
 6115-E P-338
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

“File/Directory Rename” Operation

To execute the “file rename” file operation, follow the procedure below.
Directory rename operation can be done in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select [F2] (RENAME) from the file operation pop-up function menu. The RENAME pop-up
window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800200001

Fig.5-15 RENAME Pop-up Window

2 Select the device storing the file whose name is to be changed.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-up function menu: repeatedly selecting
this item displays the registered devices in order.
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select the desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
A device name can only be input if OTHERS has been selected at DEVICE.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the RENAME pop-up window is displayed is the
device selected on the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-339
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Input the file name before the change.

After completing the operation in step 2), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor to
the file name input area. When the cursor is moved to the file name input area, the pop-up
function menu display changes as follows.

ME32125R1101800200002

To select a file name from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
The INDEX SELECT pop-up window is displayed: select the desired file using the up/down
cursor keys, then select [F7] (OK) from the newly displayed pop-up function menu.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed. When you locate the cursor on the directory and press [F7] (OK), the
directory name is automatically entered and the file name is entered successively.
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) or [F3] (SORT) from the function menu of the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window, it is possible to change the pattern and arrangement of file names displayed in
the INDEX SELECT pop-up window. These operations are the same as those described
previously for changing the directory display. For details, refer to “Changing the Displayed
Files”, or “Sorting Files” in 5-2-1.

4 Input the file name after the change

Follow the same procedure as in step 3) above.

5 Set ON/OFF for the execution of confirmation.

After completing the operation in step 4), press the up/down cursor keys to locate the cursor in
the CONFIRMATION check box.
The check mark in the box is alternately set and cleared by selecting the [F1] (check mark
item) from the pop-up function menu.
When the CONFIRMATION check box is checked, the message “RENAME OK?” is displayed
immediately before renaming a file.

6 Select [F7] (OK).

Rename processing is performed according to the settings made in the RENAME pop-up
window.
If the CONFIRMATION check box was checked in step 5), the confirmation message is
displayed immediately before renaming a file.
 6115-E P-340
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

[Supplement]

1) If no file name before the change is input in step 3), or if a wild card “*” is input, the
message “9057 Invalid file name or path name” is displayed on selecting [F7] (OK). If this
happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu: the NC enters the state
waiting for input of a file name again.
2) If no file name after the change is input in step 4), or if a wild card “*” is input, the
message “9057 Invalid file name or path name” is displayed on selecting [F7] (OK). If this
happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu: the NC enters the state
waiting for input of a file name again.
3) If the file to be renamed cannot be found, the message “9045 File not found” is
displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu to return to
operation at the RENAME pop-up window.
4) If a file with the same file name as the name after the change already exists, the
message “9044 Can not rename. File exist” is displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK)
from the pop-up function menu to return to operation at the RENAME pop-up window.
5) If the file input in step 3) above is write protected, the message “9021 File protect” is
displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu to return to
operation at the RENAME pop-up window.
 6115-E P-341
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

“File/Directory Protect/Unprotect” Operation

To execute the “file protect/unprotect” file operation, follow the procedure below.
Directory protect/unprotect operation can be done in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select [F4] (PROTECT/UNPROT.) from the file operation pop-up function menu. The
PROTECT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800210001

Fig.5-16 PROTECT Pop-up Window

2 Select the device storing the file to be protected or have its protection cancelled.
To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-up function menu: repeatedly selecting
this item displays the registered devices in order.
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select the desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
A device name can only be input if OTHERS has been selected at DEVICE.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the PROTECT pop-up window is displayed is the
device selected on the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-342
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Input the file name.

After completing the operation in step 2), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor to
the file name input area. When the cursor is moved to the file name input area, the pop-up
function menu display changes as follows.

ME32125R1101800210002

To select a file name from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
The INDEX SELECT pop-up window is displayed: select the desired file using the up/down
cursor keys, then select [F7] (OK) from the newly displayed pop-up function menu.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed. When you locate the cursor on the directory and press [F7] (OK), the
directory name is automatically entered and the file name is entered successively.
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) or [F3] (SORT) from the function menu of the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window, it is possible to change the pattern and arrangement of file names displayed in
the INDEX SELECT pop-up window. These operations are the same as those described
previously for changing the directory display. For details, refer to “Changing the Displayed
Files”, or “Sorting Files” in 5-2-1..

4 Choose PROTECT or UNPROTECT.

After completing the operation in step 3), press the up/down cursor keys to locate the cursor in
the PROT/UNPROT check box.
The file protection mode alternates between PROTECT and UNPROTECT each time you
press [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-up function menu.
Or, you can select [F1] (MENU) to display the protection and protection cancellation in the pop-
up function menu. Select either [F2] (PROTECT) or [F3] (UNPROTECT) to determine the entry.

5 Set ON/OFF for the execution of confirmation.

After completing the operation in step 4), press the up/down cursor keys to locate the cursor in
the CONFIRMATION check box.
The check mark in the box is alternately set and cleared by selecting the [F1] (check mark
item) from the pop-up function menu.
When the CONFIRMATION check box is checked, the message “PROTECT OK?” or
“PROTECT CANCEL OK?” is displayed immediately before protecting, or canceling the
protection of, a file.

6 Select [F7] (OK).

The file is protected, or the protection is cancelled.
If the CONFIRMATION check box was checked in step 5), the confirmation message is
displayed immediately before protecting a file or canceling a file’s protection.

[Supplement]

1) If the file to be protected or have its protection cancelled cannot be found, the message
“9045 File not found” is displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up
function menu to return to the PROTECT pop-up window.
2) When protecting, or canceling the protection of, multiple files collectively, the wild cards
“*” and “?” can be used.
 6115-E P-343
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

“File/Directory Delete” Operation

To execute the “file delete” file operation, follow the procedure below.
Directory delete operation can be done in the same procedure.

Procedure :

1 Select [F3] (DELETE) from the file operation pop-up function menu.
The DELETE pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800220001

Fig.5-17 DELETE Pop-up Function Window

2 Select the device storing the file to be deleted.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-up function menu: repeatedly selecting
this item displays the registered devices in order.
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select the desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
A device name can only be input if OTHERS has been selected at DEVICE.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the DELETE pop-up window is displayed is the
device selected on the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-344
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Input the file name.

After completing the operation in step 2), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor to
the file name input areas. When the cursor is moved to the file name input area, the pop-up
function menu display changes as follows.

ME32125R1101800220002

To select a file name from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
The INDEX SELECT pop-up window is displayed: select the desired file using the up/down
cursor keys, then select [F7] (OK) from the newly displayed pop-up function menu.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed. When you locate the cursor on the directory and press [F7] (OK), the
directory name is automatically entered and the file name is entered successively.
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) or [F3] (SORT) from the function menu of the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window, it is possible to change the pattern and arrangement of file names displayed in
the INDEX SELECT pop-up window. These operations are the same as those described
previously for changing the directory display. For details, refer to “Changing the Displayed
Files”, or “Sorting Files” in 5-2-1..

4 Set ON/OFF for the execution of confirmation.

After completing the operation in step 3), press the up/down cursor keys to locate the cursor in
the CONFIRMATION check box.
The check mark in the box is alternately set and cleared by selecting [F1] (check mark item)
from the pop-up function menu.
When the CONFIRMATION check box is checked, the message “DELETE OK?” is displayed
immediately before deleting a file.
When the CONFIRMATION check box is not checked, confirmation is not sought before
deleting a file, so care is required.

5 Select [F7] (OK).

The file is deleted.
If the CONFIRMATION check box was checked in step 4), the confirmation message is
displayed immediately before deleting a file.

[Supplement]

1) If no file name is input in step 3), the message “9057 Invalid file name or path name” is
displayed on selecting [F7] (OK). If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up
function menu: the NC enters the state waiting for input of a file name again.
2) If the file input in step 3) above is protected, the message “9021 File protect” is
displayed. If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu to return to
operation at the DELETE pop-up menu.
3) If the file name input in step 3) above is that of a directory, the message “DELETE OK?”
is displayed. Selecting [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu deletes all of the files
under the directory. However, directories under the directory are not deleted.
4) If the file to be deleted cannot be found, the message “9045 File not found” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu to return to operation at
the DELETE pop-up window.
5) When copying multiple files collectively, the wild cards “*” and “?” can be used. In order to
avoid erroneously deleting files when using wild cards, always check first that the
CONFIRMATION check box is checked.
 6115-E P-345
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

“File Verify” File Operation

To execute the “file verify” file operation, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F5] (VERIFY) from the file operation pop-up function menu.
The VERIFY pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800230001

Fig.5-18 FILE VERIFY Pop-up Function Window

2 Select the device storing the verification source file.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-up function menu: repeatedly selecting
this item displays the registered devices in order.
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select the desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
A device name can only be input if OTHERS has been selected at DEVICE.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the FILE VERIFY pop-up window is displayed is
the device selected on the DIRECTORY screen.
 6115-E P-346
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Input the file name of the verification source file.

After completing the operation in step 2), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor to
the file name input area. When the cursor is moved to the file name input area, the pop-up
function menu display changes as follows.

ME32125R1101800230002

To select a file name from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
The INDEX SELECT pop-up window is displayed: select the required file using the up/down
cursor keys, then select [F7] (OK) from the newly displayed pop-up function menu.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed. When you locate the cursor on the directory and press [F7] (OK), the
directory name is automatically entered and the file name is entered successively.
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) or [F3] (SORT) from the function menu of the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window, it is possible to change the pattern and arrangement of file names displayed in
the INDEX SELECT pop-up window. These operations are the same as those described
previously for changing the directory display. For details, see “Changing the Displayed Files”,
or “Sorting Files” in 5-2-1..

4 Select the device storing the verification destination file

After completing the operation in step 3), press the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor to
the verification destination device selection area. The method for selection is the same as
described in 2) above.

[Supplement]

The device displayed as the default when the FILE VERIFY pop-up window is displayed is
MD1.

5 Input the file name of the verification destination file.

The method for input is the same as described in 3) above.

6 Select [F7] (OK).

Verification is performed according to the settings made in the FILE VERIFY pop-up window.
 6115-E P-347
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

If, after verification, the two files are found to match perfectly, the message “THE SAME DATA.” is
displayed. If there is a mismatch between the contents of the files, the program source data that
does not match is displayed in the VERIFY RESULT pop-up window.

ME32125R1101800230003

Fig.5-19 VERIFY RESULT Pop-up Window

In the DISAGREE LINE DETECTION pop-up window, the verification source device and file name
are displayed in blue at FILE 1, and the verification destination device and file name are displayed in
green at FILE 2.
Program sources where a mismatch is found are also displayed in blue or green.
The line number at the top right of the window is the program line number (in absolute terms) where
the mismatch in the program source is located.
Select [F7] (CONTINUE) from the pop-up function menu to continue verification. On completing
verification up to the end of the program source, the message “VERIFIED TO THE LAST” is
displayed and the DIRECTORY screen is redisplayed.
If [F8] (END) is selected before this message is displayed, verification is aborted and the
DIRECTORY screen is redisplayed at that point.

[Supplement]

1) If no file name is input for one or other of the files subject to verification, or if a wild card (“*”) is
used, the message “9057 Invalid file name or path name” is displayed on selecting [F7] (OK).
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) from the pop-up function menu: the control waits for input of a
file name again.
2) When a directory has been specified as one or other of the file names for the verification, the
message “9054 Directory” is displayed on selecting [F7] (OK). If this happens, select [F8] (OK)
from the pop-up function menu: the control waits for input of a file name again.
 6115-E P-348
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3. Program Editing Operations

This section describes operations relating to program editing.
Before editing, store the required program in the memory for editing.
To read a program source, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Press the (EDIT AUX) mode selection key.

The indicating lamp at the upper of the key lights and the program
operation mode is established.
The DIRECTORY screen is displayed. ME32125R1101800240001

2 Select the file to be edited on the DIRECTORY screen.

For details on selecting a file on the DIRECTORY screen, refer to “5-1-1. DIRECTORY Screen”
and “5-2-1. Changing the Directory Display”.

3 Select [F2] (EDIT) from the function menu.

The single file editing screen is displayed, and the program source of the selected file is
displayed in the program source display area.

ME32125R1101800240002

Fig.5-20 PROGRAM EDITING Screen

 6115-E P-349
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

[Supplement]

1) The following explanation of editing operations relates to the single file editing screen.
The basic operations are the same for both the single and double editing screens, but
there are operations specific to the double editing screen, and these are covered by
additional explanations where necessary.
2) If the same file as the program selected file for large-volume operation (method B,
method S) is edited while a program is not being executed, program selection is
canceled.
3) In the program display on the program editing screen, the TAB code is developed into
eight spaces.
 6115-E P-350
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-1. Copy
This operation copies the specified program lines into the cut buffer (temporary storage area).
To copy, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the first line in the program source that is to be copied.
Use the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor inside the program source display area.

2 Select [F1] (COPY) from the function menu.

The line at the cursor location is highlighted.

3 Press the “down” cursor key to define the range to be copied.

The defined range is highlighted.

[Supplement]

If the volume of data defined exceeds the capacity of the cut buffer, the message “9016
Buffer overflow. Can not anymore.” is displayed.

4 Press the (WRITE) key.

The defined range is stored in the cut buffer and the highlighting is cancelled.

G15H1 G15H1
G0Z500. G0Z500.
X300.Y300. X300.Y300.
T7 T7
M6 M6
T4 T4
M5 M5
COPY ([F1]) [WRITE] key
G15H1
G0Z500. G15H1
X300.Y300. G0Z500.
T7 X300.Y300.
M6 T7
T4 M6
M5 T4
M5
Press Down cursor key twice.
ME32125R1101800250001

Fig.5-21 Copy Operation

This completes copying of the specified range of program lines.

 6115-E P-351
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-2. Delete
This operation deletes the specified program lines. The deleted lines are stored in the cut buffer
(temporary storage area).
To delete, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the first line in the program source that is to be deleted.
Use the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor inside the program source display area.

2 Select [F2] (DELETE) from the function menu.

The line at the cursor location is highlighted.

3 Press the “down” cursor key to define the range to be deleted.

The defined range is highlighted.

[Supplement]

If the volume of data designated exceeds the capacity of the cut buffer, the message “9047
Buffer overflow. Can not delete anymore” is displayed.

4 Press the (WRITE) key.

The defined range is deleted and the deleted program source is stored in the cut buffer.

G15H1 G15H1
G0Z500. G0Z500.
X300.Y300. X300.Y300.
T7 T7
M6 M6
T4 T4
M5 M5
DELETE ([F2]) [CANCEL] key
G15H1
G0Z500. G15H1
X300.Y300. G0Z500.
T7 X300.Y300.
M6 T7
T4 M6
M5 T4
M5
Press Down cursor key twice.

[WRITE] key

G15H1
G0Z500.
T4
M5
S318
M3
G0X60.Y-20.1
ME32125R1101800260001

Fig.5-22 Delete Operation

This completes deletion of the specified range of program lines.

 6115-E P-352
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-3. Paste
The paste operation inserts the data stored in the cut buffer (lines previously copied or deleted) at
the specified program line.
To paste, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Move the cursor to the line below the position where the data is to be pasted.
Use the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor inside the program source display area.

2 Select [F3] (PASTE) from the function menu.

The contents of the cut buffer are inserted at the specified line.

G15H1 G15H1
G0Z500. G0Z500.
X300.Y300. ******
PASTE
T7 ******
M6 ([F3]) X300.Y300.
T4 T7
M5 M6
ME32125R1101800270001

Fig.5-23 Paste Operation

This completes the paste operation.

5-3-4. 1 Line Insert

This operation inserts one blank line immediately before the cursor position.
To execute 1 line insert, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Move the cursor to the line below the position where the blank line is to be inserted.
Use the up/down cursor keys to move the cursor inside the program source display area.

2 Select [F4] (1 LINE INSERT) from the function menu.

A blank line is inserted above the specified line.

G15H1 G15H1
G0Z500. 1 LINE G0Z500.
X300.Y300. INSERT
T7 X300.Y300.
M6 ([F4]) T7
T4 M6
M5 T4
ME32125R1101800280001

Fig.5-24 1 Line Insert Operation

This completes the 1 line insert operation.

 6115-E P-353
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-5. 1 Character Delete

Deletes the character where the cursor is located.
To delete a required character, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Move the cursor to the character that you want to delete. Use the up/down and right/left cursor
keys to move the cursor inside the program source display area.

2 Select [F5] (1-CHAR DELETE) from the function menu.

The character at the cursor is deleted.

G00 X300 Z300 G00 300 Z300

G50S3500 1 CHAR G50S3500
S42M41M03M08 S42M41M03M08
DELETE
G00X105Z92.0 4 8T0202 G00X105Z92.0 4 8T0202
Z90 ([F5]) Z90
S4242M09 S4242M09
X300Z300T0200 X300Z300T0200

ME32125R1101800290001

Fig.5-25 1-character Delete Operation

5-3-6. Overwrite/Insert
The meanings of “overwrite” and “insert” are as follows:

Procedure :

1 Overwrite
An input character overwrites the existing character at the cursor position.

2 Insert
An input character is inserted before the existing character at the cursor position.

Switch between the overwrite and insert modes by selecting [F6] (OVERWR/INSERT) from the
function menu.
The current input mode is indicated at the right end of the title bar.
 6115-E P-354
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-7. Another File

The “another file” operation allows editing, creation, or display, of another file.
When the “another file” operation is selected on the single file editing screen, the display changes to
the double file editing screen.
When the “another file” operation is executed, the selected other file is displayed in the right-hand
program source area (if a new file is being created, the area is blank).
To execute the “another file” operation, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F7] (ANOTHER FILE) from the function menu of the single file editing screen. The
ANOTHER FILE pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800310001

Fig.5-26 ANOTHER FILE Pop-up Window

[Supplement]

When [F7] (ANOTHER FILE) is selected from the function menu of the double file editing
screen, the program source selected on the screen changes.
 6115-E P-355
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

The contents of the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window are explained below.

Indicates the device format of the displayed index

NTFS
information. There are three possibilities: OSP, NTFS (FAT),
(device format)
and UNKNOWN.
Indicates the file names of files in the specified device that
Data table
meet the search condition.
MD1: *.* Indicates the condition for the file names displayed in the
(Search condition) data table.

To change the display in the data table, select [F1] (DIR DISPLAY) from the pop-up function
menu, then change the device, or the file names displayed, or sort the files in a different way.

2 Select the desired file name in the data table.

Use the up/down cursor keys to select the file name.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed.

3 Select [F2] (EDIT), [F3] (NEW FILE), or [F4] (LIST). For details on the corresponding
operations, see “Editing Another File ([F2] (EDIT))”, “Creating a New File ([F3] (NEW FILE))”,
and “Displaying Another File ([F4] (LIST))” in 5-3-7..

[Supplement]

1) If the “another file” operation is being used to create a new file, there is no need to select
a file name in step 2).
2) If the selected file name is that of a directory, the contents of the directory are displayed
in step 3). In this case, go through the operation from step 2) again.

Editing Another File ([F2] (EDIT))

Select the desired file from the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window, then select [F2] (EDIT) from the
pop-up function menu: the double file editing screen is displayed.
The program source that was displayed in the single file editing screen is now displayed in the left-
hand program source display area of the double file editing screen, while the program source
selected in the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window is displayed in the right-hand program source
display area.
The cursor is displayed in the right-hand program source display area.

[Supplement]

1) If the file selected in the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window is protected, the message “9021 File
protect” is displayed and the original editing screen is redisplayed.
2) The same file as a file already edited or a file displayed in the list cannot be edited. If the same
file as that being edited is attempted to be edited as another file, the editing file already
opened will be activated.
If the same file as that displaying a list is attempted to be edited as another file, the window
displaying the list will be changed into the editing mode, allowing the editing operations.
 6115-E P-356
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Creating a New File ([F3] (NEW FILE))

To create a new file using the “another file” operation, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F3] (NEW FILE) from the function menu.

The NEW FILE pop-up window is displayed.

2 Input the file name for the new file and select [F7] (OK).
The screen display changes to the double file editing screen: the program source that was
displayed in the single file editing screen is displayed in the left hand program source display
area, and the new program source will be displayed in the right-hand program source display
area, which is now blank.
The new program can now be created.

[Supplement]

1) If [F7] (OK) is selected without inputting a file name, the message “9057 Invalid file name
or path name” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to file name input.
2) If the file that has been input already exists, the message “FILE EXIST.” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to file name input.

Displaying Another File ([F4] (LIST))

Select any desired file from the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window and select [F4] (LIST) from the pop-
up function menu. The screen display changes to the double file editing screen: the program source
that was displayed in the single file editing screen is displayed in the left hand program source
display area, and the program source of the file selected in the ANOTHER FILE pop-up window is
displayed in the right-hand program source display area.

[Supplement]

You cannot list the already listed file or the file being edited.
If listing of such a file is attempted, the file already opened for edition or listing will be activated.
If the same file that displaying a list is attempted to be displayed on the list again, the file already
opened for listing will be activated.
 6115-E P-357
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-8. Find
The “find” operation searches for any desired character string in the displayed program source.
To execute “find”, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (FIND/REPLACE) from the function menu of the PROGRAM EDITING screen.
If FIND/REPLACE is not displayed, press the [Extend] key to the right of [F8]. The FIND/
REPLACE pop-up window is displayed when [F1] (FIND/REPLACE) is selected.

ME32125R1101800350001

Fig.5-27 FIND/REPLACE Pop-up Window

2 Input the character string to be found.

[Supplement]

“?” can be used as a wild card when specifying the character string (“*” cannot be used as a
wild card).

3 Select [F6] (FIND) from the pop-up function menu of the FIND/REPLACE pop-up window. This
starts the search.
If the double file editing screen is displayed, the search is conducted in the display area where
the cursor is currently located.
The search starts from the character immediately after the one where the cursor is located, and
continues to the final line of the program source. If the input character string is not found in that
part of the program source, the search continues from the beginning of the program source to
the cursor position.

 When the input character string is found:

The found character string is brought to the top of the program source display area, with
the part of the program source that follows it also displayed.
 6115-E P-358
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

 When the input character string is not found:

The message “9012 String not found.” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to character string input.

[Supplement]

If [F6] (FIND) is selected without inputting a character string, the message “9048 Empty
string. Can not find.” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to character string input.
To search for the next occurrence of the same character string, select [F6] (FIND) again.

5-3-9. Replace
The “replace” operation searches for any desired character string in the program source and
replaces it with a specified character string.
To execute “replace”, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F1] (FIND/REPLACE) from the function menu of the PROGRAM EDITING screen.
If FIND/REPLACE is not displayed, press the [Extend] key to the right of [F8].
The FIND/REPLACE pop-up window is displayed when [F1] (FIND/REPLACE) is selected.

ME32125R1101800360001

Fig.5-28 FIND/REPLACE Pop-up Window

2 Input the character string to be replaced in the FIND input area.

[Supplement]

“?” can be used as a wild card when specifying the character string (“*” cannot be used as a
wild card).
 6115-E P-359
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Input, in the REPLACE input area, the character string to replace the one to be found.
On completion of the operation in step 2), press the up/down cursor keys to locate the cursor in
the REPLACE input area.

4 Select [F7] (REPLACE) or [F7] (REPLACE ALL) from the pop-up function menu of the FIND/
REPLACE pop-up window.
If [F7] (REPLACE ALL) is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8].

a. When [F7] (REPLACE) is selected:

The search starts from the character immediately after the one where the cursor is located,
and continues to the final line of the program source. If the searched character string is not
found in that part of the program source, the search continues from the beginning of the
program source to the cursor position.
When the character string is found, the first occurrence is replaced with the character
string input in the REPLACE input area of the FIND/REPLACE pop-up window, and the
site of the replacement is brought to the top of the program source area, with the part of
the program source that follows it also displayed.
The FIND/REPLACE pop-up window remains open, allowing the replace operation to be
continued.
To continue the same replace operation, select [F7] (REPLACE) again.

b. When [F7] (REPLACE ALL) is selected:

For all program sources from the character immediately after the one where the cursor is
located, the find/replace operation is carried out. When the replace operation is finished,
the message “REPLACED X TIMES” is displayed, and the FIND/REPLACE pop-up
window closes. The message will disappear when any key is pressed.

 When the input character string is not found:

The message “9012 String not found.” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to character string input.

[Supplement]

If [F7] (OK) is selected without inputting a character string, the message “9048 Empty string.
Can not find.” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to character string input.
 6115-E P-360
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-10.Line Jump
The “line jump” operation advances the cursor position by the specified number of lines.
To execute line jump, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F2] (JUMP) from the function menu of the PROGRAM EDITING screen.
If JUMP is not displayed, press the [Extend] key to the right of [F8].
The LINE JUMP pop-up window is displayed when [F2] (JUMP) is selected.

ME32125R1101800370001

Fig.5-29 LINE JUMP Pop-up Window

2 Input the number of lines to jump, or select [F3] (TOP PAGE) or [F4] (LAST PAGE). To jump to
the first line or the final line of the program source, it is not necessary to input the number of
lines. If the number of lines is input, proceed to the step 3).
 6115-E P-361
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

3 Select [F5] (FORWARD), [F6] (BACK), or [F7] (TOP) from the pop-up function menu of the
LINE JUMP pop-up window.
The cursor position moves in accordance with the selected function.
Details of the functions of these menu items are given below:

TOP PAGE The cursor is moved to the first line of the program source.
LAST PAGE The cursor is moved to the final line of the program source.
FORWARD The cursor is moved the specified number of lines toward the final line of
the program source, starting from the current cursor position. If the
specified number of lines goes beyond the final line of the program
source, the cursor is located at the final line.
BACK The cursor is moved the specified number of lines toward the first line of
the program source, starting from the current cursor position. If the
specified number of lines goes beyond the first line of the program source,
the cursor is located at the first line.
TOP The cursor is moved the specified number of lines from the top of the
program. If the specified number of lines goes beyond the final line of the
program source, the cursor is located at the final line.

[Supplement]

If FORWARD, BACK, or TOP is carried out without inputting a number of lines, the message
“9041 Can not jump!” is displayed.
If this happens, select [F8] (OK) to return to NUMBER OF LINES input.

On completion of the line jump operation, the LINE JUMP pop-up window closes.
 6115-E P-362
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-11.Sequence No. Arrange

Sequence numbers are reassigned without changing the program by specifying the starting
sequence and increment.
To arrange the sequence numbers, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select the function key [F3] (SEQ NO. ARRANGE) from the function menu in EDIT screen. If
such function key is not found, press the Extend key at the right of the [F8] key.
When the key is selected, the SEQUENCE NO. ARRANGE pop-up window appears.

ME32125R1101800380001
 6115-E P-363
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

2 Enter the starting sequence in SEQUENCE NO. input box and the incremental value of
sequence numbers in the RATE input box. Then, select [F7] (OK). The specified sequence
numbers are assigned to the program blocks from the cursor-located line to the last.

[Supplement]

1) If a sequence number is assigned to the destination block of a jump command specified

in GOTO statement or IF statement. The SEQUENCE NO. ARRANGE operation
changes the sequence number of the program block specified as a destination but does
not change the sequence in the GOTO or IF statement. To prevent such problem,
specify a jump destination with a sequence name, the name is not affected by sequence
number arrange.
2) Space, tub, or / (block delete) remain unchanged before and after the sequences to
which numbers are assigned.
3) Nothing but space, tub, or / (block delete) should be present in front of the sequence
numbers to be changed.
4) The sequences, having no sequence number or name, are given sequence numbers.
(However, no sequence numbers are assigned to the program name, or the sequences
between “control in” and “control out”.)
5) If the edit pointer is placed on a sequence with a sequence name, sequence numbers
are reassigned from the sequence number that occurs first below that sequence.
6) If the sequence number exceeds 5 digits, an error occurs. If the sequence number
exceeds 6 digits, no sequence numbers are assigned from the problem sequence.
7) Leading zeros are not given to the sequence numbers.
8) Sequence numbers are rearranged only within one program. This means that the
numbers are assigned up to M02, M30, or RTS sequence.
 6115-E P-364
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-12.File Insert
The “file insert” operation inserts a program source in the single/double file editing screen at the
cursor position in the currently displayed program source.
To execute “file insert”, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F6] (ADD) from the function menu of the single/double file editing screen.
If ADD is not displayed, press the [Extend] key to the right of [F8].
The FILE ADD pop-up window is displayed when [F6] (ADD) is selected.

ME32125R1101800390001

Fig.5-30 FILE ADD Pop-up Window

The contents of the FILE ADD pop-up window are explained below.

Indicates the format of the device whose directory

NTFS
information is displayed. There are three possibilities: OSP,
(device format)
NTFS (FAT), and “UNKNOWN”.
Indicates the file names in the designated device that meet
Data table
the search conditions.
MD1: *.* Indicates the search condition for files displayed in the data
(Search condition) table.
 6115-E P-365
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

2 A pop-up function menu is displayed in association with the FILE ADD pop-up window.
The items in this menu are explained below.

Changes the device whose files are displayed in the data table.
DEVICE Details of operation are the same as described “Changing the Device” in 5-
2-1..
Changes the file pattern displayed in the data table.
FILE NAME Details of operation as the same as described “Changing the Displayed
Files” in 5-2-1..
Changes the file pattern displayed in the data table.
SORT
Details of operation are the same as described “Sorting Files” in 5-2-1..

3 To change the directory display in the data table, select the appropriate item from the pop-up
function menu.

4 Select the desired file name from the data table.

Use the up/down cursor keys to select the file name.
When you locate the cursor on the directory and press the WRITE key, the files in the directory
will be displayed.

[Supplement]

If the selected file name is that of a directory, the contents of the directory are displayed in
step 4). In this case, go through the operation from step 3) again.

5 Select [F7] (OK).

The program source of the file selected in step 3) is inserted at the line where the cursor is
currently located.

5-3-13.Save
The “save” function saves in memory the data that is currently being edited in the normal editing
mode.
This function differs from QUIT in the program editing screen editing in that the editing mode
continues after the file has been saved.
To execute “save”, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F7] (SAVE) from the function menu.

If SAVE is not displayed, press the [Extend] key to the right of [F8].
The FILE SAVE pop-up window is displayed when [F7] (SAVE) is selected.
Input the save destination device name and the name the file is to be saved under, then select
[F8] (OK).
 6115-E P-366
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-14.Quit / Stop
The QUIT/STOP command terminates the currently edited or displayed processing, or temporarily
stops the editing operation conducted in the normal editing mode.
This temporary stop function differs from QUIT in the program editing in that the editing mode is
terminated without saving the data in memory.
To execute the ONCE STOP command, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F8] (QUIT/STOP) from the function menu.

If QUIT/STOP is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8].
The following message is displayed:
FILE EDIT IS FINISHED. DO YOU WANT TO SAVE?
Select [F6] (YES) or [F7] (NO) to terminate editing.
The following message is displayed when [F5] (ONCE STOP) is selected.
FILE EDIT ONCE STOP OK?
CASE OF ONCE STOP, PUSH F2 (REOPEN) FOR FILE EDIT AGAIN.
Select [F6] (YES) or [F7] (NO) from the pop-up function menu.

 When [F6] (YES) is selected:

The editing mode is stopped temporarily. The screen returns to the DIRECTORY screen.
In the function menu, [F2] (REOPEN) is displayed instead of the usual function name [F2]
(EDIT).

 When [F7] (NO) is selected:

The editing mode is re-established.

[Supplement]

In the double editing screen, if the once stop operation is carried out for either file, the
DIRECTORY screen is displayed with all editing operations stopped.
To terminate editing, refer to the procedure for “5-3-15. Select & Quit.” In this case, however,
the execution of Quit/Stop command does not include the process for selecting the edited
file.

2 To restart editing work suspended by this function, select [F2] (REOPEN).

[Supplement]

Do not turn the power off while editing is suspended by this function. All of the editing done
will be lost.
 6115-E P-367
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-3-15.Select & Quit

The SELECT & QUIT command terminates the editing operation.
If using the double file editing screen, the file in whose program source the cursor is currently
located is quit and the single file editing screen is displayed (the remaining program source is
displayed in the single file editing screen).
If using the single file editing screen, the display returns to the DIRECTORY screen.
To execute quit, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select [F8] (SELECT & QUIT) from the function menu on the single/double editing screen.
When [F8] (SELECT & QUIT) is selected, the message “FILE EDIT FINISHED. ARE YOU
SURE YOU WANT TO SAVE FILE?” is displayed only when a file is edited.
Select [F6] (YES) or [F7] (NO) from the pop-up function menu.

 When [F6] (YES) is selected:

The file is saved, overwriting the previous data, and editing work is quit.
If [LF] is not entered in the last line of the program source, add [LF].

 When [F7] (NO) is selected:

Editing is quit without saving the file.

In either case, the edited file is selected.

[Supplement]

1) When the file is not being edited, the file is closed without displaying the message “QUIT
OK?”.
2) Always select [F8] (SELECT & QUIT) on completion of editing operations. If you do not,
the edited data is not saved in memory and the result is the same as if no editing had
been done.
3) Do not turn off the power during file editing. All of the editing work done will be lost.
4) When the file name extension is "MIN", MAIN PROGRAM SELECT is carried out. When
the file name extension is "SDF", SCHEDULE PROGRAM SELECT is carried out.
When the file name extension is neither "MIN" nor "SDF", this function can not be used.

5-3-16.Save and Select

If the extension is SDF when NC optional parameter bit No.67 Bit 7 is ON, SCHEDULE PROGRAM
SELECT is carried out. If the extension is other than SDF, MAIN PROGRAM SELECT is carried out.
(Procedure :[EXTENSION]→[F7:EXTENSION FUNCTION]→[F7:SAVE]→[F5:SAVE & SELECT])

Extension SELECT & QUIT SAVE & SELECT

SDF SCHEDULE PROGRAM SELECT SCHEDULE PROGRAM SELECT
MIN MAIN PROGRAM SELECT MAIN PROGRAM SELECT is
Other than above Pressing function key prohibited carried out.
 6115-E P-368
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-4. Device Information Operations

Device information can be confirmed in the DEVICE INFORMATION pop-up window, which is
displayed by selecting [F2] (DEVICE) from the function menu of the DIRECTORY screen.
If DEVICE is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8].

ME32125R1101800440001

Fig.5-31 DEVICE INFORMATION Pop-up Window

The contents of the DEVICE INFORMATION pop-up window are explained below.

DEVICE Indicates the currently selected device.

Indicates the format of the device. There are three
FORMAT
possibilities: OSP, NTFS, and UNKNOWN.
USED
FREE
Indicate the conditions of use of the selected device.
TOTAL
(conditions of use)
When a USB storage device with several partitions is
Current Partition
displayed, the partition No. currently selected is displayed.

When the DEVICE NAME input is changed and [F7] (REDRAW) is selected from the pop-up
function menu, the information of the designated device is displayed.
 6115-E P-369
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-5. FD0 Initialization

Initialization function reformats the FD0 device and restores the device to its initialized status after
deleting all the data contained.

[Supplement]

Note that all the data stored in the FD0 device are delete in initialization.

To initialize the FD0 device, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F3] (FD0 INIT) from the pop-up function menu in the DIRECTORY screen.
If FD0 INIT is not displayed, press the Extend key on the right of [F8].
When FD0 is not connected, error “99684 Device not ready ‘FD0:’” is displayed.

2 When the FORMAT screen is displayed, select START.

When the warning appears, select OK to start the formatting.

3 When the FORMAT COMPLETED screen appears, select OK.

5-6. RS232C
This NC has the RS232C serial interface.
The RS232C interface can be used to input, output, and verify external data.

[Supplement]

1) The RS232C interface of this NC is an exclusive connector to a puncher panel. When other
external equipment is connected, use a connector suitable for the equipment.
2) There are two data transfer methods through RS232C: RS/CS (hardware flow) and DC code
control methods. A coupling method may differ depending on external equipment.
3) Since this NC is provided with several communicating methods, an interconnecting cable can
also be selected.
To connect with any equipment, it is necessary to match the RS232C interface signal so as to
be able to communicate between the OSP and the external equipment.
4) The OSP-P300 is operated as the master station, and cannot be switched to a slave station.

There are the following parameter related to the RS232C:

 NC optional parameter (TAPE PUNCH IF)

For details, refer to the “SECTION 3 PARAMETER SETTING”.
 6115-E P-370
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-6-1. Input/Output Operation

Input

The input operation procedure from the RS232C is as follows:

Procedure :

1 Select [F4] (RS232C) from the function menu in the DIRECTORY screen.
When the RS232C is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8].

2 Select [F1] (INPUT) from the RS232C pop-up function menu.

The RS232C INPUT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800470001

Fig.5-32 RS232C INPUT Pop-up Window

3 Specify a file name to be input from the RS232C.

4 Specify an input data destination.

When a file name is input according to the step 3), the cursor moves to the input area of the
device setting.
To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu. The registered
device changes each time you press [F2].
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select a desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
The device name input area can only be used when OTHERS is selected. When OTHERS is
selected, the cursor automatically moves to the input area of the device name.
 6115-E P-371
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5 Input a file name.

After operating the step 4), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the file name
input area.

6 Set ON/OFF for appending the input data to the file specified in the memory.
After operating the step 5), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the check
box.
To append the input data, put a check mark.
The check mark appears and disappears alternately each time you press [F1] (check mark) in
the pop-up function menu.

7 Set ON/OFF for stopping the input operation during error detection.
After operating the step 6), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the check
box. When a check mark is put, an error portion is replaced with an exclamation mark “!” even
when an error is detected and the input operations is continued.

8 Select [F7] (OK).

Start the input processing.
The NC checks if the file name input from the RS232C (refer to “Input Format”) is the same
with the file name entered in the above step 3). If not the same, an error occurs.
To skip such collation, do not enter the file name in step 3) and proceeds to the next step.
When the reading operation is completed, the message “READING FINISHED” is displayed.
When a check mark is put for stopping the input operation during error detection, the number of
errors occurred during input operation is also displayed.
 6115-E P-372
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Output

The output operation procedure to the RS232C is as follows:

Procedure :

1 Select [F4] (RS232C) from the function menu in the DIRECTORY screen.
When the RS232C is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8].

2 Select [F2] (OUTPUT) from the RS232C pop-up function menu.

The RS232C OUTPUT pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800480001

Fig.5-33 RS232C OUTPUT Pop-up Window

3 Specify a device stored in a file to be output.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu. The registered
device changes each time you press [F2].
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select a desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
The device name input area can only be used when OTHERS is selected. When OTHERS is
selected, the cursor automatically moves to the input area of the device name.
 6115-E P-373
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

4 Input a file name.

After finishing the step 3), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the file name
input area.
When the cursor moves to the file name input area, the pop-up function menu is changed.
When a file name is selected from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
In the INDEX SELECT pop-up window displayed, select any file with the [up/down] cursor key.
From the pop-up function menu then displayed, select [F7] (OK).
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) and [F3] (SORT) from the INDEX SELECT pop-up window
function menu, the pattern and the sorting order of a file name displayed in the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window can be changed. The operation is the same as the aforementioned directory
changing operation.

5 Specify the file name to be output to the RS232C.

After operating the step 4), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the file name
input area.

6 Select [F7] (OK).

Start the output processing.
 6115-E P-374
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Verify

The verifying operation procedure is as follows:

Procedure :

1 Select [F4] (RS232C) from the function menu in the DIRECTORY screen.
When the RS232C is not displayed, press the extension key to the right of [F8].

2 Select [F3] (VERIFY) from the RS232C pop-up function menu.

The RS232C VERIFY pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800490001

Fig.5-34 RS232C VERIFY pop-up window

3 Specify a device stored in a verify source file.

To select the device, select the [F2] (NEXT) from the pop-up function menu. The registered
device changes each time you press [F2].
Alternatively, select [F1] (MENU) to display the device list in a pop-up function menu, then
select the desired device from this menu (the entry is confirmed on selection).
The device name input area can only be input if OTHERS has been selected. When OTHERS
is selected, the cursor automatically moves to the input area of the device name.

4 Input a verify source file name.

After operating the step 3), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the file name
input area.
When the cursor moves to the file name input area, the pop-up function menu is changed.
When a file name is selected from the directory, select [F1] (INDEX SELECT).
In the INDEX SELECT pop-up window displayed, select any file with the [up/down] cursor key.
From the pop-up function menu then displayed, select [F7] (OK).
By selecting [F2] (FILE NAME) and [F3] (SORT) from the INDEX SELECT pop-up window
function menu, the pattern and the sorting order of a file name displayed in the INDEX SELECT
pop-up window can be changed.
 6115-E P-375
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5 Specify the file name to be verified.

After operating the step 4), press the [up/down] cursor keys to move the cursor to the file name
input area.

6 Select [F7] (OK).

Start the verifying processing.
The NC checks if the file name read from the RS232C is the same with the file name entered in
the above step 5). If not the same, an error occurs.
To skip collation, do not enter the file name in step 5) and proceeds to the next step.
 6115-E P-376
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-6-2. Tape Format

Input Format

<For ISO Code>

% CR LF O Program Name CR LF Program END CR LF %

<For EIA Code>

ER CR O Program Name CR Program END CR ER

ME32125R1101800500001

 The transmission data must begin with a “%” or “ER” code, and must also end with a “%” or
“ER” code.
If the data does not begin with either a “%” or an “ER” code, it is assumed as the following.
A “%” of ISO code or an “ER” of EIA code exists in the first line (from the start to the feed-line
code).
The first line is ignored and the next line is operated and stored as a NC program.
D N N N N N N
C U U U $A . MIN U U U % CR LF 0 1 0 0 M02 CR LF %
2 L L L L L L

Ignored NC program
ME32125R1101800500002

A “%” of ISO code or an “ER” of EIA code does not exist in the first line (from the start to the
feed-line code).
All data including the first line is operated and stored as a NC program.

0 1 0 0 CR LF G 0 0 X M02 CR LF %

NC program
ME32125R1101800500003

 When ISO code is used, an [LF] or [CR LF] code should be designated at the end of each
record within the program. Switching between the “[LF] only” and the “[CR LF]” format is
possible (parameter setting).

 When EIA code is used, a [CR] code should be designated at the end of each record within the
program.
 6115-E P-377
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Output Format

<For ISO Code>

% CR LF 0 Program Name CR LF Program END CR LF %

<For EIA Code>

ER CR 0 Program Name CR Program END CR ER

ME32125R1101800510001

 When ISO code is used, the output will begin with a [%CR LF] or [% LF] code. When EIA code
is used, output will begin with a [ER CR] code.

 The machining program data will be output following the Program Name (No.).

 When ISO code is used, the output will end with a [%CR LF] or [% LF] code. When EIA code is
used, the output will end with an [ER CR] code.
 6115-E P-378
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-6-3. Specifications for RS232C Interface

(1) Start-stop System
This system sends a predetermined signal before and after each character.

a. A character consists of the following data.

LSB MSB
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0

a) b) c) d)

Bit configuration
ME32125R1101800520001

a) A start bit
b) 8 information bits
c) A parity bit
The presence or type (even or odd) of this bit is determined on the Optional Parameter
(Tape Puncher Interface) screen (page 3/3) by the RS232C communication parameter
“B3. RS232C Parity Bit”.
d) 2 stop bits
The number of stop bits is determined on the Optional Parameter (Tape Puncher
Interface) screen (page 3/3) by the RS232C communication parameter “B4. RS232C Stop
Bit”.

(2) Baud Rate (BPS Baud)

110, 330, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200

(3) Data Structure

1 start bit
8 data bits
1 or no parity bit (changeable with parameter)
1 or 2 parity bits (changeable with parameter)

(4) Parity check (character parity)

An even or odd or no parity (changeable with parameter)

(5) Maximum Data Transfer Cable Lengths

RS232C: 15 m (49 ft)
RS422: 1200 m (6562 ft) (with the use of RS232C-RS422 converter)
Optical fibers: 2000 m (6562 ft) (with the use of RS232C-optical converter)
 6115-E P-379
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

(6) RS232C Signal Levels

25V
Binary···0
High Signal status···Spacing
Control signal···ON
3V

0V

3V
Binary···1
Low Signal status···Marking
Control signal···OFF
25V
ME32125R1101800520002

(7) Description of Signals

Pin No. Signal Signal
Description
(DB25) name direction
1 FG - Grounding for safety
2 SD Output Transmitting data: Data line from the NC to an external device
3 RD Input Receiving data: Data line from an external device to the NC
Request to send
4 RTS Output Turns ON to start transmitting or receiving.
Thereafter, always ON
Clear to send
5 CTS Input When this signal is OFF, data is not outputted from NC. Used for BUSY/
READY control. If this signal is not used, connect to RTS of the NC.
Data set ready
Indicates that external equipment is ready to communicate. If this signal is
6 DSR Input OFF when setting data, NC becomes in a state of error. This signal cannot
be used for BUSY/READY control. If this signal is not used, connect to DTR
of the NC.
7 SG – Grounding for signals
Ready for operation.
Turns ON when the NC is ready for operation.
20 ER Output
When this signal is OFF, data is not read into NC even if data is transferred
to the NC.
 6115-E P-380
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-6-4. Connection with External Device

The following are the communication methods and an example connection diagram between NC
unit and external device. For details, refer to “Communication Methods” and subsequent
subsections.

Communication Methods

 DC code
The NC unit controls the communication flow by sending DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) signals. For
details, refer to “Control with DC Codes”.

 RS/CS
Flow control by hardware. For details, refer to “RS/CS Control”.

 No DC codes
This is a usual communication method requiring no operation procedure and executed without
confirmation of data reception under the following flow control.
This method is not used for the taper puncher interface.

 Data reception:
Since the communication flow is not controlled, the NC can receive data as far as the data
size is smaller than the buffer assigned to each OPS function.

 Data transfer:
The flow can be controlled by CTS.
 6115-E P-381
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Cable Connection

The OSP control unit has an RS232C connector.

Ex.

RS232C
CH0 CH1

ME32125R1101800550001

Correspondence between Connector numbers and Device name

Connector Number Device Name Remarks

CH0 CN1: RS232C interface (standard)
CH1 CN2: RS232C interface extension (optional)
CH2 CN3: RS232C interface extension (optional)

Select the parameter setting mode and set the NC optional parameter (TAPE PUNCHER
INTERFACE). The device names from CN1: to CN3: can be set on the screen for setting device
name in program operation, zero setting, tool data setting, and parameter setting modes. However,
the Device name that correspond to the existing connector numbers are only usable. In the above
example, CN1: and CN2: are usable. Therefore, connect the RS232C cable for the tape puncher
interface to either of them, and select the connected Device name. Set the other parameters
according to the external device. (After changing the parameters, turn off the power and turn it back
to make the change effective.)

1) Do not select the Device name having no corresponding connector CH number, because such
Device name may be used by the NC control unit.
2) When using RS232C interface, ensure that a checkmark or “1” is set at the following NC
optional parameters (long word, word, bit):
CN1: NC optional parameter bit No. 13 bit 1
CN2: NC optional parameter bit No. 14 bit 1
CN3: NC optional parameter bit No. 21 bit 1
Checkmarks are initially set at the above parameters.
If the above parameters are 0, the following error occurs when data transfer is attempted.
300 Device name FFFFFFFF ‘CN*’ (CN* is the specified device name.)
9022 No receive data during READY WAITING TIME
9031 RS232C incomplete Xon/Xoff sending during 150 msec
9037 RS232C incomplete sending during READY WAITING TIME
 6115-E P-382
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Control with DC Codes

The NC outputs DC control codes to control data transfer. The control with DC codes is made
effective by setting the RS232C communication parameter “B6. Flow control” on the Optional
Parameter (TAPE PUNCHER INTERFACE) screen (page 3/3).
DC control codes have the following DC1 to DC4.
DC stands for Device Control and means control characters used to start up an auxiliary device.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader starts
DC2 Tape punch starts
DC3 Tape reader stops
DC4 Tape punch stops

ME32125R1101800560001

[Supplement]

1) DC control codes are automatically generated by the NC. They do not need to be contained in
the program.
2) Control codes are effective for both ISO and EIA (see the above figure).
3) Control codes from an external device cannot be used to control the NC.
4) With a parameter, you can choose to or not to use DC control codes.
5) The character length handled by RS232C interface is fixed to 8 bits.
When ISO is selected as the tape code, remember that a character consists of ISO 7-bit code
+ even parity.

The diagram below shows the typical example of connection between NC unit and external device.

NC FG FG External
device
RD SD

SD RD

CS RS

RS CS

DR DR

ER ER

SG SG

ME32125R1101800560002

* The OSP turns on the ER signal (which is retained until the NC power is turned off) when
executing a command. When the cross cable (reverse cable) for RS232C is used, an error may
occur in the external device that monitors the DR signal. However, normal data transfer is
possible after you supply the power to the OSP and execute the input, output, or verify
command using RS232C.
 6115-E P-383
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Timing chart for input

When the external device becomes ready to send data and the OSP’s input or verify function is
activated, the NC starts data reading according to the following timing chart.

External
NC device

DR (on NC side)
Ready

D D D D
SD (on NC side) C C C C
Transmitted data 1 3 1 3

RD (on NC side) Data Data

Received data

MAX.100 characters MAX.100 characters

ME32125R1101800560003

(1) The CNC system sends a DC1 code.

(2) Upon the receipt of the DC1 code, the external device starts data transfer to the CNC system.

(3) After reading the program name, the CNC system sends a DC3 code.

(4) Upon the receipt of the DC3 code, the external device suspends data transfer to the CNC
system. The data transfer stops within 100 characters after the transmission of the DC3 code.

(5) The CNC system sends a DC1 code again after finishing the process.

(6) The external device restarts data transfer on receiving DC1.

(7) When the CNC system becomes so busy to read, it sends a DC3 code. It sends DC1 code to
resume the process.

(8) The external devices sends an end code to finish the data transfer.

(9) The CNC system sends a DC3 code when it finishes reading.

[Supplement]

To make the external device start data transfer without waiting for DC1 code, execute the OSP’s
input or verify command before getting the external device ready to send data.
 6115-E P-384
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Timing chart for output

When the external device becomes ready to receive data and the OSP’s output function is activated,
the NC starts data output according to the following timing chart.

External
NC device

DR (on NC side)
Ready 1 or 2 characters

D D
SD (on NC side) C Data Data C
Transmitted data 2 4

CS (on NC side)
Clear to send

ME32125R1101800560004

(1) The NC sends DC2 code.

(2) If the NC’s CS signal is ON, the NC continues data transfer.

(3) If the NC’s CS signal goes off, the NC temporarily stops data transfer within 2 characters. When
the NC’s CS signal comes ON again, the NC restarts data transfer.

(4) The NC sends the end code, feed holes, and DC4 code when it finishes data transfer.

[Supplement]

The feed holes, DC2, and DC4 can be omitted by setting data at the NC optional parameter
(TAPE PUNCHER INTERFACE).
 6115-E P-385
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

RS/CS Control

Both NC unit and external device execute data transfer through RS/CS signal cable under the
hardware flow control. To establish RS/CS control, select RS/CS at “B6. Flow control” in page 3/3
(RS232C parameter) of the NC optional parameter (TAPE PUNCHER INTERFACE).

[Supplement]

The character length handled by RS232C interface is fixed to 8 bits.

When ISO is selected as the tape code, remember that a character consists of ISO 7-bit code +
even parity.

The diagram below shows the typical connection example between NC and external device.

NC FG FG External
device
RD SD

SD RD

CS RS

RS CS

DR DR

ER ER

SG SG

ME32125R1101800570001

The OSP turns on the ER signal (which is retained until the NC power is turned off) when executing
a command. When the cross cable (reverse cable) for RS232C is used, an error may occur in the
external device that monitors the DR signal. However, normal data transfer is possible after you
supply the power to the OSP and execute the input, output, or verify command using RS232C.
 6115-E P-386
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Time chart for input

<When you activate the OSP’s input or verify function to start reading and get the external device
ready to send data, the NC starts reading data according to the following timing chart.>

External
NC device

Ready
DR (on NC side)

CS (on NC side)

Data Data
RD (on NC side)

MAX.100 characters
ME32125R1101800570002

(1) The external device starts sending data to NC.

(2) The NC reads the program name and turns off the RS signal.

(3) When the CS signal on the external device goes off, the external device temporarily stops data
transfer to the NC. The external device should stop data transfer within 100 characters after the
CS signal is turned off.

(4) When the NC finishes processing, it turns on the RS signal on NC side again.

(5) The external device detects activation of CS signal and resumes data transfer subsequently to
the transferred data.

(6) If the NC’s data processing cannot catch up with the reading speed, it turns off the RS signal on
NC side. When the NC restarts reading, it turns on the RS signal on NC side.

(7) The external device sends an end code to complete data transfer.

(8) The NC completes data reading. The RS signal on the NC side may be ON or OFF depending
on the condition where the NC received the last data.
 6115-E P-387
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

Timing chart for output

<When the external device becomes ready to receive data and the OSP’s output function is
activated, the NC starts data transfer according to the following timing chart.>

External
NC device

Ready
DR (on NC side)

Data Data
SD (on NC side)

CS (on NC side)

1 or 2 characters
ME32125R1101800570003

(1) The NC starts data transfer to the external device.

(2) If the NC’s CS signal is ON, the NC continues data transfer.

(3) If the NC’s CS signal turns off, the NC temporarily stops data transfer within 2 characters. When
the NC’s CS signal comes ON again, the NC restarts data transfer.

(4) The NC sends the end code and feed holes to finish punching.

[Supplement]

The feed holes can be omitted by setting data at the NC optional parameter (TAPE PUNCHER
INTERFACE).
 6115-E P-388
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-7. Preference Setting Operations

There are three preference settings as shown below:

(1) FILE PATTERN

Set the correspondence between file types and extension names.

(2) SORT
Set the sorting order in which programs are displayed in the directory after the power is
supplied.

(3) DISPLAY PROPERTY

Set the editing screen color when editing a file.

Each operation of preference setting is carried out from the PREF SETTING pop-up function menu
that is displayed when selecting [F7] (PREF SETTING) from the function menu of the DIRECTORY
screen.

ME32125R1101800580001
 6115-E P-389
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-7-1. File Pattern

To execute file pattern setting, follow the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F2] (FILE PATTERN) from the PREF SETTING pop-up function menu. The FILE
PATTERN pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800590001

Fig.5-35 FILE PATTERN Pop-up Window

2 Set a pattern in the FILE NAME PATTERN table.

[Supplement]

By setting the correspondence between file types and extensions here, file patterns can be
recognized during program selection and in directories.

3 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

The input pattern is stored in memory and the FILE PATTERN pop-up window closes.
 6115-E P-390
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-7-2. Sort
The sort function allows you to set the sorting order in which programs are displayed in the directory
after the power is supplied.
To set the sorting order, follow the procedure below.

Procedure :

1 Select the function key [F4] (SORT) from the pop-up function menu for environment setting.
The SORT pop-up function window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800600001

2 Locate the cursor on the desired sorting order.

3 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

When OK is selected, the set sorting order is stored in memory and the SORT pop-up window
closes.
 6115-E P-391
SECTION 5 PROGRAM OPERATIONS

5-7-3. Display Property

The display property setting determines the background color of the screen for file editing. With
change of background color, the character color also changes. The editing screen image can be
checked in the pop-up window.
Set the display property following the procedure below:

Procedure :

1 Select [F7] (DISPLAY PROPERTY) from the PREF SETTING pop-up function menu. The
DISPLAY PROPERTY pop-up window is displayed.

ME32125R1101800610001

Fig.5-36 DISPLAY PROPERTY pop-up window

2 Select the editor color for file editing.

The color alternates between “White” and “Black” each time you press [F2] (NEXT) in the pop-
up function menu.
Or, you can select [F1] (MENU) to display a list of editor color in the pop-up function menu. In
this menu, select any item to determine the color.

3 Select [F7] (OK) from the pop-up function menu.

Close the DISPLAY PROPERTY pop-up window to complete the setting.
APPENDIX
 6115-E P-392
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

SECTION 1 APPENDIX

1-1. Optional Parameter

NC Optional Parameter (Long Word)

Setting
No. Description Default
Range
Retraction in G73 cycle (high-speed deep hole)
Retraction in G83 cycle (deep hole) 0 to 10000
1 500
(Retraction amount specified with I, J command for G83 cycle (deep (μm)
hole))
Retraction in G83 cycle (deep hole)
0 to 10000
2 (Distance from the work when the tool is positioned after approaching the 1000
(μm)
work at a rapid feedrate from R point level in G83 cycle (deep hole))
Arc check data (Error in radius between the starting point and the end 2 to 200
3 20
point) (μm)
Cutter radius compensation vector check data 0 to 5000
4 50
(μm)
5 Decelerating distance (le) at end point for cutter radius compensation
0 to
corner override
0 99999999
6 Decelerating distance (ls) at starting point for cutter radius compensation
(μm)
corner override
Three-dimensional tool offset vector size -99999999
to
7 0
99999999
(μm)
Error data resulting from cutter radius compensation calculation for
2 to 200
9 minute circular arcs and quasi-full circles in cutter radius compensation 10
(μm)
mode
Maximum feedrate clamp value Depends on
0 to 200000
10 machine
(mm/min)
specification.
Retraction amount in G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring) cycles 0 to 10000
11 500
(μm)
Positioning point for RMILI (inner round milling) 500 to 5000
12 5000
(μm)
Number of bytes for the program data transmission until the DNC-B 0 to
13 cycle start. 0 99999999
(Byte)
Feedrate change value in the fixed cycle 1 to 20000
14 20000
(G01 feedrate [1 mm/min] for returning Z-axis) (mm/min)
Spindle index zero 0 to 359999
(ZERO OFFSET FOR SYNCH. TAPPING) Depends on (1/1000 deg)
15 machine or
specification. 0 to 3599999
(1/10000 deg)
 6115-E P-393
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Setting
No. Description Default
Range
Spindle IN-P check value 1 to 359999
Depends on
(IN-POSITION CHECK FOR SYNCH. TAPPING) (1/1000 deg)
machine
16 or
specification.
1 to 3599999
(1/10000 deg)
Spindle index angle at rapid feedrate 1 to 359999
(1/1000deg)
17 5000 or
1 to 3599999
(1/10000 deg)
Tolerance for the interference with cutter radius compensation 0 to
18 (TOLERANCE FOR THE INTERFERENCE WITH CUTTER R COMP.) 0 99999999
(μm)
Spindle orientation offset value 0 to 359999
(Zero position in spindle rotation) (1/1000 deg)
19 0 or
0 to 3599999
(1/10000 deg)
Spindle index position check range 0 to 20000
(1/1000 deg)
20 15000 or
0 to 200000
(1/10000 deg)
F1 digit feed accel./decel. constant 0 to
22 0
65535000
Motor continuous rating 110 to
23 (Continuous rating for synchronized tapping) 0 99999999
(W)
Circular radius R command error check amount 0 to 1000
25 0
(Value for checking error in radius command) (μm)
3-D arc command PQR permissible error 0 to
28 0
99999999
Spindle offset value for bite slot machining 0 to 359999
(1/1000 deg)
29 0 or
0 to 3599999
(1/10000 deg)
Safety door interlock 1 to 2000
30 2000
(mm/min)
Synchronization position shift amount (μm) Set
33 0
automatically
Cutting start point for RMILO (outer round milling) -99999999 to
34 5000 +99999999
(μm)
Cutting start point for RMILI (inner round milling) -99999999 to
35 5000 +99999999
(μm)
Z-axis cutting position -99999999 to
36 5000 +99999999
(μm)
 6115-E P-394
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Setting
No. Description Default
Range
Approach position -99999999 to
37 1000 +99999999
(μm)
Travel width at pick operation -99999999 to
38 1500 +99999999
(μm)
Upper limit feedrate value 0 to 200000
41 200000
(mm/min)
Minimum gauging tool length for automatic tool length offset/breakage 1 to 999
43 60
detection (mm)
Maximum tool length 0 to 999
44 0
(mm)
Error measurement function 4th (5th)-axis DIFF permissible value 0 to 359999
(1/1000 deg)
57 0 or
0 to 3599999
(1/10000 deg)
58 Chamfering speed (SU/INT) standard spec. (U-axis function) 10 10 to 6400
Leading edge offset, parallel and vertical rounding range 0 to 50000
59 1000
(1/10000 deg)
Valid setting range for misalignment amount 0 to 200
60 0
(μm)
Feedrate value on issuing F0 0 to
62 0 99999999
(μm/min)
65 M-LAP round bar return amount 100 1 to 1000
66 M-LAP clearance amount 2000 0 to 100000
 6115-E P-395
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

NC Optional Parameter (Word)

No. Description Default Setting Range

Number of tape feeds at tape punch
1 600 1 to 10000
(A10. number of feeds)
Defaults of tape lengths in divided punching 1 to 300
2 180
(m)
3 Decelerating ratio (r) of cutter radius compensation corner 1 to 100
100
4 override (%)
Internal identification angle (θ) of cutter radius compensation 1 to 179
corner override 90
(deg)
Decelerating ratio (r) of cutter radius compensation arc’s 1 to 100
5 100
internal override (%)
6
Override in pocket milling (spiral type) corner cutting 1 to 100
7 100
Pocket milling (spiral) PMILR (%)
Magazine pot number for touch probe 0 to number of
8 0
magazine pots
Imaginary spindle rpm for machine lock 1 to 8000
9 2000
min-1 {rpm}
Designation of operation method
Setting Value Operation Method
0 Normal operation (method A)
11 Large-volume operation 1 0 to 3
1
(method B)
Operation without branching and
2
subprograms (method S)
Rapid feedrate override to home position
1 to 100
12 This function is switched between effective and ineffective by 10
(%)
data setting at the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 23.
Schedule program auto update
13 0: Ineffective 0 0 to 1
1: Effective
16
STM answer back time over check period 0 to 120
18 120
(minutes)
In-position time over check period 600 0 to 6000
19
(60sec) ( × 0.1 sec)
Allowable number (n) of torque low for synchronized tapping
21 (SYNCH. TAPPING TORQUE MONITOR PERMISSIBLE 4 0 to 32 (times)
COUNT)
29 First referenced home position number (FS-9 tape conversion) 0 1 to 8
Second referenced home position number (FS-9 tape
30 0 1 to 8
conversion)
Third referenced home position number (FS-9 tape
31 0 1 to 8
conversion)
Fourth referenced home position number (FS-9 tape
32 0 1 to 8
conversion)
 6115-E P-396
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

No. Description Default Setting Range

Maximum allowable sets of screw pitch error compensation 2304
33 2304
(point)
RS-232C waiting time for preparation end for CN0, TT 1 to 9999
34 10
(sec)
RS-232C waiting time for preparation end for CN1 1 to 9999
35 10
(B5. Waiting time for ready (waiting time for preparation end)) (sec)
36 RS-232C waiting time for preparation end for CN2 10 1 to 9999
37 RS-232C waiting time for preparation end for CN3 10 1 to 9999
39 RS-232C baud rate for CN1 600 110 to 19200
40 RS-232C baud rate for CN2 600 110 to 19200
41 RS-232C baud rate for CN3 600 110 to 19200
42 RS-232C baud rate for CN4 600 110 to 192000
RS-232C channel number to be used on DCN-A channel
43 0 0 to 4
0=TT:(CN0:) 1=CN1: 2=CN2: 3=CN3: 4=CN4:
DC code control channel number (unlimited length buffer
44 operation) 0 0 to 4
0=CN0: 1=CN1: 2=CN2: 3=CN3: 4=CN4:
Specifying a puncher device name
(device name for "program operation")
Setting value External device name
45 1 1 to 3
1 CN1 [RS-232C]
2 CN2 [RS-232C]
3 CN3 [RS-232C]
External equipment device name designation of print data
46 output 0 0 to 5
0=TT:(CN0:) 1=CN1: 2=CN2: 3=CN3: 4=PR: 5=PP:
48 Average number of sampling data sets for load display 16 4 to 80 (times)
Synchronization control of constant linear acceleration or
49 20 0 to 30
deceleration
Synchronization permissible error A 0 to 1000
50 0
(μm)
Synchronization permissible error B 0 to 5000
51 0
(μm)
Designating the alarm levels recorded in the alarm history by
the machining management function
54 0 0 to 3
0: Alarm A, B, C, D 1: Alarm A, B, C 2: Alarm A, B 3: Alarm A
only
56 Automatic gauging retry counter 0 0 to 10
3-D arc projection path judgment tolerance amount 0 to 32767
59 0
(μm)
Synchronized tapping torque monitor
Spindle speed (A) 1 to 100
61 90
(Spindle speed rate for monitoring synchronized tapping (%)
torque)
Synchronized tapping torque monitoring wait time t 1 to 1000
62 2
(Wait time for synchronized tapping torque monitoring) ( × 0.1sec)
64 U-axis torque limit 0 1 to 500
74 Common variable backup star number 0 0 to 10000
 6115-E P-397
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

No. Description Default Setting Range

75 Common variable backup finish number 0 0 to 10000
Time to maintain 50% speed from a stopped state when in 0 to 200
79 0
spindle overload state (10 m/s)
Time to maintain 75% speed from 50% speed when in spindle 0 to 200
80 0
overload state (10 m/s)
Geometric error compensation straight axis maximum 0 to 50
82 20
compensation amount (absolute value) (0.01 mm)
Geometric error compensation, rotary axis maximum 0 to 50
83 10
compensation amount (absolute value) (0.01 deg)
MANUAL skip feedrate clamp value
1 to 10000
85 Clamping will occur when the manual skip feedrate exceeds 0
(mm/min)
this setting value.
Feedrate variation ratio during teaching IN mode 1 to 100
101 0
(%)
Spindle speed variation ratio during teaching IN mode 1 to 100
102 0
(%)
First approach speed in interactive gauging operation 1 to 2000
105 0
(mm/min)
Channel number to judge the machine temperature is low. When thermal
deformation
compensation
106 4
specification is
effective.: 1 to 8
TAS-S/TAS-C: 1 to 30
107 Temperature to judge whether the machine temperature is low. 50 -200 to 600 (0.1°C)
110 Indexing offset amount 0 0 to 359
Puncher IF & parameter input/output
111 (B7. RS signal on time after transfer completion (remains 0 1 to 9999
on=0))
Puncher IF & parameter input/output
112 0 1 to 9999
(B8.RS signal off time in case of turning off)
Synchronous tapping return speed override 1 to 200
113 0
(RETURN SPEED OVERRIDE FOR SYNCH. TAPPING) (%)
120 Input position of the spindle pulse handle 0 1 to 7
OSP-P300M I-MAP-C tap pilot hole magnification 1 to 1000
121 900
(0.1 %)
Servo Navi M function, arc cutting time for reverse projection 1 to 32767
122 4000
auto adjustment (msec)
Servo Navi M function, arc cutting speed for other than the 1 to 32767
123 10000
reverse unit of reverse projection auto adjustment (mm/min)
BLADE T400 U-axis thrust monitoring, U-axis compensation 1 to 5000
133 0
unit amount (0.1 μm)
BLADE T400 U-axis thrust monitoring, U-axis compensation 1 to 1000
134 0
interval [*10 msec] (10 msec)
Buffer capacity of operation buffer capacity expansion function 2 to 10
148 0
(MB) (MB)
 6115-E P-398
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

NC Optional Parameter (Bit)

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Setting the tape code /automatic judgment for
tape code
Respective combination of two bits results in
following operation status.
0 Bit0="0" Bit1="0"
ISO EIA 1
This returns an EIA code at "Read" and "Verify",
and issues an error if tape codes do not agree.
EIA comes with "punch".
Bit0="1" Bit1="0"
This returns an ISO code at "Read" and "Verify",
and issues an error if tape codes do not agree.
ISO comes with "punch".
Bit0="0" Bit1="1"
Automatically judged at "Read" and "Verify"
irrespective of the tape code of ISO/EIA. EIA Automatically Not automatically
1 comes with "punch". 1
1 judged judged
Bit0="1" Bit1="1"
Automatically judged at "Read" and "Verify"
irrespective of the tape code of ISO/EIA. ISO
comes with "punch".
2 Performing a TV check of tape Performed Not performed 0
3 Tape separator code ISO%EIA ER Feed hole 0
4 Tape is verified at tape read. Verified Not verified 0
5 If not verified, tape is rewound after read. Rewound Not rewound 0
Special code (other than $20 to $5F and HT)
6 becomes alarm. Alarm No alarm 1
DEL, BS, CR are ignored.
Special code (other than $20 to $5F and HT)is
7 not stored. Not stored Stored 0
DEL, BS, and CR are ignored.
 6115-E P-399
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
During automatic operation with the single block
ON, a block of a control statement such as IF,
GOTO or CALL usually does not come to a stop
0 Stop Non-stop 0
until the next block is executed. This bit is
intended to select a stop or a non- stop in the
particular control statement block.
In multiple rotary table rotation control, rounding
processing of the actual value on the work
1 Does Does not 0
coordinate system is carried out when the
control is reset.
Makes the dry run effective even for G00 (rapid
feed) commands. A rapid feed command is
2 Effective Ineffective 0
executed at a dry run feedrate as with a cutting
feed command.
3 0
2
Output of print function to external device is
4 Effective Ineffective 0
made effective.
Cycle start after the mode has been switched
5 Possible Impossible 0
from the automatic to setting is possible.
6 Makes fraction processing. Always set at “1”. Does Does not 1
During automatic operation with the single block
OFF, does not carry out reading or arithmetic
operations for any of the blocks that follow the
block in process until the operation is
completed. Note, however, that during cutter
7 No buffering Buffering 0
radius compensation, reading and arithmetic
operations are carried out until the intersecting
point is found (for up to three blocks). (The
operation to read blocks which follow the block
presently executed is called buffering.)
0 Selects inches or mm for length unit system Inch mm 0
Selects 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec for the As set by bit 2 to
1 Yes 1
input unit system. bit 5 and bit 7
Selects 0.01 mm or 0.001 mm for length unit
2 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0
system.
Selects either 0.1 mm/min and 0.01 inch/min or
0.1 mm/min 1 mm/min
3 1 mm/min and 0.1 inch/min for the speed input 0
0.01 inch/min 0.1 inch/min
system.
3 Selects either 0.001 mm/rev and 0.0001 inch/
0.001 mm/rev 0.01 mm/rev
4 rev or 0.01 mm/rev and 0.001 inch/rev for the 0
0.0001 inch/rev 0.001 inch/rev
speed input system.
Selects 0.01 sec or 0.1 sec for the time input
5 0.01 sec 0.1 sec 0
unit.
Selects 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec for the As set by bit 1 to
6 Yes 0
unit of the data with decimal point. bit 5 and bit 7
Selects 0.001 sec or 0.1 sec for the time input
7 0.001 sec 0.1 sec 0
system.
 6115-E P-400
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Selects 0.001 deg or 0.0001 deg for angle unit
0 0.0001 deg 0.001 deg 0
system.
Sets whether or not the part program selected
when the power was turned off last is
1 automatically selected when the automatic Does Does not 1
mode is established after the NC power is
turned on.
In an NC reset, zeros the manual shift in manual
interruption and the shift in pulse handle Does not, but as
2 Does 1
interruption (MANUAL SHIFT ACTUAL/ it is.
MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL).
4 Enables movement of the program read pointer
3 Possible Impossible 1
after NC start.
Does not display the system subprogram (SSB,
4 Does not Does 0
LIB) in automatic operation mode.
5 0
Displays a part of the current position display in Local coordinate Work coordinate
6 0
the local coordinate system. system system
Amount from the
Selects the relative position display, in reference Relative position
origin of the work
7 to the reset position, for an external position in reference to 0
coordinate
readout device. the reset position
system
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 5 0
Displays a part of the current position display in Local coordinate Work coordinate
6 0
the local coordinate system. system system
To produce the current value and graphic to be
7 displayed, adds the shift in the manual Does Does not 1
intervention or pulse handle overlap.
0 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the X-axis. Does Does not 1
1 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the Y-axis. Does Does not 1
2 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the Z-axis Does Does not 1
3 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the 4th-axis. Does Does not 0
6
4 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the 5th-axis. Does Does not 0
5 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the 6th-axis. Does Does not 0
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-401
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 The parameter sets whether or not the [AXIS Does Does not 0
1 COM. CANCEL] switch is recognized to cancel Does Does not 0
axis commands. When the [AXIS COM.
2 Does Does not 1
CANCEL] switch is turned on, the commands of
3 the axis for which the corresponding bit is set for Does Does not 0
4 “1” are canceled. If the axis command is Does Does not 0
canceled, neither calculation nor movement
takes place.
7 Bit 0 = Cancels X-axis commands
Bit 1 = Cancels Y-axis commands
5 Bit 2 = Cancels Z-axis commands Does Does not 0
Bit 3 = Cancels 4th-axis commands
Bit 4 = Cancels 5th-axis commands
Bit 5 = Cancels 6th-axis commands
6 0
7 0
In data setting, unit system of length is either
0 Inch mm 0
“inch” or “mm”.
In data setting, unit is either minimum setting 1mm, 1inch, Minimum setting
1 1
unit or 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec. 1deg, 1sec unit
In data setting, unit system of length is either 0.1
2 0.00001 inch 0.1 μm 0
μm or 0.00001 inch.
9 In data setting, unit system of angle is either
3 0.0001 deg. 0.001 deg. 0
0.001 deg. or 0.0001 deg.
4 0
5 0
In the data setting, the decimal point indicates 1
6 Basic unit Bit 1 setting 0
mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec.
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 NC file name is not output at DNC punch output. Not output Output 0
10
4 Verify output is made at DNC punch output. Does Does not 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-402
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
Slant face Machine axis
Designates the fixed cycle tool nose runoff
4 coordinate coordinate 0
11 direction at the slanted face machining function.
system system
Designation of parameter setting screen for
5 2nd screen 1st screen 0
coordinate system conversion
Gives a command for transmitting the
6 coordinate system conversion value when the Does Does not 0
operation mode is switched to MANUAL
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 File name output at tape punch Not punched out Punched out 0
Specify the end code for each record at tape
3 LF CRLF 0
punch with ISO codes.
12
4 Specify a code for feeding part at tape punch. Space NULL 0
Feed not
5 Specify feed at tape punch. Feed available 0
available
6 0
7 0
0 Stop bit for CN1: 1-bit 2-bit 0
1 Ready signal for CN1: Internal "Ready" External "Ready" 0
2 Parity check for CN1: Yes No 0
3 Parity for CN1: Even numbers Odd numbers 0
13
4 8-bit JIS CN1: 8-bit JIS 7-bit JIS 0
5 DC code control for CN1: Available Not available 0
6 0
7 File name provided at DNC-A read for CN1: Provided Not provided 0
0 Stop bit for CN2: 1-bit 2-bit 0
1 Ready signal for CN2: Internal "Ready" External "Ready" 0
2 Parity check for CN2: Yes No 0
3 Parity for CN2: Even numbers Odd numbers 0
14
4 8-bit JIS CN2: 8-bit JIS 7-bit JIS 0
5 DC code control for CN2: Available Not available 0
6 0
7 File name provided at DNC-A read for CN2: Provided Not provided 0
 6115-E P-403
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
Whether this STM answer back time over check
5 is made effective or ineffective is set for NC Effective Ineffective 0
15 optional parameter (word) No. 18.
In-position time over check function is made
effective.
6 Effective Ineffective 0
Set the in-position time over check time for NC
optional parameter (word) No. 19
In the inch system the unit system for an F
7 command used for a rotary axis can be 25.4 deg/min 1 deg/min 0
selected.
0 0
1 0
2 0
Sets the level of alarm which occurs if a
3 program is selected in the background mode Alarm C Alarm D 0
16 while a file is being accessed.
Appends a symbol “<” that indicates the range
4 Appended Not appended 0
where editing is not guaranteed.
5 0
6 0
7 0
Fixes the cycle axis for a fixed cycle, which may
0 be any axis other than plane designation, at the Does Does not 0
Z-axis.

1 0
Specifies the shift direction and axis in a fixed bit1 0 0 1 1
cycle (G76, G87). bit2 0 1 0 1
This is effective only when bit 0 is “1”.
2 Shift direction P-X N-X P-Y N-Y 0
ME32125R1101900010001

At a reset, clears the mirror images for all axes,

17 3 Does Does not 0
providing normal conditions.
4 0
External program selection is executed for main Schedule
5 Main program 0
program or schedule program. program
In external program selection operation, the
6 Does not Does 0
selection of the same file name is not executed.
If synchronized tapping specification is selected,
this specifies which tapping cycle the G codes Synchronized Conventional
7 0
(G74, G84) call, conventional tapping cycle or tapping cycle tapping cycle
synchronized tapping cycle
 6115-E P-404
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 G00 G01 1
1 G18 G17 0
2 G19 G17 0
3 Specified the G code to be set automatically G56 G53 0
18
4 when the power supply is turned on. G91 G90 0
5 G95 G94 0
6 G22 G23 0
7 0
0 One-directional positioning at a target point is N direction P direction 0
1 carried out after an overrun is made against that N direction P direction 0
point. It is possible to determine the final
2 N direction P direction 1
positioning direction on an axis base. In other
3 words, once the N-direction is established, N- N direction P direction 0
4 directional positioning does not involve an N direction P direction 0
overrun; but P-directional positioning involves
an overrun before actual positioning. If the P-
direction is established, the relationship is
reversed.
Bit 0 = X-axis commands
Bit 1 = Y-axis commands
19 Bit 2 = Z-axis commands
Bit 3 = 4th-axis commands
Bit 4 = 5th-axis commands
Bit 5 = 6th-axis commands
5 N direction P direction 0
Bit = 0 Bit = 0

Bit = 1 Bit = 1

N p
Target point
This overrun
amount is set for
a user parameter
ME32125R1101900010002

0 0
For single-axis command, actual position or a
1 point on the arc is taken as the command value Any point on arc Actual position 0
for the axis not programmed.
2 0
20 3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-405
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 Stop bit for CN3: 1-bit 2-bit 0
1 Ready signal for CN3: Internal "Ready" External "Ready" 0
2 Parity check for CN3: Yes No 0
3 Parity for CN3: Even numbers Odd numbers 0
21
4 8-bit JIS CN3: 8-bit JIS 7-bit JIS 0
5 DC code control for CN3: Available Not available 0
6 0
7 File name provided at DNC-A read for CN3: Provided Not provided 0
0 Punched Not punched 0
1 Set an EIA code to indicate "=". Punched Not punched 0
2 Set the punched hole made by punching a key Punched Not punched 0
3 to be mated with "=" on the user puncher using Punched Not punched 0
27 bits. Set data to be odd parity. It is also applied
4 in DNC-B. Punched Not punched 0
5 Share the information here for the following Punched Not punched 0
6 data. Punched Not punched 0
7 Punched Not punched 0
0 Punched Not punched 0
1 Punched Not punched 0
2 Punched Not punched 0
3 Punched Not punched 0
28 Set an EIA code to indicate "*".
4 Punched Not punched 0
5 Punched Not punched 0
6 Punched Not punched 0
7 Punched Not punched 0
0 Punched Not punched 0
1 Punched Not punched 0
2 Punched Not punched 0
3 Punched Not punched 0
29 Set an EIA code to indicate "[".
4 Punched Not punched 0
5 Punched Not punched 0
6 Punched Not punched 0
7 Punched Not punched 0
0 Punched Not punched 0
1 Punched Not punched 0
2 Punched Not punched 0
3 Punched Not punched 0
30 Set an EIA code to indicate "]".
4 Punched Not punched 0
5 Punched Not punched 0
6 Punched Not punched 0
7 Punched Not punched 0
 6115-E P-406
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 Punched Not punched 0
1 Punched Not punched 0
2 Punched Not punched 0
3 Punched Not punched 0
31 Set an EIA code to indicate "$".
4 Punched Not punched 0
5 Punched Not punched 0
6 Punched Not punched 0
7 Punched Not punched 0
0 0
If even one axis is at the stroke limit in automatic
1 or MDI mode cutting feed operation, it causes Alarm Not alarm 0
an alarm.
2 0
32 3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
Graphic coordinate system is made effective
0 Effective Ineffective 0
when NC is reset.
1 0
Slant-face Conforms to the
Mirror image is effective for the slant-face
2 coordinate setting for No. 34, 0
coordinate system.
system bit 2
33 Counting of counters (work counter, NC running
3 counter, spindle rotation counter, cutting time Only AUTO mode All modes 0
counter) occurs only in auto mode.
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-407
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Single block stop at point R level in the fixed
0 Effective Ineffective 1
cycle is effective.
1 MOP-TOOL function is ineffective. Ineffective Effective 0
Mirror image is effective for local coordinate Work coordinate Local coordinate
*2 0
system or work coordinate system. system system
System G code macros 300 to 349 are MODIN
3 MODIN CALL 1
type.
34 READ/WRITE Only READ
*4 System variable VINCH is made write enabled. 0
enabled enabled
5 0
To set whether the calculation results of the
function (ROUND, FIX, FUP) are to convert
With decimal
*6 numerical data into an integer with or without a Integer 0
point
decimal point when setting it for an address
character.
7 0
The unit of variables assigned to MSB is set at
0.001 mm (0.0001 in.) when bit 0 and bit 6 of 0.001 mm 1 mm
0 0
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 3 are “0” and (0.0001 in.) (1 in.)
“1”, respectively.
Uni-direction automatic gauging with touch
1 Does Does not 0
probe
Automatic gauging and automatic tool length
2 Does Does not 0
offset/broken tool detection with ring sensor
36 Default of the maximum tool length for
3 automatic tool length offset/broken tool Effective Ineffective 0
detection
Chip cover interference prevention (MCV-AII
4 Does Does not 0
using MSB)
5 0
6 0
7 0
Synchronized operation, synchronization error
0 ON OFF 0
correction mode input
Synchronized operation, synchronized position
1 Possible Not possible 0
shift amount setting
2 0
Function for fixing projection plane for the
3 execution of 3D circular interpolation command Effective Ineffective 0
(G17, G18, G19)
37
In the rapid feed mode operation, the command
4 Yes No 0
causing overtravel causes an alarm
5 Selection of PQR command method for 3-D arc Position Normal vector 0
A work number is
A work number is
Selection of a main program used for machining taken as a main
6 taken as a main 0
a workpiece in the pallet pool line control (PPC) program file
program name
name
7 0
 6115-E P-408
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
In the slide hold operation during tolerance
38 control mode, axis feed stops on the
4 Does Does not 0
programmed command point in other than
tolerance mode 0.
NG1 tool as replacement tool (for spare tool
5 Does not Does 0
replacement specs.)
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
*3 A-axis multi-turn function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
39
*4 B-axis multi-turn function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
*5 C-axis multi-turn function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
6 Animated graphic display Not supported Supported 0
7 0
0 0
1 RS/CS control availability for CN1: Available Not available 0
2 RS/CS control availability for CN2: Available Not available 0
3 RS/CS control availability for CN3: Available Not available 0
4 0
40 5 0
DC2 and DC4 are not input or output at reading/
6 Not input/output Input/output 0
punching RPD and PIP.
Mute read after data ends and DC code control
7 at RPD and PIP read. Ends with DC code No Yes 0
TYPE2. No DC3
 6115-E P-409
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 0
Switches the polarity of spindle DA speed voltage
command by the combination with the setting for bit 3.
Bit 1 Bit 3 Contents
DA speed command is output in positive voltage when the
normal spindle rotation type is used.
0 0
DA speed command is output in negative voltage when
the reverse spindle rotation type is used.
DA speed command is output in negative voltage when
1 0 the normal spindle rotation type is used.
1 DA speed command is output in positive voltage when the 0
reverse spindle rotation type is used.
DA speed command is output in positive voltage when the
0 1 normal spindle rotation type is used.
DA speed command is output in positive voltage when the
41 reverse spindle rotation type is used.
DA speed command is output in negative voltage when
1 1 the normal spindle rotation type is used.
DA speed command is output in negative voltage when
the reverse spindle rotation type is used.
ME32125R1101900010003

2 0
Switches the polarity of spindle DA speed
voltage command by the combination with the
3 0
setting for bit 1. (See the table given in
explanation for bit 1.)
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 In external program selection (4-digit BCD input), if “0” is used in higher digits, “0” is not 0
1 handled as program file name. 0
2 Bit 0 Bit 1 Contents 0
3 0 0 All four digits are handled as program name. 0
If the second and higher digits of BCD input are all "0", higher
4 1 0 0
digits from the second digit are not handled as program name.

0 1 If the third and higher digits of BCD input are all "0", higher digits
42 from the third digit are not handled as program name.
5 0
1 1 If the fourth digit of BCD input is "0", fourth digit is not handled
as program name.
ME32125R1101900010004

Execution of special operation if the target

6 position, specified in the rapid feed mode, is Executed Not executed 1
outside the limit range.
7 0
 6115-E P-410
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
G00 linear interpolation positioning is carried
0 Yes No 0
out.
G60 linear interpolation positioning is carried
1 Yes No 0
out.
G30 linear interpolation positioning is carried
2 Yes No 0
out.
Liner interpolation positioning is carried out in
3 Yes No 0
home position movement by M code
46 Level B alarm occurs if positioning point,
4 specified in the linear interpolation mode, Effective Ineffective 0
exceeds the travel limit.
In manual gauging, gauging of the center of ID/
5 Yes No 0
OD is made in 3-point gauging mode.
Auto-cycle/single is effective at the start of Auto/single
6 Auto effective 0
interactive work gauging operation. effective
Automatic zero point setting is carried out in
7 Carried out Not carried out 0
interactive work gauging operation.
0 0
Slanted
Coordinate system in which tool length offset is Work coordinate
1 coordinate 0
carried out in 3-D coordinate system conversion system
system
2 0
In manual gauging, the center between faces
3 (between inside faces, between outside faces) 3-point gauging 2-point gauging 0
48 is obtained in two- or three-point gauging.
4 0
The cutter diameter compensation value set for
the diameter in the tool file is taken as the
5 Does Does not 0
compensation value of the indicated
compensation number.
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
49 Set an EIA code to indicate "#".
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-411
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
50 Set irregular codes.
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
51 Set regular codes.(ISO code)
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
55 5 0
Sets the display pattern on the tool list screen “---” is “***” is
6 0
for tools not existing in the pot/tool table. displayed. displayed.
Sets whether or not a replacing tool number is
7 input at the interactive programming data input Not input Input 0
screen.
0 0
The direct position sensor operation
1 Effective Ineffective 0
confirmation function is made effective.
2 0
3 0
In the Z-axis return operation in the G73/G83
59 4 fixed cycle, G00 mode is replaced with G01 G01 G00 0
mode.
For the PPC, this parameter sets whether or not
5 the manual operation screen (touch panel) is Displayed Not displayed 0
displayed. (MX)
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-412
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
In the G11/G10 mode, actual position data is
calculated including the mirror image,
0 Effective Ineffective 0
incremental function, attachment offset, and tool
length offset value.
In the G11/G10 mode, actual position data is
1 calculated including the mirror image and Effective Ineffective 0
incremental function.
In the G69/G68 mode, actual position data is
60 calculated including the mirror image,
2 Effective Ineffective 1
incremental function, attachment offset, and tool
length offset value.
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 B-contact A-contact 0
1 B-contact A-contact 0
2 B-contact A-contact 0
3 Switches the contact type of the sensor inputs 1 B-contact A-contact 0
61 (bit 0) to 8 (bit 7) between contact-A and
4 contact-B. B-contact A-contact 0
5 B-contact A-contact 0
6 B-contact A-contact 0
7 B-contact A-contact 0
For the PPC, this parameter sets whether or not
the pallet in the standby station is automatically Unloaded Not unloaded
0 0
unloaded to the setup station if machining automatically automatically
schedule does not exist for the next pallet. (MX)
1 0
63 2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 1
2 0
3 0
64 Designating the feedrate in helical cutting Tangential Tangential
4 (Effective only when the Super Hi-NC control is direction of the direction of the 0
activated) helical projected arc
5 0
6 0
7 0
 6115-E P-413
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 0
1 DNC-DT default extension code. MIN .MIN None 0
Switching between display with 3 axes and
2 display with over 4 axes in load ON/OFF 3 axes 4 axes or more 0
window
3 0
66 NC reset ineffective/effective in execution of
4 Ineffective Effective 0
M30
Function for reducing continuous synchronized
5 Effective Ineffective 0
tapping time effective/ineffective
Changing default device name in part program
6 selection from directory of the DNC-DT multi-file HD: TC: 0
function
7 DNC-DT multi-file function ineffective/effective Effective Ineffective 0
0 Hi-G function ineffective/effective Ineffective Effective 0
Ignoring M3 command in fixed cycles for high
speed deep hole drilling (G73), deep hole
1 Invalid command Valid command 0
drilling (G83), drilling (G81, G82), and boring
(G85, G89)
Ignoring R-point command when M54 command
2 (R-point return) is specified in a fixed cycle Invalid command Valid command 0
except back boring cycle (G87)
67 In-position for cycle axes in a fixed cycle
3 Effective Ineffective 0
ineffective/effective
Spindle stop command (M5) effective at Z point
4 Effective Ineffective 0
of a hole bottom in floating tapping (G74, G84)
Low acceleration/deceleration with time
5 Effective Ineffective 0
constant T2 (Hi-G function) effective/ineffective
6 0
7 0
0 High speed synchronized tapping function Effective Ineffective 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
68 4 0
5 0
6 0
Method of designating a file for DNC-DT Direct input of a Selection from a
7 0
program selection file name list
 6115-E P-414
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Nearest path command M403 issued when the
0 M403 M15 0
4th rotary axis is reset
Nearest path command M404 issued when the
1 M404 M115 0
5th rotary axis is reset
Nearest path command M405 issued when the
2 M405 M331 0
6th rotary axis is reset
69 3 0
The PN in the CALL MODIN command is not
4 Not used Used 0
used as program number.
5 0
6 0
7 0
Priority switched between status display and the
0 Status display Alarm display 0
other
1 In-position for home position effective/ineffective Effective Ineffective 0
2 0
The machine stops on receiving a single block
3 command in the M code macro for command Stops Does not stop 0
type system.
70
In the fixed cycle using the slope coordinate
4 system, G09 (exact stop) is issued in all the axis Issued Not issued 0
movement blocks.
The override upper limit is set to 100% when G With upper limit
5 No limit 0
31 is specified. 100%
6 0
7 Use Notepad for editing part programs. Notepad OSP editor 0
Specification of no-touching sensor
measurement approach direction
0 0
The no-touching sensor measurement approach Bit 0 Bit 1 Detail
direction is specified together with bit 1 setting. 0 0 -X → +X
1 0 -Y → +Y
Specification of no-touching sensor
0 1 +X → -X
measurement approach direction
1 1 1 +Y → -Y 0
Specification of no-touching sensor
ME32125R1101900010005
measurement approach direction
2
72 Effective
Ineffective
Manual feed in tool axis direction is effective. (Manual feed in
3 (Manual feed on 0
(For universal B/C attachment) tool axis
inclined surface)
direction)
4 0
5 0
Y-axis current position check in contour cutting
6 Ineffective Effective 0
function is effective/switching the opposite side.
Tool number specification in the ATC sub
7 Tool no. Pot no. 0
operation panel
 6115-E P-415
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
When an identical file exists with DNC-C
0 Ethernet [D, NCP], the program file is Deleted Error 0
transferred after deletion.
1 0
Coordinate system with which the shift amount Workpiece base Workpiece
2 is effective with tool nose point control mode coordinate coordinate 0
OFF with 5-axis machining function system system
73 3 0
4 0
The load display function for each attachment is
5 Ineffective Effective 0
not available
The interlock signal of spindle path control
6 Effective Ineffective 0
function is ignored.
An alarm D is notified with NC alarm notification
7 Notified Not notified 0
[D, ALM] with DNC-C Ethernet.
Inductosyn system error correction
0 Effective Ineffective 0
NC 4th axis error measurement function bit
Inductosyn system error correction
1 Effective Ineffective 0
NC 5th axis error measurement function bit
2 0
3 0
74 Movement to the 1st approach position is
Rapid traverse
4 performed by G31F=PFA at an automatic G31F = PFA 0
G0
breakage detection.
5 0
Rewriting the environmental file by the Collision Ineffective
6 Effective 0
Avoidance System DRAW command (rereading only)
7 Synchronous slave axis adjustment mode ON ON OFF 0
 6115-E P-416
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
The center misalignment correction value is
0 applied to the enter coordinate of the rotary Used Not used 0
table with contour cutting function.
With the contour cutting function it is not
1 checked that the Y-axis position is at the rotation Checked Not checked 0
center when starting contour cutting.
System variable
Calculation method for the current position method for the Calculation
2 when the I-MAP-A/B reference position is not block end method from the 0
specified. command current position
position
75 3 0
The tool grooving command G142 is used in the
4 same manner as the tool grooving on arbitrary The same Not the same 0
surface command G288.
The tool grooving command G142 is used in the
5 same manner as the tool grooving on arbitrary The same Not the same 0
surface command G289.
The current position on inclined surface is Inclined shift
6 Old screen 0
displayed in the conventional manner. (Screen) display screen
The 5th axis clamp confirmation function at
7 Ineffective Effective 0
rapid feedrate is effective.
The 6th axis clamp confirmation function at
0 Ineffective Effective 0
rapid feedrate is effective.
1
Collision Avoidance G131 alarm (2058) Does not detect
2 Detects alarm. 0
detection alarm.
Rotary axis command during radius
3 No alarm Alarm 0
compensation (G41, G42)
With the tool radius compensation function an
alarm is raised if the tool radius compensation
4 Alarm No alarm 0
value is larger than the arc radius of the
program command.
76 An error is raised if a pallet is loaded with setup
ST 2 or 3 with PPC mode OFF in using the PPC
5 Error Not error 0
function.
1: Error 0: Not error
Tool life prediction alarm (alarm D 4286) is not
displayed when using the tool life prediction
6 Not displayed Displayed 0
function.
1: Not displayed 0: Displayed
No spare tool alarm (alarm C 3277) is not
displayed when using the tool life warning
7 Not displayed Displayed 0
function.
1: Not displayed 0: Displayed
 6115-E P-417
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
With automatic tool length offset and breakage
0.5 mm inside Current position +
0 detection, the Z-axis limit escape position is 0.5 0
from the limit Z1m position
mm inside from the limit.
The attachment length is not added to tool axis
1 Not added Added 0
direction tool length offset (G171).
Specifying the
Correction number method for tool breakage Fixed correction
2 correction no. 0
detection in magazine no. method
method
77 An alarm is displayed if there is a group in which Alarm not
3 Alarm displayed 0
all tools are NG in the same group. displayed
4 0
When using the FS9 tape convert function, the
5 Effective Ineffective 0
local variable extension function is effective.
M130 is issued when turning on the power or
6 Issue M130 Issue M131 0
resetting the NC.
Clear MDI program buffer display when
7 Clear Not clear 0
resetting.
0 Dry run is disabled during the fixed cycle. Disabled Enabled 0
The F0 command raises no alarm. F0 applies
1 the setting value in NC optional parameter long No alarm Alarm
word No.62.
2 0
If a sub program having the same name as the
main program before and after the main
3 CALL after CALL before 0
program (CALL sentence), the one given after is
called.
Alarm level when a shift amount should be set in
78 4 execution of tool nose point control and tool Alarm D Alarm A 0
length offset in tool axis direction.
Attachment rotation correction is displayed in
5 New screen Old screen 0
the new screen.
Movement direction in linear axis movement Coordinate axis Tool axis
with 5-axis machining "3D feed" (can be direction with direction,
6 0
switched only with 1 rotary axis table axis + 1 table base tool axis right
spindle axis type) coordinate angle direction
In sequence number search when there are two
Search from the Search from the
7 or more same sequence numbers, the function 0
current pointer top
searches starting from the current pointer.
 6115-E P-418
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
The correction value with manual measurement
0 and automatic measurement is set to the tool Effective Ineffective 0
nose incomplete part correction value.
The correction value with automatic tool
correction is set to the tool nose incomplete part
1 correction value. Effective Ineffective 0
Set to tool nose incomplete part correction value
at writing the tool length system variable.
Alarm level not during automatic operation
2 mode when changed from individual operation Alarm D Alarm C 0
79 to linked operation via DNC-C.
3
Type of operation at tool radius compensation
4 Type A Type B 0
start or canceling.
Use G01 for the special ID/OD measurement
5 Yes (G01) No (G00) 0
return command.
Change the clamping method for maximum
6 Effective Ineffective 0
cutting speed on issuing G1 command
NC alarm D is not displayed while an error is
7 Not displayed Displayed 0
being raised on the PPC panel side.
The G39 (corner arc interpolation function)
0 command is effective with tool radius Effective Alarm 0
compensation function.
The G39 (corner arc interpolation function)
Automatically Not automatically
1 command is automatically inserted with tool 0
inserted inserted
radius compensation function.
The number of The number of
2 SSB search method switching SSB files is not SSB files is 0
limited. limited.
3
80 17 and 18 refer to 17 and 18 refer to
The reference destination is switched between
lower digit 1 byte upper digit 1 byte
4 VDIN[17](VDOUT[17]) and 0
and upper digit 1 and lower digit 1
VDIN[18](VDOUT[18]) data.
byte respectively. byte respectively.
If an energy saving alarm is displayed, the
5 Turned off Not turned off 0
screen display is turned off.
Done by
Returning after tool measurement contact is G01F=PF5
6 Done by G00 0
done by G1. PF5 initial value:
5m/min
VPRT bit4 is specification bit of "reading space
7 Yes No 1
suppress".
 6115-E P-419
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Distance is effective in tool life management
0 Effective Ineffective 0
mode.
No life prediction alarm is raised if the tool life
prediction function indicates a life predicted
1 No alarm Alarm 0
group which is also indicated as the tool life
warning target.
The G05 command is converted by adding the
Converted to Converted only to
2 high-accuracy machining mode command (J0) 0
G131 J0 G131
with FS9 tape convert function.
The time constant adjustment axis specification
87 3 Ineffective Effective 0
(G437) is ineffective.
The workpiece coordinate number is returned to
modal workpiece coordinate number (H of G15
4 Returned Not returned 0
command) with reset/power OFF of G16
command.
5 Large capacity operation by sub program Effective Ineffective 0
On standard On enlarged
6 The load is displayed on the enlarged screen. 0
screen screen
On standard On enlarged
7 The tool is displayed on the enlarged screen. 0
screen screen
Initialization of tool weight value at tool setting in Effective
0 the tool ID information screen of TOOL-ID is Ineffective (initialized to 0
ineffective (not initialized). 1000)
Effective/ineffective selection with high-speed Control OFF Control ON/OFF
1 0
contour cutting function during tool grooving constantly possible
The device used for large capacity operation by
2 HD0: TC: 0
sub program is HD0:.
Inquiry confirmation at tool ID information
3 (P970, P971) parameter reading with TOOL-ID Not made Made 0
88 is not made.
High-speed pick feed (Super-NURBS)
4 Ineffective Effective 0
acceleration rate increase function is ineffective.
High-speed pick feed (Super-NURBS) curve
5 Ineffective Effective 0
function is ineffective.
High-speed pick feed (Super-NURBS)
6 machining tolerance expansion function is Ineffective Effective 0
ineffective.
High-speed pick feed (Super-NURBS) pick
7 Ineffective Effective 0
specification function is ineffective.
 6115-E P-420
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Inductosyn system error correction
0 NC-6th axis error measurement function Effective Ineffective 0
effective bit
Effective
Manual feed in tool axis direction is effective. Ineffective
(manual feed in
1 (For indexing attachments except for universal (manual feed on 0
tool axis
B and C) Inclined surface)
direction)
When the G39 command (corner arc Cancelled and
interpolation) is executed, the G39 command is performs regular Displays an alarm
2 0
cancelled if interference with the arc end point radius to stop operation.
occurs. compensation.
89 Setting possible
The rotary axis parameter (rotary axis (Setting is Setting
3 0
attribution) for 5-axis machining can be set. impossible after impossible
the power cycle.)
4 0
Data deletion is processed with Machining Navi
5 M-i VFA->NC acceleration rate information Not deleted Deleted 0
(receiving B buffer).
The screen to set inductosyn error correction
6 Displayed Not displayed 0
effective/ineffective is displayed.
The ACS G00 slacking path simulation is
7 Performed Not performed 0
performed.
The E command in turning cut ON command
0 (G149) is a relative value from the spindle offset Relative value Not relative value 0
value.
1
2 G00 linear interpolation Hi-G function Effective Ineffective 1
3
A-axis angle with the C-axis identification A90 degrees A-90 degrees
90 4 0
function. (M-33TU) (MU-500VA)
The C-axis identification command (G429) is
5 done by the automatic weight parameter setting Yes No 0
function (G448).
The tool position compensation curve is
6 Effective Ineffective 0
effective.
The workpiece cutting function at ACS
7 Effective Ineffective 0
sequence return is effective / ineffective.
 6115-E P-421
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
Cut from the side Cut from the side
0 Order of down step cutting in M-LAP bar cycle. close to the cycle far from the cycle 0
reference point reference point
The alarm level is alarm C if there is a group in
1 Alarm C Alarm D 0
which all tools are NG in the same group.
With the individual spindle speed variation
2 control function, the variation control is turned Turned off Not turned off 0
off at tool change.
The THiNC-API (custom API) start effective
3 Effective Ineffective 0
function is effective / ineffective.
103 No alarm is raised with 0 (zero) command in the
4 No alarm Alarm 0
G04 command.
The PPC schedule is started when the PPC
schedule is set to continuous even if the screen
5 Started Not started 0
does not display the operation mode as long as
it is during automatic operation mode.
The offset amount is not considered with the
6 relative current position (including inclined Not considered Considered 0
surface and tool) display.
The machining diameter increasing arithmetic
Approximate Theoretical
7 expression with turning cut function is 0
expression expression
approximate expression.
Not used
The maximum spindle speed in the user area is
(The spindle
not used for the TOOL-ID spindle speed limit Used
speed
0 (registered to each TOOL-ID tool number). (The user area is 0
correspondence
(= The spindle speed is limited according to the used.)
table for each tool
spindle speed registered to each tool group.)
group is used.)
The DA/DB/DC command uses the offset value
1 with the tool number in the G41 or G42 No Yes 0
command block.
TOOL-ID ID tag read/write method applies the
Protocol method Protocol method
2 protocol corresponding to the FANUC ID 0
for FANUC for OSP
controller.
With the tool life management function, NG tool
104 3 is displayed when the remaining hour or Effective Ineffective 0
remaining item is "0".
Checked Not checked
Duplication check for the same tool number at
4 (tool mounting (tool mounting 0
P300 TOOL-ID tool mounting.
impossible) possible)
With the TOOL-ID FANUC protocol method, tool
5 Nos. in the tool No. area are written with left Left aligned Right aligned 0
aligned.
The value set in The actual tool
6 P300M MOP-TOOL compatible mode VIDT is MOP tool no. is MOP tool 0
no. no.
When the spindle speed setting (limit) function
7 is provided, the spindle speed setting function Not used Used 0
supporting TOOL-ID is not used.
 6115-E P-422
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
The screen is changed to the RUN screen by
0 pressing the P300M manual operation mode Changed Not changed 0
key
Blanks used in P300M animation simulation are
1 Registered Not registered 0
registered by the NC code.
Tool shapes used in P300M animation
2 Registered Not registered 0
simulation are registered by system variable.
3
When the P300M tool length shift function is
Not temporary
105 4 effective, operation is not temporary halted Temporary halted 0
halted
when the measurement macro is skipped.
When the P300M tool length shift function is
effective, operation is not temporary halted Not temporary
5 Temporary halted 0
when the axis reaches the limit with the rapid halted
feed command.
When performing P300M manual/ interaction
measurement "2-point measurement between
6 Not checked Checked 0
end faces", the positional relation of contact is
not checked.
7 P300M UGC command operation is effective. Effective Ineffective 0
0 0
1 The stripe pattern reducing control is effective. Effective Ineffective 1
When a turning tool is indexed, the spindle
2 Effective Ineffective 1
angle is sent to the Collision Avoidance System.
Alarm B 2058 is raised if the axis travel
command, M19, M118, and M119 are specified
3 at the same time when the actual tool is a Alarm raised Alarm not raised 1
turning tool in the Collision Avoidance System
and the lathe function.
Alarm D 4080 is raised while the spindle is
106 being indexed or the spindle index command is
4 being executed when the actual tool is a turning Alarm raised Alarm not raised 1
tool in the Collision Avoidance System and lathe
function.
Switching of DNC-T3 running hour (operation Conventional
5 New method 1
time) and alarm status (history) detail method
The model data are updated if the tool model is
6 Not updated Updated 0
changed with magazine supply tool.
With the TOOL-ID FANUC protocol method,
7 user area: extension tool kind area is written Right aligned Left aligned 0
with left aligned.
 6115-E P-423
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0 The graphic is scaled. (7th axis) Scaled Not scaled 0
1 The graphic is scaled. (8th axis) Scaled Not scaled 0
The 7th axis is cancelled when the axis
2 Cancelled Not cancelled 0
command cancel SW is turned ON.
The 8th axis is cancelled when the axis
3 Cancelled Not cancelled 0
command cancel SW is turned ON.
107
The last positioning direction of the 7th axis at
4 N direction P direction 0
uni-direction positioning (G60)
The last positioning direction of the 8th axis at
5 N direction P direction 0
uni-direction positioning (G60)
6 0
7 0
The short-cut command M635 when the 7th axis
0 M635 M633 0
rotary axis is reset.
The short-cut command M638 when the 8th axis
1 M638 M636 0
rotary axis is reset.
2 0
3 0
Inductosyn system error correction (NO.74 bit 0
108 for 7th axis)
4 Effective Ineffective 0
NC-7th axis error measurement function
effective bit
Inductosyn system error correction (NO.74 bit 0
for 8th axis)
5 Effective Ineffective 0
NC-8th axis error measurement function
effective bit
6 0
7 0
0
1
2
Super Hi-NC/Hi-CUT protocol in fixed cycle
3 Effective Ineffective 0
(G73/G83) is effective.
109
4 Signal conditions in the axis speed range New method Old method 0
5 Pop-up display at Servo Navi M operation start Displayed Not displayed 1
6 The high-speed cutting mode is effective. Ineffective Effective 0
Limit stop is conducted at manual feed with the
7 Alarm D limit stop Alarm A stop 0
B-axis rotation interlock function.
 6115-E P-424
SECTION 1 APPENDIX

Bit
No. Description (1) (0) Default
No.
0
The machining completion information is not
1 Not cleared Cleared 0
cleared after the PPC pallet is unloaded.
The actual tool is included with spare tool
2 Included Not included 0
change in the tool life management function.
3
110 With the automatic zero offset in interactive The
workpiece measurement, the offset target axis measurement The X/Y axis is
4 1
of the center between end faces (2 points) is target axis is offset.
included in the measurement target axes. offset.
5
6
7
If the command is not specified to all the X-, Y-
and Z-axis in the first travel command made
after the inclined surface machining function ON (not
OFF (displayed/
0 ON/OFF (G69/G68) command or inclined displayed/not 0
suspended)
surface coordinate conversion command (G469, suspended)
G468), no alarm D is displayed nor is the
operation suspended temporarily.
If the first travel command made after the
inclined surface machining function ON/OFF
(G69/G68) command or inclined surface ON (no alarm is OFF (alarm is
114 1 0
coordinate conversion command (G469, G468) displayed) displayed)
is not a positioning (G00) or linear interpolation
(G01) command, no alarm is displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
 6115-E P-425
SECTION 2 CODE TABLE

SECTION 2 CODE TABLE

2-1. EIA/ISO Code Table

EIA Code ISO Code

Channel Channel Remarks HEX
Character Character
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 ● ● 0 ● ● ● Numerical character 0 30
1 ● ● 1 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 1 B1
2 ● ● 2 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 2 B2
3 ● ● ● ● 3 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 3 33
4 ● ● 4 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 4 B4
5 ● ● ● ● 5 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 5 35
6 ● ● ● ● 6 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 6 36
7 ● ● ● ● 7 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 7 B7
8 ● ● 8 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 8 B8
9 ● ● ● ● 9 ● ● ● ● ● Numerical character 9 39
A ● ● ● ● A ● ● ● Alphabetical character A 41
B ● ● ● ● B ● ● ● Alphabetical character B 42
C ● ● ● ● ● ● C ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character C C3
D ● ● ● ● D ● ● ● Alphabetical character D 44
E ● ● ● ● ● ● E ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character E C5
F ● ● ● ● ● ● F ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character F C6
G ● ● ● ● ● ● G ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character G 47
H ● ● ● ● H ● ● ● Alphabetical character H 48
I ● ● ● ● ● ● I ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character I C9
J ● ● ● ● J ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character J CA
K ● ● ● ● K ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character K 4B
L ● ● ● ● L ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character L CC
M ● ● ● ● M ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character M 4D
N ● ● ● ● N ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character N 4E
Alphabetical character O
O ● ● ● ● O ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (program number or CF
program name)
P ● ● ● ● ● ● P ● ● ● Alphabetical character P 50
Q ● ● ● ● Q ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character Q D1
R ● ● ● ● R ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character R D2
S ● ● ● ● S ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character S 53
T ● ● ● ● T ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character T D4
U ● ● ● ● U ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character U 55
V ● ● ● ● V ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character V 56
W ● ● ● ● W ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character W D7
X ● ● ● ● ● ● X ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character X D8
Y ● ● ● ● Y ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character Y 59
 6115-E P-426
SECTION 2 CODE TABLE

EIA Code ISO Code

Channel Channel Remarks HEX
Character Character
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Z ● ● ● ● Z ● ● ● ● ● Alphabetical character Z 5A
+ ● ● ● ● + ● ● ● ● ● Plus Sign 2B
- ● ● - ● ● ● ● ● Minus Sign 2D
Block Delete or Division
/ ● ● ● ● / ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 5F
Symbol
BLANK ● NUL ● Null 0
SPACE ● ● SPACE ● ● ● Space *1 C0
TAB ● ● ● ● ● ● HT ● ● ● Tabulation 9
ER ● ● ● ● % ● ● ● ● ● Program start C5
CR/EOB ● ● NL/LF ● ● ● End of block 0A
● CR ● ● ● ● ● Carrier return *1 8D
. ● ● ● ● ● ● . ● ● ● ● ● Period 2E
, ● ● ● ● ● ● , ● ● ● ● ● Comma AC
DEL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DEL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Delete *1 FF
BS ● ● ● ● BS ● ● ● Backspace *1 88
& ● ● ● ● & ● ● ● ● ● Ampersand A6
● ●
Control OUT (comment
( ● ● ● ● ( ● ● ● 28
start)
Control IN (end of
) ● ● ● ● ) ● ● ● ● ● A9
comment)
Dollar symbol (block
$ ● ● ● 24
release)
* ● ● ● ● ● Multiplication symbol AA
= ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Equal sign BD
? ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Question mark 3F
[ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Left square bracket DB
] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Right square bracket DD
Colon (program name or
: ● ● ● ● ● 3A
program number)
; ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Semicolon EH
*1: Disregarded if used as machining data.
 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Publication No. Date Edition

6115-E November 2012 1st

6115-E-R1 November 2012 2nd

6115-E-R2 January 2013 3rd

6115-E-R3 July 2014 4th

6115-E-R4 December 2014 5th

6115-E-R5 December 2015 6th

6115-E-R6 July 2016 7th

6115-E-R7 August 2016 8th

6115-E-R8 March 2017 9th

6115-E-R9 September 2017 10th

6115-E-R10 February 2018 11th

Original Instruction Manual

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual,
please contact your OKUMA representative.